Home

AIX 5L Guide to Printers and Printing - Support On Line

1. To terminate press Enter w 60 Name Description Value Ww COLUMNS per page 60 To LIST attributes enter AttributeNamel for all attributes To CHANGE an attribute value enter AttributeName NewValu o FORMAT and EDIT an attribute value enter AttributeName v o EDIT the attribute file enter v o terminate press Enter The new value of w is displayed This example would result in the page width for this queue being permanently set to 60 columns Entering v and pressing Enter will result in something like the following being displayed Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 123 056 FLG 62520 DyEn 626 C DyEn O25 C DyEn 628 CE S E DyEn 629 CF 5S F DyEn 630 CG S G DyEn 622 Ca DyS G500 1 1810532 EnR pioattri1 cat 1 631 diagl do not print job di Splay main pipeline and pre processing filter diag2 do not pr int job displa y all pipelines and filters display print job display all pi pelines and fil ters ignore print job ignore stderr produced by filters nor mal print jo b exit if filters produce stderr al a0Nx27 Nx27 A3 a0Nx27 x2 7 A2 a0Nx27 Nx 27 A0 a0Nx27 Nx27 A1 G a t a I a e a I aNx27 Nx27 A I A 674 Cs S B005 1 1810500 EnC s pl R WO s 1I sNx27 Nx27 p I p 0133 AtDnEDR OU L 2 3 21 789 E S B020 I 1810501 IW
2. 0cce eect eee e eens Adding a File to an Existing Queue 0 ees Pr requisites east ahve be eae Av emp eae ee SMICCOMMANG srt Mave anemia te e tae ty de Pale cr UE Configuring Nonsupported Printers 000 eee eee eee eee eee Configuration Options s serieei aaan iaaa ea Eea enn Customizing Nonsupported Virtual Printers llle Wiring Nonsupported Printers lsllsseeseeee m Printing with Terminal Attached Printers sseesseeeeeeeseseeee Supported Hardware 0 0 cece eee nn Installing a Terminal Attached Printer 0 cee cece eee eee Commands and Control Sequences 0 ccc eee teen eee ae Terminfo Database 0 cece eee eens Printer Backend Commands 00 0c cece cece eee eee eens Terminal Attached Printing Limitations 00 cece eee eee Configuring a Printer for an ASCII Display Terminal 2 222 000e Prer quisites 1 ee eerte eps REED pe ug PU BI ete Gonfiguring a Printer enr io eased DER D me Ee T Dex aX rri Listing Print Queues and Print Queue Devices usseeeeeleeeeeesss Prer quisites s 15 ode a e nene e UE eU pa ERI Meee Guide to Printers and Printing 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 7 2 7 2 8 2 8 2 9 2 9 2 9 2 9 2 10 2 10 2 10 2 10 2 10 2 10 2 10 2 11 2 11 2 11 2 11 2 12 2 12 2 12 2 12 2 12 2 12 2 12 2 12 2 1
3. 0 0 cece eee eee ees Texas Instruments Printer Support Printers Pass Through Mode OmniLaser 2115 Page Printer 000000 Printer Device Driver Pass Through Mode 0 eee eee eee eee es Formatter Filter Pass Through Mode cece eee eens Viewing Formatting or Modifying Virtual Printer Definitions Modifying the mi mp and _d Attributes on a PostScript Queue How piobe Uses Prin ter Colon Files csse RII Spooler Job Header and Trailer Pages 000 cece eee Header and Trailer Page Pipelines 00 cece eee eee ees Custom Header Pages 00 c cece cee eect ee eee teens Modifying the mo Virtual Printer Attribute 0 0 eee eee eee Handling Unsupported IP Addressable Terminal Servers Fillers Livins Filter that Maps Linefeeds to Carriage Returns and Linefeeds Editing the etc qconfig File 0 0c cece teens Modifying the etc qconfig File while Jobs are Processing Creating Queue with an Editor 2 0 ccc eee Chapter 5 Troubleshooting the Base Operating System Spooler Local Printer Checklist eere tete ete n Lo e Wate ented Pe n Inoperative Printer Checklist uuena 00 ccc eee eee eee mme Remote Printer Checklist osas terrina dunke cece cent E EER Na Adapter Consideratio
4. 0 0 eee eens Customizing Printer Configuration 00 cece eee Setting Default Printer Page Size and Spacing 00cee eee eee Configuring Banners 00 cece eee eee eee eae Administering the etc Ip Systems File 0 0 ccc cece ees Printer Models Fi f MONTE TWEEN CETT Mar Pass PS alg nae Printer Interface Scripts 0 0 cece cette eens Using the terminfo Database 0 00 cece eects Creating a Printer Form 02 cece eee eens Adding a Form to the Print Service 0 00 cee eee cece Removing a Form senem recede dere depre den be eee Restricting User Access to Forms 2 000 c cece eee e eee eres Mounting a Form Unmounting a Form 1 tenet tenes Examining a FOr a uox ve fue RP Xrestexrde bebee ha wile nr ERE EEAS Providing Filters Task 1 Converting Files 0 00 eee enn Task 2 Handling Special Modes toe Wad ars Ae ERR ga rate ee Task 3 Detecting Printer Faults 00 cece eect eee Defining a Filter Adding a Filter to the Print Service 00 0 0 ccc cee eee Hermovirig a F Iter eS eR AE AE rn RR ERR RM Examining a Filter eder e er ween ed RE ER PECES Restoring Factory Defaults for Filters 00 000 cece eee eee ee Printer Types Content Types PostScript Printers Using a PostSeript Printer isi seesed se once bate gg bu eb efeidze bs Supporting Non PostScrip
5. is appended without the single quotes to the previous string becoming usr lib lpd pio etc pioformat otherwise known as the full path name to the formatter driver The after pioformat is a flag to the pioformat command which in this instance specifies the full path name of the digested database file to be accessed The value of the flag is specified by the concatenation of ldd and lmm The value of ldd is defined in the colon file as 9el 25 ddi The 5 is an automatic variable whose value is var spool 1lpd pio local so Idd resolves to var spool lpd pio 810ocal ddi The without the single quotes is appended to that path elmm is defined in the colon file as mt md mn mq mv and other virtual printer attributes These attributes define e mt Printer type e md Output data stream type 4 128 Guide to Printers and Printing e mn Device name e mq Queue name name of a queue stanza in etc qconfig e mv Virtual printer name name of a corresponding device stanza in etc qconfig These file virtual printer attributes are initialized by the piodigest command at the time the queue and virtual printer are created The combination of the five is unique in the virtual printer database For this queue the value of mt md mn mq mv is ibm4029 asc lp1 asc lp1 Thus the value of the flag to pioformat becomes var spool lpd pio 8local ddi ibm4029 asc lpl asc lpl the full path of the digested da
6. cr cpi Ipi chr cvr csnm mgc hpa cud1 cuf swidm rwidm ff ist is2 is3 if iprog cud cuf rep vpa SCS smgb smgbp smgl smglp smgr smgrp smgt smgtp scsd ht Vertical resolution in units per line Vertical resolution in units per inch Average print rate in characters per second Carriage return Change number of characters per inch Change number of lines per inch Change horizontal resolution Change vertical resolution List of character set names Clear all margins top bottom and sides Horizontal position absolute Down one line Carriage right Enable double wide printing Disable double wide printing Page eject Printer initialization string Printer initialization string Printer initialization string Name of initialization file Path name of initializing program Move carriage down lines Move carriage right columns Repeat a character times Absolute vertical position Select character set Set bottom margin at current line Set bottom margin Set left margin at current column Set left margin Set right margin at current column Set right margin Set top margin at current line Set top margin Start definition of a character set Tab to next 8 space tab stop The items marked with an asterisk are available on your system The remainder of the definitions can be added Guide to Printers and Printing Creating a Printer Form A preprinted printer form is a blank paper for
7. Q 2 Legal 9 Com 9 Q 3 B5 JIS B5 10 Com 10 Q 4 A4 DL Q 5 Executive C5 Q 6 A5 B5 Envelope Q 7 Custom Universal Other Envelope Note For PCL queues if the selected size is not in the selected input source a search sequence will be used to find the size requested If the size is found that source will be used For PostScript queues if the selected size is not in the selected input source the printer will prompt the user to load the source with the appropriate size This may result in an unexpected paper source being used or an operator panel message that may not make sense at first Refer to the manual to determine appropriate responses Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 99 Pitch Collation Separator Pages 4 100 Guide to Printers and Printing Pitch selection is supported for the PCL 5 emulation by using the p flag for pitch and the s flag for font name or type face with the qprt command Pitch values between 1 and 100 characters per inch cpi in whole integers are supported The condensed print flag K is not supported Font Name Pitch s courier p 1 to 100 s courier bold p 1 to 100 s courier italic p 1 to 100 s courier bolditalic p 1 to 100 S gothic p 1 to 100 s gothic bold p 1 to 100 S gothic italic p 1 to 100 s lineprinter p 17 Note To format ASCII for other font style
8. The Optra W810 printer supports this option if it has an optional Finisher installed The valid values for y are y Off y n The Optra W810 printer supports this option if it has an optional Finisher installed The valid values for e are e Off e n The Optra W810 printer supports this option if it has an optional Finisher installed The valid values for o are oOff o n The equal sign is the command line option for specifying the output destination Valid values are standard bin bin 1 bin 2 bin 3 bin 4 bin 5 bin 6 bin 7 bin 8 bin 9 10bin 10 The default value for the output destination is the standard bin 0 O o Oo OC 5 ON O Lexmark Plus Printer Models 2380 3 2381 3 2390 3 2391 3 Paper Source Pitch Font and Quality Paper source selection is supported by using the u flag of the qprt command utfactor 1 uractor 2 The banner and trailer pages use the same source as the print job It is suggested that the printer be attended when switching between tractors Pitch selection is supported by using the p flag for the pitch the s flag for font name and q flag of the qprt command for print quality The default values supported include 10pitch courier font q uality 1 or draft The valid font values include Font Name gast draft raft Scourier gothic gprestige 239x only spresenter 239x only sorator 23
9. e Verify that the AUX port on the terminal is configured with the same settings as your printer To do this consult your terminal documentation for information about setting values for the AUX port Consult your printer documentation for information about configuring the printer serial interface e You must have root user authority Configuring a Printer 1 At the system prompt type smit mkpq 2 Select the ascii attachment type manufacturer and printer model 3 Provide additional information as prompted You can also perform this task with the usr lib Ipd pio etc piomkpq command Listing Print Queues and Print Queue Devices The following procedures apply to both local and remote print queues as well as print queue devices Prerequisites e The printer devices must be attached to your system for local print queues and print queue devices e Your system must be configured to communicate with a remote host for remote print queues and print queue devices Listing Print Queues 1 At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers 2 In the Web based System Manager Printer Queues window use the menus to complete the steps to list print queues Printers Print Jobs and Queues for Systems Administrators 2 21 You can also perform this task with the 1sallq command or with the SMIT fast path smit lspq Listing Print Queue Devices 1 At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers 2 In the Web based System Ma
10. 20 96z Pops the two 1 s off the stack compares them for equality and pushes the resultant 1 onto the stack 21 t Pops the 1 off the stack and since it is a TRUE non zero values calls for the evaluation of Gs1 22 96 Gs1 Pushes a 1 onto the stack 23 d Pops the 1 off the stack and returns it in ASCII format to the in progress calculation of wK 24 Pq Pops the 1 off the stack and stores it in the internal variable q 25 GWu This value is already known so a 1 is pushed onto the stack 26 3 Pushes a 3 onto the stack 27 lt Pops the top two values off the stack a 3 and a 1 and since 1 is less than 3 pushes a 1 onto the stack 28 t Pops the 1 off the stack and since it is a TRUE non zero value calls for the evaluation of pq 29 9epq Pushes the value of the internal variable q a 1 onto the stack 30 9e 1 Pushes a 1 onto the stack 31 9ez Pops the top two values two 1 s off the stack compares them for equality and pushes the resultant 1 onto the stack 32 t Pops the 1 off the stack and since it is a TRUE non zero value calls for the evaluation of 3200 33 3200 Pushes a 3200 onto the stack 34 d Pops the 3200 off the stack and returns it to the in progress calculation of w 35 96G p Pushes a 12 onto the stack 36 17 Pushes a 17 onto the stack 37 9ez Pops the top two values a 17 and a 12 off the stack compares
11. 3 Select Stop all Devices for Queue to stop a queue Select Stop a Specific Device to stop a device 2 22 Guide to Printers and Printing You can also perform this task with the following commands smit qstop OR qadm D QueueName Setting the Default Print Queue Prerequisites To perform this task you must be one of the following e A user with root authority e A member of the printq group Procedure 1 At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers 2 In the Web based System Manager Printer Queues window select a computer object 3 Select a queue from the Selected menu You can also perform this task with the SMIT fast path smit qdefault Holding and Releasing a Print Job qhld Command Prerequisites To hold or release a print job you must be one of the following e Print job owner e A user with root authority e A member of the printq group Procedure 1 At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers 2 In the Web based System Manager Printer Queues window use the menus to complete the steps to hold a print job or to release a print job currently on hold You can also hold a print job using the following commands smit qhld OR qhld JobNumber OR qhld P Queue OR qhld u User You can release a print job using the following commands qhld r Jobnumber qhld r P Queue Printers Print Jobs and Queues for Systems Administrators 2 23 ghld r u User Moving a
12. 4 130 Guide to Printers and Printing Ide INCLUDE Directory Containing Miscellaneous Modules pioburst SF H If H Argument on Command Line 4 Argument OUTPUT r r Idb INCLUDE Directory Containing Header and Trailer Text Files SMYHEADER SIde INCLUDE Directory Containing Miscellaneous Modules pioformat SIdd INCLUDE Directory Containing Digested Data Base Files d di Imm INCLUDE File Name Of Digested Data Base Init By piodigest mt md mn mq mv LEE Idf INCLUDE Directory Containing Loadable Formatter Routines piof5202 L J SIsH INCLUDE FORMATTING FLAGS for header page r u SIuH INCLUDE Input PAPER TRAY for header page To enable the user susan to get custom header pages with this queue the root user could use the following procedure cp usr lib lpd pio burst H ascii usr lib lpd pio burst H susan e EditH susan to Susan s taste in header pages e Set the environment variable MYHEADER in Susan s environment to H susan for instance in the Korn shell use export MYHEADER H susan When the user susan submits a job to this queue the sh attribute s reference to a header page template will resolve to usr lib lpd pio burst H susan and the user susan will receive a custom header page The problem with this scenario is that the environment variable MYHEADER must be defined for
13. EBetween Copies EBetween Jobs EBietween Pages The paper source defaults to Feeder To change the default the uS attribute must be changed in the virtual printer The valid values for uS are the same as the paper source flag u except that manual feed is not a valid source Note This function is independent of the B flag of the qprt command Lexmark Optra Color 1200 Printer 4 74 Paper Source Guide to Printers and Printing Paper source selection is supported for both the PCL 5 emulation and the PostScript Language by using the u flag of the qprt command ur anual feed utiay 1 ut ay 2 ut amp ayy 3 ur ultipurpose feeder By default the banner and trailer pages come from the tray 1 To change the default change the values for the uH and or uT attributes respectively in the colon file to the value for the desired paper source Valid values are the same as for the u flag Do this by editing the virtual printer colon file by using the chvirprt command Paper Size Paper size selection is supported by using the qprt command flags O and Q The O flag controls paper versus envelope A O value of 3 indicates a paper size and 4 an envelope size The values 1 and 2 were skipped for backward compatibility The first five paper sizes are also numbered for backward compatibility Whenever an invalid value for the input source is selected it will be ignored Note Envelopes are availab
14. Internal variables a through z are integer variables for use by P Z and g They are initialized to zero and their values change only if a P or Z changes them There are two independent sets of these variables one set is used by the piobe command for building pipelines while the other set is used exclusively by a formatter The values for a formatter s set are maintained for the duration of the formatter s processing 9eP a z Pops an integer value from the stack and stores it in the specified internal variable For example Pf moves an integer value from the stack to variable f Z a Z Zeroes the specified internal variable For example Zg stores a value of 0 in variable g 9eg a z Pushes the value of the specified internal variable onto the stack The value of the internal variable is not changed For example gb reads the integer value in variable b and pushes it onto the stack Arithmetic Operators Yor 96 96 YM Sor l 9om Pushes the result onto the stack Adds the first two values popped off the stack For example 5 6 pushes a value of 11 onto the stack Subtracts the first value popped off the stack from the second value popped off the stack For example 12 3 pushes a value of 9 onto the stack Multiplies the first two values popped off the stack For example 2 3 pushes a value of 6 onto the stack Divides the first value popped off the stack into the second
15. s gothic p 1 to 100 s gothic bold p 1 to 100 S gothic italic p 1 to 100 s lineprinter p 17 Note To format ASCII for other font styles use the base operating system enscript utility or the da flag to a PostScript queue with the qprt command Only a pitch of 17 is supported for the lineprinter font style The qprt command line option Y supports this 0 simplex operation 1 duplex long edge binding 2 duplex short edge binding Normally the CN command line option is used to specify the number of copies desired This method will cause that many copies of the entire print job to be submitted or queued to the print system Since the Optra T supports collation internally options were added to support it and the number of copies of each page internally This functionality is limited by the amount of memory installed in your printer and the size of the job The W option determines how many copies of each page is desired where is the number of copies The S option controls whether collation is desired The default is or not The main advantages of using the W and S options are to conserve printer subsystem usage and allow the printer to handle multiple copies instead of sending copies to the printer Using the S options with the W also allows copies of each page in a row if that is desired Note that using N and W simultaneously is allowed This would result in N print
16. Customizing Configure the device as a supported printer if the nonsupported printer uses the same hardware interface serial or parallel and closely approximates the functions of a supported printer Configure your printer as a supported printer if there are no supported printers similar to yours Change the virtual printer characteristics to accommodate your printer Use generic as the printer type and the appropriate interface type if you are unsure if your printer emulates a supported device The operating system supplies two generic devices other parallel printer opp and other serial printer osp Specify one of these devices by selecting the interface type such as parallel rs232 and modify the characteristics according to the specifications in your printer manual Configure your printer device driver and print queue but set the print subsystem to pass all print requests transparently to the printer With this configuration the application must correctly assemble the printer data stream The print spooling subsystem is available for sharing the printer among users but the virtual printer system does not format the printer data stream If your output device has special formatting requirements such as an electrostatic plotter that requires input as raster graphics substitute the formatting software for the printer formatter or the printer backend program Nonsupported Virtual Printers You must define a virtual printer to su
17. Indicates double high print is not wanted A one character identifier that specifies a filter through which your print file or files are to be passed before being sent to the printer The available filter identifiers are p which invokes the pr filter and n which processes output from the troff command Causes each line to be indented the specified number of spaces The Number variable must be included in the page width specified by the w flag Specifies whether condensed print is wanted Indicates condensed print is wanted Indicates condensed print is not wanted Sets the page length to the specified number of lines If the Number variable is 0 page length is ignored and the output is considered to be one continuous page The page length includes the top and bottom margins and indicates the printable length of the paper Printers Print Jobs and Queues Overview for Users 1 5 L Option N Number p Number P Queue QueueDevice Q Value t Number w Number W Option z Value Value 1 6 Guide to Printers and Printing Specifies whether lines wider than the page width should be wrapped to the next line or truncated at the right margin T Indicates that long lines should wrap to the next line Indicates that long lines should not wrap but instead should be truncated at the right margin Specifies the number of copies to be printed If this flag is not specified one copy is p
18. Moving a Printer to Another Port Prerequisites 2 002 0000 Procedure 3 iuge hir sd ans Changing or Showing Printer Characteristics uussa c cece e eee eens Prerequisite eee eee eee Web based System Manager Deleting a Printer 00 Prerequisites 22 00 000 Web based System Manager Remote Printing Overview rembak Program Ipd daemon ee eee eee Managing and Using Remote Printers and Queues 0000 e eee eee Remote Printing and the qconfig File Configuring a Remote Host as a Print Server iilii Using Remote Printers and Queues Using Remote Host Access for Printing Prerequisites 2 02 0000 Using the Ipd Remote Subsystem Prerequisites 2 00 0000 Showing Status of Printer Server Subsystem 00 ccc eee smit Command 00005 Printer Queuing System Status Conditions Preface 2 22 2 22 2 22 2 22 2 23 2 23 2 23 2 23 2 23 2 23 2 24 2 24 2 24 2 24 2 24 2 25 2 25 2 25 2 25 2 25 2 26 2 26 2 26 2 26 2 26 2 26 2 26 2 26 2 26 2 27 2 27 2 27 2 28 2 28 2 28 2 28 2 28 2 28 2 28 2 28 2 28 2 29 2 29 2 30 2 31 2 31 2 32 2 32 2 33 2 33 2 34 2 34 2 35 2 35 2 36 vii viii Chapter 3 Spooler Overview sseeeeeeeeeennnnnne Spooler Introdu
19. p 1 to 100 s courier italic p 1 to 100 s courier bold italic p 1 to 100 s gothic p 1 to 100 s gothic bold p 1 to 100 S gothic italic p 1 to 100 s lineprinter p 17 Note To format ASCII for other font styles use the base operating system enscript utility or the qprt command with the da s and p flags to a PostScript queue For PostScript queues p stands for point size and the valid list of fonts are located in usr lib ps fontmap Valid point sizes are any integer from 1 to 1008 Also only a pitch of 17 is supported for the lineprinter font style The optional duplex feature is supported by the Y flag of the qprt command Ysi mplex Yd plex long edge binding Yduplex short edge binding Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 73 Collation Separator Pages The Optra Plus printer supports collation of multiple copies of a print job internally This feature is controlled by the W and S flags of the qprt command Soollation off Scollation on Sni mber of copies Note This function is independent of the N flag of the qprt command The N flag will cause the printer job to be sent to the printer times The W5 t will send the print job once and copies of the job will be printed The Optra Plus printer supports internally generated separator pages This feature is controlled by the E flag of the qprt command ENone
20. pop2 4 tant 2330 tant 2025 ternal Variable q teger Constan pop2 1 tant 1012 ternal Variable q teger Constant 2 tant 1012 Internal Variable q Integer Constan pop2 3 tant 1087 Internal Variable q Integer Constant pop2 4 tant 1149 Internal Variable q Integer Constan pop2 5 tant 1763 tant 1928 POP ASCII String OUTPUT Calculating Page Lenght Using Printer Colon File Escape Sequence A 4 The calculation of wJ begins by pushing the value of _Q the paper size override for the input paper source onto the stack The value of _Q is defined as elwQ As formatted by the Isvirprt command wQ is defined as follows Paper or Envelope Size For the Paper Source Selected By the O and u Flag Values Refer to the s0 sl s2 s3 and s4 attributes wQ SGWu S 0 S StsGs0SesGWus 1 S StSGsl esGwus 2 StSGs2 esGWus 3 S tSGs3 etGs4 sd 7 lt IF gt GWu PUSH Calculate value for paper source based on O and _u 1 0 PUSH Integer Constant 0 S PUSH pop2 popl St lt THEN gt SGsO0 PUSH PAPER SIZE for manual paper feed Se lt ELSE gt GWu PUSH Calculate value for paper source based on O and _u 1 PUSH Integer Constant 1 S PUSH pop2 popi St lt THEN gt SGsl PUSH PAPER SIZE
21. 2 eie iuei Ro Eu PDRURI EN ee tet ies site died 1 4 smit Gommand reet E eck tar 9 Xon been bane eevee 1 7 Canceling a Print Job qcan Command eeuna eee eee 1 8 Prerequisites 12230 oS ake anne iio VR e UH Eoo ed de eis 1 8 Web based System Manager ssssssesssssseessss sees 1 8 dcan Command ss mra Rise Pas oe wheels Hep daktestaea spews mentees 1 8 Smit Command 5 uu We ie esd peepee nisin AA ee i 1 8 Prioritizing a Print Job qpri Command 00 0c eee eee eee 1 9 PrerequiSitO 2g sate es bane ban ay bende nce wee Dy RE Xe IET EX EM 1 9 Web based System Manager 0 cece eect eee eee eens 1 9 apri Gommarid zi sce ea eed fe pk whet ee eae eae fai ba ah 1 9 smit Gommand 6 bt LSU ates eh eae ete 1 9 Moving a Print Job to Another Print Queue qmov Command 1 10 Prer quisite uu uH mg e EG UE NUR EIU Te RII n 1 10 Web based System Manager ssssssssssesseesssss eens 1 10 gmov Command 2er Eee nter epa pP TR eats eae ea dee Lana 1 10 smit Command e S xESLe r a a a a a Eaa e anii ad 1 10 Holding and Releasing a Print Job qhld Command Luuuuuuusss 1 11 Prerequisitez i 5 cbbsrprel ehsni retiiRRlc bero agb be ae ates ee do bends 1 11 Web based System Manager 2 0 cece eee eee e eee 1 11 ahid Command 0 0c a nee ee eee eae 1 11 SMIU COMMAN za scio sea ame Pine Hap hd put AGaalee eda Mode ava bets 1 11 Checking Print Job S
22. 4 111 Printronix printers 4 112 QMS printers 4 112 TI printers 4 112 spooler defined 1 1 2 3 starting a job 1 4 status conditions 1 13 supported 4 113 listing 2 27 terminal attached 2 15 2 19 installing 2 17 limitations 2 21 nonsupported terminals 2 19 terminology 1 1 virtual 1 2 1 3 attributes described 4 3 distinguished from real 2 3 printer code page translation table 4 34 printer troubleshooting 5 1 8 bit printer attached to 7 bit interface 5 10 adapter considerations 5 4 inoperative printers 5 3 local printer checklist 5 2 qdaemon problems 5 10 queuing system 5 12 remote printer checklist 5 3 terminal attached printer checklist 5 9 printing 1 1 1 10 ASCII files on PostScript printer 1 16 formatting files for 1 14 holding print jobs 1 11 moving print jobs 1 10 releasing print jobs 1 11 printing problems clearing print queue 5 5 deleting files 5 8 reallocating printer resources 5 7 Printronix printers 4 112 processing backend 3 7 ps command 5 4 5 5 pwd command 5 5 Q qcan command 1 8 5 7 qchk command 1 12 qconfig file 2 31 qdaemon 1 2 checklist 5 10 overview 1 2 restarting 5 12 qhld command 1 11 qmov command 1 10 QMS printers 4 112 qpri command 1 9 qprt command 1 4 using X fonts with 4 37 queue device 1 3 print 1 3 queue daemon 5 12 reactivating 5 4 queuing system status conditions 2 36 R real printers 1 3 rembak program 2 29 rem
23. Face Down Top Finisher Bin 2 Face Down Middle Finisher Bin 3 Face Down Bottom oa fF WN o Any Finisher Bin Face Down e Specifies Staple Collation This option flag only works if a face down finisher bin is selected See on page 4 63 option flag 0 Default Printer Setting Portrait Staple Landscape Staple Two Portrait Staples Two Landscape Staples Offset Jog at End of Job Offset Jog at End of Set o0 F Q MN za No Stapling or Collating k Specifies the number of RePro Collated Copies Printer must have a hard disk drive installed to perform this function S Name specifies a type style with the Name variable Examples are courier courier bold courier italic courier bold italic lettergothic lineprinter lettergothic bold lettergothic italic prestigeelite prestigeelite bold prestigeelite italic and prestigeelite bold italic u Sets the paper source to one of the following 0 Use Current Input Source Selected on Printer 1 Tray 1 2 Auxiliary Tray Manual Feed for papers 3 Auxiliary Tray Manual Feed for envelopes 4 Auxiliary Tray automatic 5 Tray2 6 Envelope Tray 7 Tray 3 8 Tray 4 9 Tray 5 Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 63 4 64 Queue Names Guide to Printers and Printing Specifies the paper size for the print job Letter Legal Folio 11x17 A4 B4 A3 Universal Paper Size BJ JIS 10A5 11 Executive 12Statement 1
24. NLS code page translation tables Adding a printer to the printer backend involves adding a printer colon file for that printer In many cases the printer colon file of a similar printer can be duplicated with little modification If modification of an existing printer colon file is not sufficient you can write a print formatter If the modifications exceed the scope of the print formatter you may need to write a new printer backend Refer to the following sections for more information e Adding a Printer Using the Printer Colon File on page 4 48 provides a procedure for duplicating a printer colon file e Printer Colon File Escape Sequences on page 4 13 provides information useful in modifying a printer colon file e Understanding Backend Routines in libqb on page 4 32 and Understanding the Interaction between qdaemon and the Backend on page 4 27 can assist you in writing a new printer backend The procedure for translating NLS code points in the print file to code points for the printers varies depending upon whether the code sets are single byte or multibyte For more information see e Printer Code Page Translation Tables on page 4 34 e Printer Code Page Translation for Multibyte Code Sets on page 4 36 Third party vendors may want to customize the printer backend for special purposes Printer Backend Data Flow 4 2 The primary purpose of a backend is to send characters to a device usually a printer The printer backend
25. Options MODES portrait op MODES land ol A user submitting a file of type troff for printing on a PostScript printer type PS with requests for landscape orientation and a page length of 60 lines would enter the following command lp T troff o length 60 y land d any This filter would be invoked by the print service to convert the file as follows usr lib lp postscript dpost 160 ol pl Example Option Template You add the following option template to the previous example Options MODES group N 1 9 M n l This template is used to convert a MODES option of the form y group number into filter options nnumber System V Printer Configuration 6 25 So if a user gives the command 1p y group 4 the dpost command would include the option n4 For additional examples run the command usr sbin lpfilter f filter en where filter is the name of the factory installed PostScript filters For a list of PostScript filters see PostScript Printers on page 6 29 Adding a Filter to the Print Service To add the filter to the system after it has been defined use one of the following commands usr sbin lpfilter f filter name F filename usr sbin lpfilter f filter name The first command gets the filter definition from a file and the second command gets the filter definition from the standard input A filter name can be any string you choose with a maximum of 14 alphanumeric characters and
26. Select the ascii attachment type manufacturer printer model and tty name 3 Provide additional information as prompted Adding an HP JetDirect Printer to an Existing Queue Prerequisites To perform this task you must be one of the following e User with root authority e A member of the printq group Web based System Manager 1 At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers 2 In the Web based System Manager Printer Queues window use the menus to select the hpJetDirect attachment type manufacturer and printer model 3 Provide additional information as prompted You can also perform this task with the smit mkpqprt fast path command Adding a File to an Existing Queue Prerequisites To perform this task you must be one of the following e User with root authority e A member of the printq group smit Command 1 At the system prompt type smit mkpqprt 2 Select the file attachment type manufacturer and model 3 Type the Name of existing FILE in the dev directory This is the file where you want print job output to be stored The file must already exist and be located in the dev directory 4 Provide additional information as prompted 2 12 Guide to Printers and Printing Configuring Nonsupported Printers A nonsupported printer is a device that is not supplied with the operating system Configuration Options Choose one of the following methods to configure and drive a nonsupported printer
27. Translation Table Example Guide to Printers and Printing 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 10 3 12 3 12 3 13 3 14 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 3 4 13 4 20 4 20 4 21 4 23 4 23 4 24 4 24 4 27 4 27 4 27 4 28 4 28 4 28 4 29 4 29 4 31 4 32 4 32 4 34 4 34 4 35 4 36 4 36 4 37 4 38 Printer Attachment Files esses RR RRRRRRIRRRR RII 4 38 Using the SMIT Interface for Printer Attachment Files Luusue 4 38 Attachment File Naming Conventions ssssssesseese eese 4 39 Structure of Attachment Files 000 c cece eee eens 4 39 Attachment File Field Definitions 0 cee cece eee 4 40 Operators for Limits Field in the Printer Colon File 0 cece euee 4 42 Contents of the limits Field 0 00 00 cece cee eee A 4 43 limits Field Operators sssssssssseseee RR I 4 43 Adding a Printer Using the Printer Colon File sssluesssssssseeee 4 48 Prerequisite Tasks or Conditions 00 ccc cece eee eee ees 4 48 Procedure sce Yc teri ese cert eb ees rr oe tee M eg 4 48 Printer Specific Information 0 00 ccc eet tenes 4 50 IBM Personal Printer II Models 2380 2381 2390 2391 2380 2 2381 2 2390 2 2991 925 ceo up Sanh eam a hates baked cei ba me ag be aes 4 51 IBM 3812 Model 2 Page Printer 00 c cece ees 4 51 IBM 3816 Page Printer 0
28. Use the Isvirprt command to select the generic PostScript queue The following prompt will appear To LIST attributes enter AttributeNamel for all attributes To CHANGE an attribute value enter AttributeName NewValu o FORMAT and EDIT an attribute value enter AttributeName v o EDIT the attribute file enter v To terminate press Enter At the prompt e Type miza s and press Enter e Type mp and press Enter e Type d mi and press Enter After each attribute redefinition is entered the attribute s new value will be displayed followed by the prompt This new value sets up a pairing of input data stream type a extended ASCII with any string at all and input data stream type s PostScript with the string Input data streams that do not being with a 96 will be processed by the ia pipeline and all input data streams that do begin with a 96 will be processed by the is pipeline Note With a generic PostScript virtual printer without the modifications described above itis possible to print non PostScript ASCII files by overidding the input data stream type from the command line For instance the d flag fo qprt can be used as follows qprt Pqueue nam da etc motd This command requests that the file named etc motd be printed on the queue named queue name and that the input data stream be treated as ASCII the ia pipeline will be used 4 126 Guide to Printers and Printing How pi
29. WKVt 472 w7 2 8 s Courier tCourier Bold e S s Times Roman tTim es Bold e S s Helvetica tHelvetica Bold e S s Times Italic Times BoldItalic e S s Helvetica Oblique tHelvetica BoldOblique e Iw8 370 w1 0 381 wu 3 Command Aggregate Attributes Command aggregate attributes grouped under the CAG group header attribute store values such as the command to initialize the printer and the command to restore the printer after a print job is completed Attributes in this category begin with the letter c Typical command aggregate attributes for a supported PostScript printer are CAG COMMAND AGGREGATES ci Command To Initialize the Printer IezM4 G j 1 tstatusdi ct begin Iat Tar Gmw t I aF end cr Command To Restore the Printer at Job End S0 4 1ex These same attributes are stored in the colon file as 051 CAG 144 ci IezM4 G j 1 tstatusdict begin Iat Iar Gmw t laF end 2152 cr 0 4 lex Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 11 ASCII Control Code Attributes The CTL group of virtual printer attributes store ASCII control codes used by the printer These attributes begin with the letter a and store such values as the control code used to advance paper to the next page The following control codes are typical for a supported PostScript printer CTL CONTROL CODES ASCII aF PostScript Command to S
30. bigfileac and so forth Troubleshooting the Base Operating System Spooler 5 7 Deleting Unnecessary Directory Files Use the following procedures to clean out unnecessary files stored in the spooling directory Note Some commands require root user or system group authority 1 Determine if there are unnecessary files stored in the spooling directory by entering the following du command du rs var spool The du command summarizes disk usage The s flag instructs the du command to display only the total disk usage of the var spool directory and the files it contains The r flag tells the du command to display an error message if it cannot read a file or directory 2 Delete or move files in a full directory by doing either of the following Delete any extraneous files For example rm extrafile Move files that are a few hours old to a safe temporary directory For example mv extrafile u spoolhold Note You must have root user authority to remove or move files other than your own 3 Prevent users from storing files in your spooling directories by doing the following Set permissions on the spooling directory using the chmod command Change the directory to exclude general users For example chmod go rw var spool 1p0 Create a cron job to clean out the directory you must have root user authority Edit the crontab file For example you might add the following line to your crontab file find spool mtime 7
31. e Generates header and trailer pages for print jobs if requested e Generates multiple copies of print jobs if requested e Reports paper out intervention required and printer error conditions e Reports problems detected by the filters e Cleans up after a job is cancelled e For print jobs provides an environment that you can customize to address specific printing needs You typically do not run printer backend programs directly although backends such as compilers can clearly be run directly from the command line The qdaemon runs the backend sending it the names of files and any job control flags that you specify The backend communicates with the qdaemon through a status file in the var spool Ipd stat directory You can use a queue status query command such as qchk or Ipstat to display status information including in the case of a print job the printer status the number of pages printed and the percentage of the job that is finished In the base operating system piobe is the standard spooler backend for processing local print jobs Spooler Overview 3 3 Spooler Job A spooler job is any job that a user submits to the spooler All job submission commands must end with the names of one or more files that require processing You cannot for instance pass a keyword to a backend and have the keyword control the function that backend will perform the submitted job must exist in the file system The spooler will accept ma
32. e Removing a Filter on page 6 26 e Examining a Filter on page 6 26 e Restoring Factory Defaults for Filters on page 6 26 Note Adding changing or removing filters can cause print requests that are still queued to be canceled This is because the print service evaluates all print requests still queued to see which are affected by the filter change Requests that are no longer printable because a filter has been removed or changed are canceled with notifications sent to the users who submitted them There can also be delays in the responses to new or changed print requests when filters are changed due to the many characteristics that must be evaluated for each print request still queued These delays can become noticeable if there is a large number of requests that need to be filtered Because of this possible impact make alterations to filters during periods when the print service is idle Task 1 Converting Files 6 18 For each printer local or remote you can specify what file content types it can print When a user submits a file to print on any printer and specifies its content type the print service finds a printer that can handle files of that content type Because many applications can generate files for various printers this is often sufficient However some applications generate files that cannot be printed on your printers By defining and creating a filter that converts such files into a type that your printers can ha
33. envelopes the default for paper is the else part e1 and the default for envelopes is the then part t3 of sO and s7 Paper Sizes 0 3 Envelope Sizes 0 4 Q 1 Letter 7 3 4 Monarch Q 2 Legal 9 Com 9 Q 3 B5 JIS B5 10 Com 10 Q4A4 DL Q 5 Executive C5 Q 6 A5 B5 Envelope Q 7 Custom Universal Other Envelope Note For PCL queues if the selected size is not in the selected input source a search sequence will be used to find the size requested If the size is found that source will be used For PostScript queues if the selected size is not in the selected input source the printer will prompt the user to load the source with the appropriate size This may result in an unexpected paper source being used or an op panel message that may not make sense at first Please refer to the manual to determine appropriate responses Pitch Collation Separator Pages Pitch selection is supported for the PCL emulation by using the p flag for pitch and the s flag for font name or type face Pitch values between 1 and 100 characters per inch cpi in whole integers are supported The condensed print flag K is not supported Font Name Pitch S courier p 1 to 100 S courier bold p 1 to 100 S courier italic p 1 to 100 s courier bold italic p 1 to 100 s gothic p 1 to 100 s gothic bold p 1 to 100 S gothic italic p 1 to
34. file size and the date and time the request was queued Number of copies printed Printer or class destination or the word any given Form name used if applicable Type of special handling used e resume e hold e immediate Name of the file in the usr spool Ip temp directory This line is repeated for each file printed and files are printed in the order System V Printer Configuration 6 3 How the print service notified the user after printing the file if applicable e M byanelectronic mail message e W byamessage written to the user s terminal Br Priority of the print request if applicable Any r options given to the Ip command indicating that the user requested raw processing of the file Outcome of the job expressed as a combination of individual bits in hexadecimal form The important bits used internally by the spooler are 0x0004 Slow filtering finished successfully 0x0010 Printing finished successfully 0x0040 Request was canceled 0x0100 Request failed filtering or printing Name of the user who submitted the print lt PE E of ed modes to give to the filters used to print the request Fast tior Printer used for the request This differs from the destination the D line if the request was queued for any printer or a class of printers or if the printer administrator transferred the request to another printer Print Service Command Line In general you shoul
35. oe oO oo oo oo oo oe oo oe e oO ct oe o o9 ol o oe oe oe o ll Il Q NQ oe oe oe oe oe oO Cr 0 ct 0 o o9 oe o oe oe oe o o o9 oe ll Q ct oe E Oo Ww oe oO oe 1928 E oe oe a oo PUSH PAP POP gt In lt IF gt In EN gt In In PUSH E In In In In USH E USH E H T In In T USH E H T USH E US US US H T EN gt PUSH ELS US US US H H H D E AX LFU CIF FU Ico ACCU EU LFU ASAP SPOT Ase ACP Fu AUS I FUxTU TU ACC H T EN gt USH E gt USH D gt D gt H H H P S D ER SIZE popl Integer Cons popl Integer Cons popl Integer Cons pop2 popl Integer Cons Integer Cons popl Integer Cons popl Integer Cons popl Integer Cons popl Integer Cons popl Integer Cons Integer Cons override for input paper source ternal Variable q Calculate value for paper source based on O and _u teger Constant 3 pop2 popl ternal Variable q teger Constan pop2 1 tant 2400 ternal Variable q teger Constan pop2 2 tant 2400 ternal Variable q teger Constan pop2 3 tant 1999 ternal Variable q teger Constan
36. printer specifies a backend whose function is to send the spooled job from the local host across the network to the remote host All jobs submitted to this queue on the local host are sent across the network to the remote host where they are processed and printed Printer Devices qdaemon A printer plotter device is a special file in the dev directory for a real printer This file can be used by redirection for example cat FileName gt dev Ip0O or by user written compiled programs Settings for this device driver can be displayed and changed using the splp command Before any of the spooler commands can access a printer device a print queue must be created for the device The qdaemon is a process that runs in the background under the auspices of the sremstr process When you turn your system on the startsrc command starts the qdaemon While the qdaemon can be started by the startsrc command or stopped by the stopsrc command the qdaemon supports only signal communications and thus cannot be queried by the Issrc command The qdaemon tracks both job requests and the resources necessary to complete the jobs where the resources may be a real printer some other real device or even a file The qdaemon maintains queues of outstanding requests and sends them to the proper device at the proper time The qdaemon also records printer usage data for system accounting purposes It is the qdaemon that sets the backend for a spooler queue into e
37. utkay 4 utfay 5 ud amp nvelope feeder urfultipurpose tray By default the banner and trailer pages come from tray 1 To change the default change the values for the uH and or uT attributes respectively in the virtual printer to the value for the desired paper source The valid values are the same as for the u flag Do this by editing the the chvirprt command Paper Size Paper Type Paper size selection is supported by using O and Q flags of the qprt command The O flag controls paper versus envelope A O value of 3 indicates a paper size and 4 an envelope size The values 1 and 2 were skipped for backward compatibility Envelopes are only valid for manual feed envelope feeder or the multipurpose tray The default for Q is 1 or Letter for paper sizes and 3 or Com 10 for envelope sizes To change the defaults change the s0 s7 attributes respectively for each of the valid input sources Since manual feed and the multipurpose tray support both paper and envelopes the default for paper is the e se part e1 and the default for envelopes is the then part t3 of sO and s7 Paper Sizes 0 3 Envelope Sizes 0 4 Q 1 Letter 7 3 4 Monarch Q 2 Legal 9 Com 9 Q 3 B5 JIS B5 10 Com 10 Q 4 A4 DL Q 5 Executive C5 Q 6 A5 B5 Envelope Q 7 Custom Universal Other Envelope Note For PCL queues if the selected size is not in the selected input source a search sequence wi
38. value popped off the stack For example 6 2 pushes a value of 3 onto the stack modulus Similar to except that the remainder instead of the quotient is pushed onto the stack For example 17 9 m pushes a value of 8 onto the stack Note The first value to be popped off the stack is the last one to be pushed onto the stack and the second value to be popped off the stack is the one that was pushed onto the stack first Relational and Logical Operators Sez 96 96 96 gt Guide to Printers and Printing Pushes a value of 1 if true or 0 if false onto the stack Are the first two values that are popped off the stack equal For example 2 2 pushes a value of 1 true onto the stack and 2 3 pushes a value of 0 false onto the stack Is the second value popped off the stack greater than the first value popped off the stack For example 2 3 gt pushes a value of 0 false onto the stack A lt Is the second value popped off the stack less than the first value popped off the stack For example 2 3 lt pushes a value of 1 true onto the stack 9e Negate the value popped off the stack and push the result onto the stack nonzero value to 0 0 value to 1 For example 0 pushes a value of 1 true onto the stack 1 pushes a value of 0 false onto the stack and 2 pushes a value of 0 false onto the stack Note The first value to be popped off the stack
39. while populating the message the print supervisor checks for escape sequences such as s d and c and converts the parameters accordingly Positional parameters are sometimes specified by using n s or n d In such cases the print supervisor fills in the parameters in the specified order e A maximum of nine parameters can be specified Therefore the print supervisor can use nine variables of char type and assign the variables to the appropriate supplied parameter strings After replacing all positional specifiers and integer specifiers the parameters can be passed to the printf subroutine For example the extracted message text might contain the following Error 8 d in opening 6 s file The print supervisor converts the message to the following Error s in opening s file and assigns the first variable parameter pointer to the eighth parameter the second variable parameter pointer to the sixth parameter and the remaining variable parameter pointers to null strings The print supervisor then calls the sprintf subroutine or a similar subroutine and passes the nine variable parameter pointers as parameters to the function e The printer backend specifies the correct type integer or string for each parameter even though all parameters are passed in the pipe as strings The appropriate type must be used for handling field width and precision when placing a parameter in an extracted message e The printer backend may or may
40. with the file and access fields in the qconfig file Virtual Printer Definitions and Attributes A virtual printer definition is a file that pairs the attributes or characteristics of a specific printer with the attributes of a specific data stream type If a specific printer supports more than one data stream type you must create a virtual printer definition pairing the attributes of the printer with each data stream type Thus if a printer supports both ASCII and PostScript data streams you must create two virtual printer definitions for the printer The colon file stores the virtual printer definition for a printer or plotter Colon files reside in the predefined and customized database directories The printer backend uses the attribute values stored in colon files to format print requests All attribute values reside in colon files as character strings regardless of whether they represent strings integers or Booleans An attribute value can contain embedded references to other attribute values or embedded logic that dynamically determines the content of the value For more information on colon files and how embedded references and logic are used in attribute strings see Printer Colon File Conventions on page 4 20 and Printer Colon File Escape Sequences on page 4 13 Working with Virtual Printer Attributes The commands used to create a virtual printer the mkvirprt or smit virprt commands copy a predefined virtual printer d
41. yes _4 Print Garbage File Anyway for Text l Converted to PostScript no yes ERES List Characters Not In Font When Converting Text to PostScript no yes _6 Font Name for Header Line of Text Converted 300 to PostScript _A stderr returned O no l yes amp pipelines 1 2 yes amp values pipelines H Name To Replace Host Name On Burst Page cud Restore the Printer at the End of the Print Job no t yes _L Wrap Long Lines no yes The preceding attributes are stored in the colon file as 056 _FLG 4662 1291 oT 2 4 4695 3541 24702 4 1 UAI S T ATZE 6125300 013 2 A1 20229 Hes 202 se J 254 2030s L324 System Administration Attributes The SYS group header attribute stores values for attributes such as the sh si and st attributes The sh and st attributes store the pipelines for the header page and the trailer page The si attribute identifies who receives printer intervention messages when the printer needs attention A null string specifies that intervention messages should go to the user who submitted the print job Separate user names with a comma Use the SMIT Virtual Printers option or the chvirprt command to change the attribute as needed For example si specifies that the user who submitted the print job should receive the messages si mary specifies the user mary should receive the messages and si jim server02 specifies that both the user who submitted the pri
42. Constant 3 pop2 popl ternal Variable q teger Constan pop2 1 tant 3200 ternal Variable q teger Constan pop2 2 tant 4100 ternal Variable q teger Constan pop2 3 tant 2935 ternal Variable q teger Constan pop2 4 tant 3407 tant 3050 ternal Variable q teger Constan pop2 1 tant 2150 ternal Variable q teger Constant 2 tant 2562 Internal Variable q Integer Constan pop2 3 tant 2750 Internal Variable q Integer Constant pop2 4 tant 2498 Internal Variable q Integer Constan pop2 5 tant 2604 tant 2852 POP ASCII String OUTPUT Calculatin Page Width Using Printer Colon File Escape Sequence B 4 The calculation of wK begins by pushing the value of _Q the paper size override for the input paper source onto the stack The value of _Q is defined as elwQ At this point in the calculation of Wk we are exactly where we were in the calculation of wJ that is trying to determine a value for wQ and Wu Within the context of a single job submission command the final values of wQ and Wu are not going to change just because a final value was requested from a different attribute calculation Thus we ll use the previously calculated values of 1 for wQ and 1 for Wu The 1 returned to the in progress calculation of wK is the value of _Q and is pushed onto the stack It is immediately popped back off the st
43. IG1 Iis 001 il interleaf ileaf5 bin pl2ps ppd IBM17521 PPD r 1270 nf np Ide pioformat G Idd Imm Idf piofpt f juJZ 465 in usr bin psc Iis I2TTLYipiisIls 273 is Ide pioformat Idd SImm Idf piofpt UH f juJZ Prohibited Flags Attributes The attributes grouped under the __PFL group header attribute store the names of command flags to be rejected by the printer backend for a particular data stream If you use a prohibited command flag in a front end print request such as qprt the system rejects the flag and returns a message that the flag is prohibited by system administration The first character of a prohibited flag attribute name is and the second character represents the data stream type to be rejected To prohibit multiple flags for a data stream type store the single character flag names with no spaces commas or other delimiters For example to reject the e emphasized print flag and the E double high print flag for the extended ASCII input data stream run the smit Isvirprt command and enter the following to set this attribute Ia eE The following example shows the Is attribute that sets the prohibited flag attribute for the PostScript data stream on a supported PostScript printer The descriptor for the Is attribute contains the string Ignored cmnrBDMPRT This string indicates that the backend ignores the flags represented by the individual characters cmnrBDMPRT These flags ar
44. Letter Legal A4 B4 A3 11x17 3 The printer and this colon file defaults paper size to letter for the US and A4 for Europe 4 An invalid paper size value for the selected input source will cause an error to be reported 5 If the selected size is not in the selected input source either wrong size or empty a search sequence will be used to find the size requested Please refer to the printer manual for assistance 4 108 Guide to Printers and Printing Pitch Duplex Mode Collation and Number of copies Pitch selection is supported for the PCL 5 emulation by using the p flag for pitch and the s flag for font name or type face with the qprt command Pitch values between 1 and 100 characters per inch cpi in whole integers are supported The condensed print flag K is not supported Font Name Pitch S courier p 1 to 100 Ss courier bold p 1 to 100 S courier italic p 1 to 100 s courier bolditalic p 1 to 100 S gothic p 1 to 100 s gothic bold p 1 to 100 S gothic italic p 1 to 100 s lineprinter p 17 Note To format ASCII for other font styles use the base operating System enscript utility or the qprt command with the da s and p flags to a PostScript queue For PostScript queues p stands for point size and the valid list of fonts can be found in usr lib ps fontmap Valid point sizes are any integer from 1 to 1008 Only a
45. PostScript that the printer understands This does not include information about how the printer hardware is attached to the host computer or about the protocol used for transferring bytes of data to and from the printer A virtual printer is associated with a print queue You can define a print queue for each data stream the printer supports Multiple print queues can use the same real printer e To add print queues use Web based System Manager type wsm then select Printers the SMIT Add a Print Queue option or the mkque mkquedev and mkvirprt commands e To view a list of print queues and their associated virtual printers use Web based System Manager type wsm then select Printers the SMIT List All Print Queues option or the Isvirprt command When you submit a print job a print queue must be directly or indirectly specified To specify a specific printer for a print job add a colon and the printer device name to the print queue name If a printer is not specified for the print job the spooler selects the first available printer associated with the print queue If there are several printers associated with a print queue any printer is used Proprinters for example need only one print queue to be defined for each real printer This is because Proprinters support only one data stream IBM extended ASCII The 4216 Model 031 Personal Pageprinter needs multiple print queues defined A print queue can be defined for each data strea
46. PostScript tm Level 2 emulation by using the u flag of the qprt command There are several optional input Sources see your manual to determine which are installed These numbers apply no matter which ones are present If one is not present choosing one of those will simply default as per the user s manual The input source number is the same for both PCL and PostScript ur anual feed utflay 1 ut ay 2 ur amp ultipurpose tray By default the banner and trailer pages come from tray 1 To change the default change the values for the uH and or uT attributes respectively in the virtual printer to the value for the desired paper source Do this using the chvirprt command Valid values are the same as for the u flag Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 83 4 84 Paper Size Guide to Printers and Printing Paper size selection is supported by using either one or both of the qprt command flags O and Q The O flag controls paper versus envelope A value of 3 indicates a paper size and 4 an envelope size The values 1 and 2 were skipped for backward compatibility Envelopes are only valid for manual feed envelope feeder or the multipurpose tray The default for Q is 1 or Letter for paper sizes and 3 or Com 10 for envelope sizes To change the defaults change the s0 s7 attributes respectively for each of the valid input sources Since manual feed and the multipurpose tray support both paper and
47. Queues for Systems Administrators 2 5 Initial Printer Configuration You can use one process to configure a printer and another process to add a print queue The task you use depends on how your printer is attached to the system You can also configure a printer without adding a print queue The following describes how to do these tasks e Changing the Configuration File on page 2 6 e Configuring a Local Printer and Adding a Queue on page 2 6 e Configuring a Remote Printer and Adding a Queue on page 2 7 e Configuring a Network Printer and Adding a Queue on page 2 7 e Configuring a Print Queue for a File in the dev Directory on page 2 8 e Configuring a Printer without Adding a Queue on page 2 9 The Queuing a Print Job and Deleting a Print Queue procedures can be used after configuring a print queue Changing the Configuration File Both the enq command and qdaemon command read the etc qconfig file when they start The qdaemon command starts when you start the system the enq command starts each time someone requests a print job Thus if you change the etc qconfig file the enq command reads the new version of the configuration file the next time it runs Do not edit the etc qconfig file while there are active jobs in any queue Editing includes both manual editing and use of the mkque rmque chque mkquedev rmquedev or chquedev commands It is recommended that all changes to the etc qconfig file be made using these commands
48. System V print information to share the same database Configuration Using the s Flag During the configuration if you use the s flag with the mkprtldap command the following occurs 1 Checks the IBM Directory DB2 configuration on the system If DB2 is not configured for IBM Directory the mkprtldap command creates a DB2 instance with Idapdb2 as the default instance name and creates a DB2 database with Idapdb2 as the default database name if one does not exist If an existing database is found the mkprtldap command adds AIX System V print information to the existing database 2 Requires the IBM Directory Administrator Distinguished Name DN and password if the directory has been previously configured If the directory administrator DN and password have not been set the mkprtldap command sets them to the values provided to the command 3 Adds the IBM Directory server process slapd to the etc inittab file so that the server starts after a reboot 4 Creates the AIX information tree DN cn aixdata container object on the directory if one is not present The print subtree will be created under the AIX information subtree If an existing AIX information subtree exists on the directory the print subtree will be created under it All System V print information will be stored under the print subtree The directory enabled System V print commands must be run to add printers and print queues under the print subtree created 5 Adds the
49. The print job must have read access to the file The primary use of this operator is to download fonts to a printer Pushes a pointer to the sss string constant onto the stack The only operation that can be performed on the string pointer is to use 9ez to compare the string with another string whose pointer is also on the stack Inserts the standard output produced when the command string specified by the xx attribute is passed to a shell Note that is the grave accent character Passes the quoted string as a command to a sub shell Any double quotes within the quoted string must be back quoted to prevent the internal quotes from being read as delimiters for the string Note that is the grave accent character Input Integer To Stack Sof xx Q 96 Gxx 9e c nn Extracts a selected portion of the string attribute named xx The selection criteria is defined by the pattern The selection pattern consists of three parts 1 sThe string immediately preceding the string to be extracted If the prefix regular expression is missing the extracted string consists of the entire string preceding the pattern specified by the suffix regular expression 2 The extracted string replaces the xx operation sequence in the attribute currently being processed 3 The string immediately following the string to be extracted If the suffix regular expression is missing the extracted string consists of the
50. VAR STR NULL union dtypes amp Vdecr cmd wV VAR INT NULL union dtypes amp Vincr wD VAR INT NULL union dtypes amp Vdecr NULL 0 P NULL NULL int pglen tmarg bmarg vpos vtab_base struct shar vars sharevars struct shar vars Setup Processing setup argc argv passthru unsigned argc char argv int passthru Initialize variables and command line values void piogetvals attrtable NULL void piogetopt argc argv NULL NULL need to verify values entered by user Initialize work variables pglen Pglen Vincr tmarg Tmarg Vincr bmarg Bmarg Vincr piopgskip Beginpg 1 Check for pass through option if Passthru passthru return NULL Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 25 4 26 Initialize pointers to vertical spacing variables shared with formatter driver Refer to usr include piostruct h Sharevars pl amp pglen harevars tmarg amp tmarg harevars bmarg amp bmarg harevars vpos amp Vpos harevars vtab base amp vtab base harevars vincr amp Vincr harevars vdecr harevars vdecr cmd harevars ff cmd harevars amp Vdecr eturn amp sharevars initialize if S S S S S sharevars vincr cmd S S S S r Init_printer void piocmdout INIT_CMD NULL return 0 lineout fileptr Format a Line FI
51. XOFF or DTR pacing Bad or improperly wired cabling can cause a DEV WAIT situation Usually you cannot recover from this situation except by replacing the cable DOWN HELD OPR WAIT QUEUED READY RUNNING UNKNOWN Specifies that the device driver cannot communicate with the printer CD or CTS dropped or is low after TIMEOUT seconds The TIMEOUT value indicates the amount of time in seconds that the queuing system waits for a printer operation to complete You can set this value using SMIT A queue usually goes into the DOWN state after it has been in the DEV WAIT state If a queue goes directly into the DOWN state either the TIMEOUT value is too small or there are cabling problems Usually this situation occurs when the printer device driver cannot tell if the printer is there due to the absence of correct signaling However some printers cannot signal the queuing system that they are only offline These printers signal that they are off they drop CTS if an Ip or drop CD if a tty If the printer device is off the queue goes into the DOWN state The system administrator can bring a queue to the DOWN state for maintenance with the queuing commands qadm disable enq and others Normal recovery Correct the problem that brought the queue down and bring the queue back up using the qadm enable or enq commands with appropriate flags The queue must be manually brought up before it can be used again Specifie
52. a xec rm f This line removes any file in the var spool directory one week after the last modification For more information about creating cron jobs and using the crontab command see How to Set Up an Accounting System in AIX 5L Version 5 2 System Management Guide Operating System and Devices Establish policy for the whole user group For example use e mail to make a general announcement or add to the message of the day etc motd asking users to clean up their files To change the message of the day see How to Change the Message of the Day in AIX 5L Version 5 2 System Management Guide Operating System and Devices Create a script to identify all users whose disk holdings are above a certain threshold and send them e mail requesting that they clean up their files Provide an alternate way to store files such as a tape drive in a public area so users can archive infrequently used files 4 Asalast resort mount more space to the spool directory by using one of the following methods Use the mount command which makes a file system available for use at a specified location For example mount var spool morespool Use the smit mount command choose the Mount a File System option and specify the file system name and attributes 5 8 Guide to Printers and Printing Terminal Attached Printer Checklist Check the following items when the printer attached to an ASCII terminal does not produce output e Verify that t
53. add other port initialization code Because different printers have different numbers of columns make sure the header and trailer for your interface script correspond to your printer The standard interface script prints a banner that fits on an 80 column page except for the user s title which may be longer Look for the section in the code for the standard interface script that begins with this line Print the banner page Some applications when run with certain printers may require that you turn off page breaking If you must turn off page breaking you can modify the standard interface program usr lib Ip model standard at this line if n S FF a no S nofilebreak Change the no to yes to turn off page breaking Specify that the custom interface script print all user related error messages to the standard output or to the standard error output The print service prints standard output errors on the page and mails standard error to the user Specify that when printing is complete the interface script exits with a code advising the status of the print job The Exit Codes Table Exit Codes on page 6 12 describes how the print service interprets exit codes One way of alerting the administrator to a printer fault is to exit with a code of 129 Unfortunately if the interface script exits the print service reprints the print job from the beginning after the fault is cleared To get an alert to the a
54. and Adding a Queue Luuusue Configuring a Print Queue for a File in the dev Directory Configuring a Printer Port liiiisssssssssssss ene Configuring a Printer without Adding a Queue 00 cee eee Prerequisites e gue EDPRLIEEGCREKRLRI eI Rx eG wee eee smit Command 0c eee essem gprt Command xe bina isa ea weimurvivnbseschigerudu doe iue Additional Queue Operations 00 ccc eene Adding a Print Queue Device 00 ccc teens Prer quisites bre Wad EU P siut esses borde bague Mae s Web based System Manager ssssusssssseesssee esee Adding Plotter Support with 5080 0 cece tenes Prerequisites sw eats Serie ire dee ated dhe tang erem Reg Sng dre ds deat smit Command ese cece hb e ee ep Pe Rm Pha eee pda eae eee Creating a Plotter Setup File 0 0 eee eect eh Adding a Local Printer to an Existing Queue 000 eee eee eee eee Prerequisites fe etus edendo hidign idee ERU Detaled dA Ma A tea ft Web based System Manager 000 c cece ect eee eee eee Adding an ASCII Terminal Printer to an Existing Queue Luusuue Prer quisites 2c cue v debui bes arcup dl ay r pee br ee bo bs smit Command co EA Flee un EPA UC EEEEI T eet Adding an HP JetDirect Printer to an Existing Queue ssslluuuee Prerequisites eter Lab Du eIv ue niu epriM bag eet br bote rtu Web based System Manager
55. another job if one is queued System V Printer Configuration 6 1 Figure 4 Overview of Print Request Processing Ip command print service optional rint service i confiar spooling daemon slow filter eae da C job i sereening fe J i Me printer i TE initialization terminfo lk o aaae KEY database standard l 5 r communication path interface program T System V process P s control k Sysiem V process faite Fier optional control alternate i fast filler 2 peu Gp data access amt 5 Syslem V process C 3 disk files laser printer You can customize the print service by adjusting or replacing some of the items shown in the Overview of Print Request Processing figure the numbers in the following list correspond to the numbered items in the diagram 1 Print service configuration For most printers you need only change the printer configuration stored on disk See the Ipadmin command for adding or modifying a local printer 2 terminfo database For printers that are not represented in the terminfo database you can add a new entry that describes the capabilities of the printer See Adding a Printer Entry to the terminfo Database on page 6 13 The print service uses the terminfo database in two parallel capacities screening print requests to ensure that those accepted can be handled by the desired printer and set
56. any list of supported types The format of the description field value is Message catalog Set Message 4 DefaultTextString Values for Message catalog Set and Message 4 are not required For example the two following example entries create the same menu item in SMIT The first example uses the term serv cat message catalog set number 1 and message number 3 If the message cannot be found SMIT uses the default text in quotes In the second example no message catalog is designated and the quoted message is used in the menu automatically description term serv cat 1 3 Printer Attached to Terminal Server description Printer Attached to Terminal Server seq num Specifies the order in which a particular attachment type is displayed in the SMIT Attachment Type Selector menu If this field is missing the attachments are displayed in no particular order For example to display the attachment in the second position on the menu type seq num 2 Guide to Printers and Printing supported unsupported submit job add queue add printer remove queue printer conn Define a list of printer types that are either supported or not supported by the attachment The supported field value is used to generate the list of printers supported by the attachment type on the SMIT dialog screen The two fields are mutually exclusive The format of the value for the supported and unsupported fields is a comma separated list of
57. anyone that uses the queue associated with this virtual printer else the virtual printer cannot resolve the reference to usr lib lpd pio burst MYHEADER An error will result if SMYHEADER is undefined the job might print but the header page will be recyclable at best To avoid the problem of everyone that uses this queue having to have MYHEADER defined you can integrate some shell code into the sh attribute definition to examine the user environment before the header page pipeline is created One method for doing this is shown below Pipeline for Header Pag sh if test X SMYHEADER X then Ide pioburst F H Idb H ascii Ide pioformat G Idd Imm Idf piof5202 L J IsH u IuH else Ide pioburst F H Idb SMYHEADER Ide pioformat SIdd Imm Idf piof5202 L J ISH u IuH fi Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 131 if test X SMYHEADER X then Ide INCLUDE Directory Containing Miscellaneous Modules pioburst F H If H Argument on Command Line Argument gt OUTPUT SIdb INCLUDE Directory Containing Header and Trailer Text Files H ascii Ide INCLUDE Directory Containing Miscellaneous Modules pioformat Q Idd INCLUDE Directory Containing Digested Data Base Files P nd SImm I
58. are composed of base operating system machines and other types of clients and servers not all remote print requests are supported across the network In some instances you may have to submit print jobs one file at a time or concatenate files before submitting them as a print job The main spooler command is the enq command Although you can invoke this command directly to queue a print job three front end commands are defined for submitting a print job the Ip Ipr and qprt commands A print request issued by one of these commands is passed to the enq program that places the information about the file in the queue for the qdaemon to process The queue is the var spool Ipd qdir directory If the job is not a file that is pipe output of a command to enq a real file is created in var spool qdaemon that contains the data to be printed The information in the lvar spool Ipd qdir file points to the file in var spool qdaemon Virtual Printers A real printer is the printer hardware attached to a serial or parallel port at a unique hardware device address The printer device driver in the kernel communicates with the printer hardware and provides an interface between the printer hardware and a virtual printer A real printer can be added with Web based System Manager type wsm then select Printers or using the mkdev command at the command line A virtual printer is a set of attributes that defines a high level data stream such as ASCII or
59. attached directly to a host machine or attached remotely by modem to a host machine This section discusses configuration maintenance and problem determination for terminal attached printers as well as the following topics e Supported hardware e Installing a Terminal Attached Printer on page 2 17 e Terminfo Database on page 2 19 e Printer Backend Commands on page 2 20 Supported Hardware The following hardware is supported for terminal attached printing e Cables RS 232 RS 422 Terminal Devices IBM 3151 3161 3162 3163 3164 DEC VT100 VT220 VT320 VT330 WYSE 30 50 60 350 e Printers IBM 2380 Personal Printer II IBM 2381 Personal Printer II IBM 2390 Personal Printer II IBM 2391 Personal Printer II IBM 2380 Personal Printer Il Model 2 IBM 2381 Personal Printer Il Model 2 IBM 2390 Personal Printer Il Model 2 IBM 2391 Personal Printer II Model 2 IBM 3112 Page Printer IBM 3116 Page Printer IBM 3130 LaserPrinter IBM 4019 LaserPrinter BM 4029 LaserPrinter BM 4037 LaserPrinter IBM 4039 LaserPrinter IBM 4076 InkJet Printer IBM 4201 Model 3 Proprinter III IBM 4202 Model 3 Proprinter III XL Printers Print Jobs and Queues for Systems Administrators 2 15 IBM 4207 Model 2 Proprinter X24E IBM 4208 Model 2 Proprinter XL24E IBM 4247 Printer IBM 5204 Quickwriter IBM 6400 Printer IBM In
60. attribute the input datastream pipeline for ASCII jobs The number 48 replaces the 9elwL in that determination so the value of the flag to pioformat becomes usr 1lib lpd pio fmtrs piof5202 148 The 148 can be seen in the original diagnostic message from piobe that was the basis of this discussion it is part of the PIPELINE OF FILTERS section of the mail sent by the qdaemon on behalf of piobe The calculation of the value associated with the w flag to piof5202 is described in Appendix B Calculating Page Width Using Printer Colon File Escape Sequences on page B 1 The following Calculation of Page Length figure depicts the stack operations as described above used to obtain a final numeric value for page length in lines The following numbered steps correspond to the numbers on the left side of the columns in the figure and provide a step by step description of the evaluation of the printer colon file escape sequences defining page length in lines for this particlular queue asc colon file and command line Figure 6 Calculation of Page Length Figure 1 Graphic Calculation of Page Length 1 CI Pushes a 0 onto the stack since the I flag was not used on the command line 2 9el 1 Calls for the evaluation of I 3 G_z Pushes a 1 onto the stack Guide to Printers and Printing 4 9e 1 Pushes a 1 onto the stack 5 amp Pops the top two values two 1 s off the stack performs a bitwise AND on t
61. backend assumes the default usr lib X11 fonts directory To specify a specific Xwindows font file using a full path name font alias or XLFD enter qprt F 27 ibm udcjp foo txt XLFD names list qprt F IBM JPN17 Font alias name The following example directs the MBCS printer backend to look in the fonts alias and fonts dir files to find the appropriate fonts for the code set specified with the X option of the qprt command Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 37 Translation Table Example include lt fcntl h gt struct trans_table Translation Table Structure unsigned int reservl Reserved Hi unsigned int f_cp From code point Eh unsigned int reserv2 Reserved unsigned int t cp To code point Table to translate code points for input code set NewCodeSet to code points for the process code set IBM 943 J struct trans table table 0x0 0x81ca 0x0 0xfa54 0x0 0x9e77 0x0 0x954f 0x0 0x9e8d 0x0 0x938e re 0x0 0xfad0 0x0 0x8d56 Write the table Error processing not shown main int ftrans long hdsize 32 Header size long cpsize 4 Code point size long rsvl 0 rsv2 0 Reserved area ftrans open usr lib lpd pio transJP newcodeset IBM 932 O CREAT O WRONLY 0664 write ftrans PIOSMBCSXLATEO0O00 16 write ftrans amp hdsize sizeof long write ftra
62. before the device driver is accessed pioout is called the nterface Program for Use With the Device Driver or the device driver interface program e pioout is the parent of pioformat e pioformat dynamically loads and links the device dependent code at runtime hence the device dependent code does not appear as a process in the operating system s process table e pioformat is the parent of the optional filter if it exists such as the pr filter An optional filter such as pr can be specified on the command line or hard coded in the colon file to perform pre filtering on the job before pioformat processes it pioformat is known as a device independent formatter driver It will dynamically load link and drive various device dependent formatters to process jobs of a specific data stream type for example Postscript ASCII GL or PCL Device dependent code is designed to handle the unique properties of combinations of specific data streams and physical printers Because combinations of data stream types and printers can be grouped into classes with common attributes there are currently less than Spooler Overview 3 9 20 device dependent modules These modules are loaded linked and driven by pioformat at run time pioout is the end of the job processing pipeline and is called the device driver interface program The function of pioout is to take the processed data stream and deliver it to the device for which it was intend
63. contains an integer representing the last job number that was assigned If it is sastisfactory that the job numbering scheme restarts type rm var spool lpd stat 4 Remove spooled jobs rm var spool lpd qdir rm var spool qdaemon 5 Restart the qdaemon startsrc s qdaemon While issuing the ps commands you may find a process whose parent process ID PPID is 1 If these processes cannot be killed by kill 9 you must reboot the system to delete these processes Related Information For more information about mounting file systems see Mounting or Unmounting a File System in AIX 5L Version 5 2 System Management Guide Operating System and Devices Troubleshooting the Base Operating System Spooler 5 15 5 16 Guide to Printers and Printing Chapter 6 System V Printer Configuration This chapter discusses advanced print service functions including e Understanding the Print Service on page 6 1 e Customizing Printer Configuration on page 6 6 e Providing Filters on page 6 18 e PostScript Printers on page 6 29 e Configuring Directory Enabled LDAP System V Print on AIX on page 6 43 Understanding the Print Service The System V print service is a collection of utilities that help you as system administrator or printer administrator to configure monitor and control the printers on your system The print service e Receives files users want to print e Filters the files if needed so they can print correctly
64. control sequence used for the form feed depends on the printer involved and is obtained from the terminfo database If the alignment pattern already includes a form feed omit the o filebreak option Unmounting a Form The Ipadmin command allows you to specify that a form or font on a specified printer is to be unmounted To unmount a form use the following command usr sbin lpadmin p printer nam M f non Examining a Form After you have defined a form to the print service you can examine it with one of two commands depending on the type of information you want to check The Ipforms command displays the attributes of the form The display produced by the Ipforms command can be used as input You may want to save it in a file for future reference The Ipstat command displays the current status of the form Note A form definition that is captured in a file can be used later to redefine the form if you inadvertently remove the form from the print service To display the status of a form run the following lpstat f form name 1 To receive a shorter version of the output omit the I The long form of output an example of which follows is similar to the output of Ipforms I Page length scaled number Page width scaled number Number of pages integer Line pitch scaled number Character pitch scaled number Character set choice character set mandatory Ribbon color ribbon color Comment comment Alignment pat
65. date that prints with the print job Use the following command to permit users to decide whether they want a banner printer usr sbin lpadmin o nobanner Administering the etc Ip Systems File A default wildcard entry is supplied in the etc Ip Systems file that allows connections to any system using BSD connections The wildcard entry is as follows ix bsd n 10 Allow all BSD connections The presence of this entry allows a print server to accept connections from systems that are not explicitly configured as known systems Entries specifying the remote system name can still be added to the file using the Ipsystem command Access to a printer can be controlled from the printer s users allow and users deny files See the Ipadmin command for more information Note The wildcard entry is only used for incoming connection requests and not for outgoing requests System V Printer Configuration 6 7 If you do not want to separately control access to each printer on your system but you want the etc Ip Systems file to specify which remote systems have access to your printers remove the wildcard entry from the file and add entries for the remote systems To do this perform the following e To remove the wildcard entry for BSD systems use usr sbin lpsystem r e To add the entry for a specific remote system use usr sbin lpsystem system name Printer Models File 6 8 The printer models file usr lib scoa
66. device parameter only means that the device stanza will be named 1p1 This is not related to the fact that there is a real printer known to the operating system as lpl 3 12 Guide to Printers and Printing Following the tab indented lines the qdaemon must find the word that is the value of the device parameter followed by a colon this line represents the beginning of the device stanza This word which a user normally does not need to know is the name of a device to which the corresponding queue stanza provides serial access There must be one or more lines indented by tabs following this line One of these lines must be backend full path name to backend In a local spooling environment there are two parameters of critical importance in this stanza The file parameter specifies the real device to which the queue provides serial access It is important to note that jobs submitted to the spooling system are queued upon this device If a queue is setup to use a printer known to the operating system as 1p1 then the value of the file parameter would be dev Ip1 The operating system routines that create queues use the name of the real device as the name of the device stanza by default and this is why there is some confusion as to the meaning of the device parameter The backend parameter specifies the full path to the program that will process the job submitted to the spooling system once the qdaemon determines that the job s turn to be proc
67. else sequence The following 96 pops the top two values a 3000 and a 384000 off the stack and divides the second value popped by the first value popped the resulting 128 is pushed onto the stack The d pops the top value 128 off the stack and returns it in ASCII format to the in progress calculation of wW The 128 returned to the in progress calculation of wW is the value of _w The value of wW was originally referenced in the determination of the value of the ia attribute the input datastream pipeline for ASCII jobs The number 128 replaces the lwW in that determination so the value of the flag to pioformat becomes usr lib lpd pio fmtrs piof5202 148 w128 The w128 can be seen in the original diagnostic message from piobe that was the basis of this discussion it is part of the PIPELINE OF FILTERS section of the mail sent by the qdaemon on behalf of piobe The following Calculation of Page Width figure depicts the stacks operations as described above used to obtain a final numeric value for page width in characters The following Guide to Printers and Printing numbered steps correspond to the numbers on the left side of the columns in the figure and provide a step by step description of the evaluation of the printer colon file escape sequences defining page width in characters for this particular queue asc colon file and command line Figure 7 Calculation of Page Width a m Cw Pushes a 0 onto the
68. entire string following the pattern specified by the prefix regular expression No string is extracted if the value of the string attribute is null No string is extracted if the prefix or suffix regular expression is nonnull and does not have a corresponding match in the attribute value string Note The ampersand and quote characters need to be surrounded with a separate pair of quotes if their meaning is to be taken literally Otherwise the program reads these symbols as delimiters When embedding a 96st operator within a regular expression portion of another operator the ampersand and quote characters cannot be used for their literal meaning To avoid this situation place the embedded operator in a separate attribute value and include the new attribute within the regular expression of the outer operator Gets the integer attribute whose name is xx and pushes it onto the stack If the attribute is a string instead of an integer the string is assumed to be an ASCII integer It is converted to a binary integer using the atoi subroutine and pushed onto the stack Pushes character constant c onto the stack where it becomes the low order byte of an integer value The high order bytes are set to 0 zero Pushes integer constant nn onto the stack The constant is a decimal value and can be either positive or negative Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 15 4 16 Internal Variables
69. example in structured form might look like this gx Pushes the value of x onto the stack 6 Pushes a value of 6 onto the stack V Vt If the stack values are equal then 2 pushes a value of 2 onto the stack e else 3 pushes a value of 3 onto the stack 96 endif d Outputs the value in ASCII format Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 17 4 18 Pass through X Loops WX Mode 0 9or Pipeline Overrides Zep Z 9oix Guide to Printers and Printing The piocmdout subroutine call only Pass through from input to output the number of bytes specified by the passthru argument to the piocmdout subroutine While loop Whenever a matching 96 is reached the value of the internal variable x x can be a through z is decremented by one If the result is greater than 0 execution is transferred to the character following wx Starts using only original default values from the database instead of values that may have been updated from the command line or during formatter processing Returns to using the values that were being used before 960 Indicates where to embed the prefix filter pipeline in the main pipeline If not present it is assumed to be at the beginning of the main pipeline Ignored if the first character of the attribute name is not i that is it is not a main pipeline Indicates where to embed the pioout string device driver interface routine in the main pipel
70. file named var spool Ipd stat pid You can do this by issuing the command cat lvar spool Ipd stat pid This file contains the PID of an active qdaemon When the qdaemon is not active the file is supposed to be removed If the cat command prints a number on your display that should be the pid of an active qdaemon If you have already determined that the qdaemon is not active remove the file lvar spool Ipd stat pid because a previous instance of the qdaemon somehow quit without causing this file to be removed If the file does not exist you should see a message like cat cannot open var spool lpd stat pid The qdaemon was inactive you restarted it it quit again the file var spool Ipd stat pid existed and you removed that file Restart the qdaemon again using the command startsrc s qdaemon Wait a minute or so and issue the command ps ef grep qdaemon again to see if the qdaemon remained active You can also issue the command cat lvar spool Ipd stat pid again to see if the file was re created and now contains a valid PID If the answer to the original question s the qdaemon running was yes it is then it is possible that the qdaemon is waiting on all currently running jobs to complete before it shows any signs of accepting new jobs This scenario often occurs when a machine running the base operating system has a large number of printers more than 25 attached to asynchronous adapters such as 64 port or 128 port adapters To
71. filter to be passed to the printer unmodified Once the DVI filter has been specified in the fd attribute you can send a print command such as lpr d DviFile or qprt fd DviFile The d and fd flags for the respective commands pass DviFile an output file produced by tex through the DVI filter and send the results to the printer Directory Attributes Directory attributes are grouped under the DIR group header attribute These attributes store path names to various files needed to process print requests such as translate tables files containing header and trailer page text downloadable font files and temporary files The first character in a directory attribute name is d and the second character designates the directory The following example shows some of the directory attribute values for a supported PostScript laser printer J DIR DIRECTORIES dl Directory Containing Stage 1 usr lib lpd pio transl Translate Tables data stream to intermed d2 Directory Containing Stage 2 usr lib lpd pio trans2 Translate Tables intermediate to printer dD Directory Containing Dummy Device usr lib lpd pio Files For Printers Driven By But Not Attached To the dev Host Computer dF Directory Containing Flags files var spool lpd pio G81ocal flags keeps track of loaded fonts The same attribute values are stored in the colon file as eU5ss DIS 160 d1 usr lib lpd pio trans1 161 d2 usr lib lpd
72. for tray 1 upper Se lt ELSE gt GWu PUSH Calculate value for paper source based on O and _u 2 PUSH Integer Constant 2 PUSH pop2 popl St lt THEN gt Gs2 PUSH PAPER SIZE for tray 2 lower Se lt ELSE gt GWu PUSH Calculate value for paper source based on O and u 3 PUSH Integer Constant 3 PUSH pop2 popl St lt THEN gt Gs3 PUSH ENVELOPE SIZE for envelope feeder Se lt ELSE gt Gs4 PUSH ENVELOPE SIZE for manual envelope feed END od POP ASCII String OUTPUT The calculation of wQ begins by pushing the value of Wu onto the stack As formatted by the Isvirprt command the value of Wu is defined as follows Calculate value for paper source based on O and _u Wu 7 CO t 7 7 G O 1 t Cu t G u 2 5 t 4 e2 0 5 e 0 e G_u S SeSG_u sd Guide to Printers and Printing 7 IF SCO PUSH 1 If O Flag on Command Line Otherwise 0 St lt THEN gt 7 IF G O PUSH Type of INPUT PAPER HANDLING backward compatibility purpose only 1 PUSH Integer Constant 1 S PUSH pop2 popl St lt THEN gt 7 IF Cu PUSH 1 If u Flag on Command Line Otherwise 0 St lt THEN gt lt IF gt G u PUSH Input PAPER SOURCE 2 PUSH Integer Constant 2 gt PUSH pop2 gt popi St lt THEN gt 4 PUSH Integer Constant 4 Se lt ELSE
73. gt 0 PUSH Integer Constant 0 END Se lt ELSE gt 0 PUSH Integer Constant 0 END Se lt ELSE gt G u PUSH Input PAPER SOURCE END Se lt ELSE gt G u PUSH Input PAPER SOURCE END Sd POP ASCII String gt OUTPUT The calculation for the value of Wu begins by evaluating CO which pushes a 1 onto the stack if the O flag was specified on the command line else it pushes a 0 onto the stack The job submission command being used in this example did not use the O flag so a 0 is pushed onto the stack The next t finding a 0 on the stack skips the next 23 lines of printer colon file escape sequences and evaluates the e else clause on the fourth line from the bottom of the formatted form of the Wu attribute The else clause is G_u which pushes the value of _u the input paper source onto the stack The default value for _u for this virtual printer is 1 so a 1 is pushed onto the stack The next terminates the original The only remaining escape sequence d pops the top value a 1 off the stack and returns it in ASCII format to the in progress calculation of wQ The 1 returned to the in progress calculation of wQ is the value of Wu and is pushed onto the stack The next 0 pushes a 0 onto the stack pops the top two values a0 anda 1 off the stack and checking them for equality fails a 0 is pushed onto the stack The next t finds the 0 and so skips the Gs0 and instead eva
74. in the final determination of wK that the page width in pels is fixed Case 1 Either the command line value of u or the default from the colon file 1 primary paper tray is returned to the evaluation of wQ The remaining escape sequences in the definiton of wQ test the value of Wu and select the value of one of s0 s1 s2 s3 or s4 That value is in turn returned to the evaluation of wK If u is 1 or 2 then Q will be 1 non envelope paper size If u is 3 then Q will be 3 envelope paper size When the evaluation of wK is resumed a u value of 1 or 2 will direct the process into the if piece of the outer if then else statement and the Q value of 1 will select a page width of 3200 pels A u value of 3 will direct the process into the else piece of the outer if then else statement and the Q value of 3 will select an envelope page width of 2750 pels Case 2 Same as case 1 Case 3 The user specified manual paper handling on the command line but did not specify a paper source so Wu is assigned the value 0 and that value is returned to the evaluation of wQ The 0 will cause wQ to be assigned the value of s0 the paper size for manual paper feed a 1 When the evaluation of wK is resumed the u value of 0 will direct the process into the if piece of the outer if then else statement and the Q value of 1 sO will select a page width of 3200 pels Case 4 The user specified manual paper handling on the command line and also used the u fl
75. input data stream pipeline The ip attribute is another typical attribute in this group The ip or pass through attribute passes the output from a formatter filter to the printer unmodified The first character for an input data stream attribute is i The second character designates the input data stream type The following example of _ _IDS attributes shows typical input data stream pipelines for a supported PostScript laser printer 4029 LaserPrinter Guide to Printers and Printing _IDS PIPELINES FOR INPUT DATA STREAMS 2 char 1st i 2nd data stream name ia Pipeline for Input Data Stream a extended usr bin enscr ASCII ipt p q G il Command Line Flags Prohibited For Input Data interleaf ile Stream Ignored cmnrBDMPRT af5 bin pl2ps ppd IBM17521 PPD r 1270 nf np Ide pio format Idd Imm Idf pio fpt f juJ2 in Pipeline for Input Data Stream n troff usr bin psc ditroff intermediate output s Ii ip Pipeline for Input Data Stream p Iis pass through is Pipeline for Input Data Stream s PostScript Ide pioformat G Idd Imm Idf piofpt U H f juJZ The colon file stores these same attributes in the following format 057 TDS 24 4 185 pde dee p q G 2 t 2 G z t r G 3 t G G 1 t e B G L t e c Ch t fbh e L h t b 1 h L G l d f Cs t f s e I s G p d G l1 t F Iw7 G p d G 4 t g G b5b t o L f t e
76. int A header is a page preceding a file that shows its title date its recipient and other information 4 32 Guide to Printers and Printing get job number get mail only get qdate get queue name get title get trailer get to get was idle Returns job number of current print Its return value is of type int Returns TRUE if the user specifies mail only Returns a string showing the date that the request was queued The return value is of type char Returns an array of characters containing the queue name Returns an array of characters containing the title of the job being printed The return value is of type char Returns NEVER ALWAYS or GROUP Its return value is of type unsigned int A trailer is a page following a file that gives the name of the user of the output Returns an array of characters containing the name of the person for whom the job is intended The return value is of type char Returns TRUE if the printer was idle at job beginning useful for paper feed feed no feed Returns the charge for printing the current job log charge charge int charge log init log pages pages log percent percent Returns the charge for printing the current job Initializes certain data common to the library routines Updates the status file with the number of pages printed Updates the status file with the percent of job completed log progress log pages nt log_percent char
77. is invoked once for every file or group of files to be printed with the name of each file passed to the backend as a parameter The backend opens the file reads it and sends it to the device The recommended method for a backend to operate is to write to its standard output with the qdaemon process opening the device onto the correct file descriptor This requires setting the file field in the qconfig file The name of the file to be printed can be a direct or relative path name The user ID and group ID of the backend are those of the process that invoked the enq command When a backend is invoked it has access to the user s environment To access the user s environment the backend may invoke the getenv subroutine For example to access the user s directory getenv PWD returns a pointer to the directory name The backend can use this to read from or write to this directory If the backend writes to its standard output the qdaemon opens the device in root user mode If the backend needs to open the device itself it must have the correct permissions to open the device Since the backend runs under the permissions of the user sending the print job you may need to change the protections on the device or install the backend set user ID or set group ID Guide to Printers and Printing By default stdin stdout and stderr are all open to the null device dev null although it is possible to override the setting of stdout and possibly stdin
78. issuing the following command with each process ID kill 9 pid The following example shows a qdaemon returned by ps ef The process ID is 3357 root 3357 2288 0 13 32 21 0 04 dtterm To kill this process ID enter ki11 9 3357 atthe command line 6 Perform this step only if it is necessary to save the current print jobs from being deleted Otherwise proceed to step 7 If your print job is queued in one of the following directories make a copy of it and place it in tmp you can print it when the queuing system is running again Note In these directories the files will have unfamiliar system names var spool qdaemon var spool lpd 7 lf the var file system gets too full you may experience problems with qdaemon or the spooler Large print jobs may fail or O0root files with zero lengths may appear in your qdir directory Rebooting the system in this case may not clear out the files or restart qdaemon Troubleshooting the Base Operating System Spooler 5 5 Enter the df command and look in the used column for var to see if the file system is too full Free space in the file system as necessary The df command displays information about total space and available space on a file system 8 Change the directory as follows cd var spool lpd qdir 9 Issue a pwd command to verify that you are in the proper directory Then remove all files in this directory using the rm command rm The pwd command writes to standar
79. its current value The prompt is also redisplayed Note that you do not have to type the underscore for attributes whose name begin with an underscore For example the results above could have been obtained by typing w and pressing Enter This output is view only the attribute cannot be modified 4 122 Guide to Printers and Printing Other attributes may be much harder to read in this form For instance entering ia at the prompt and pressing Enter will result in output similar to the following being displayed Name Description Value ia ASCII Ide pioformat Q0 Idd Imm Idf pi of5202 1 IwL w I wW f begijpqgstuvx yzEGIJLOOWXZ Uh To LIST attributes enter AttributeNamel for all attributes To CHANGE an attribute value enter AttributeName NewValu o FORMAT and EDIT an attribute value enter AttributeName v o EDIT the attribute file enter v o terminate press Enter Entering the name of an attribute an z and a value and pressing Enter will result in the attribute being assigned that value and the new value being displayed For instance entering _w 60 and pressing Enter or entering w 60 and pressing Enter will result in something like the following being displayed To LIST attributes enter AttributeNamel for all attributes To CHANGE an attribute value enter AttributeName NewValu o FORMAT and EDIT an attribute value enter AttributeName v o EDIT the attribute file enter v
80. jobs with W copies of each page in each job Separator Pages Output Destination The E flag controls separator pages The valid values are 0 1 2 and 3 which represent NONE BETWEENCOPIES BETWEENJOBS and BETWEENPAGES respectively The separator page source defaults to TRAY 1 and is specified via the uS attribute The valid values for uS are the same as for header and trailer pages uH and uT respectively except that the Manual Feeder is not supported To change the default the uS attribute must be changed in the virtual printer to one of the valid values see the chvirprt command The equal sign is the command line option for specifying the output destination Valid values are standard bin bin 1 bin 2 bin 3 bin 4 bin 5 bin 6 bin 7 bin 8 bin 9 10bin 10 The default value for the output destination is the standard bin 0 o ON DO a 5h WON o Lexmark Optra W810 Laser Printer Page Rotation Paper Source Page rotation selection is supported for the PCL 5 emulation by using the z flag of the qprt command z Bortrait z landscape Paper source selection is supported for both the enhanced PCL R 5 emulation and the PostScript Level 2 emulation by using the u flag of the qprt command There are several optional input sources see your manual to determine which are installed These numbers apply no matter which ones are present If one is not present choosing one of those will simply d
81. limit on the number of forms you may define It is a good idea however to remove forms that are no longer appropriate If you do not users must examine a long list of obsolete forms when choosing a form In addition because the print service must occasionally look through all the forms listed before performing certain tasks the failure to remove obsolete forms may require unnecessary processing by the print service To remove a form type the following command usr sbin lpforms f form name Restricting User Access to Forms You can limit the availability of certain forms to selected users For example you may want to limit access to checks to the people in the payroll department or accounts payable department The print service restricts the availability of a form by using the lists provided by you of users allowed or denied access to that form If a user is not allowed to use a particular form the print service will reject the request to print a file with it System V Printer Configuration 6 15 The method used to allow or deny users access to a form is similar to the method used to allow or deny users access to the cron and at facilities Refer to the crontab command for more information If users on your system can access forms on a remote printer all users included on the allow list for the local system must be included on the allow list for the remote system as well If on the other hand a local user is to be denied per
82. log status status put header fnadar width put trailer user fnadar width Updates the status file with the number of pages printed and percent of job completed This function uses log pages and log percent Changes the status of the job from RUNNING to WAITING and back again The parameter is the new status Prints a header page with no following form feed and returns the number of lines printed The fnaddr and width parameters are optional int fnadar The fnadar parameter defines the format subroutine used to display characters on the header page The default is the putchar subroutine int width The width parameter defines the width of the form The default value for the width parameter is 80 Prints a trailer page for user with no following form feed and returns the number of lines printed The fnaddr and width parameters are optional char user int fnadar The fnaddr parameter defines the format subroutine used to display characters on the header page The default is the putchar subroutine int width The width parameter defines the width of the form The default value for the width parameter is 80 Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 33 sysnot user host Sends a message to the user if the backend cannot run a message pref job char user char host char message unsigned int pref The value of the pref parameter indicates whether to mail the message to
83. lpadmin p printer nam M S font cartridge name Any print requests that require a font cartridge are printed on printer name 5 Re enable the printer To unmount a font cartridge type usr sbin lpadmin p printer nam M S non Note You do not need to unmount the current font cartridge after physically removing it from the printer before installing and mounting a new font cartridge Setting Up Printer Fault Alerts 6 38 The print service provides a method for detecting and alerting you to printer faults Faults can range from simple problems such as running out of paper ribbon or toner to more serious faults such as a local power failure or printer failure The range of fault indicators is also broad ranging from dropping the carrier the signal that indicates that the printer is online to sending an XOFF or a message The print service itself only recognizes two classes of printer fault indicators hangups a loss of carrier and excessive delays in printing an XOFF flow control character without a matching XON For faults other than these the printer service cannot determine the cause of the fault so it cannot alert you However you can add filters that can detect other printer Guide to Printers and Printing faults and inform the print service which in turn alerts you For more information see Providing Filters on page 6 18 To arrange for the print service to issue an alert in the event of a printer fault type
84. mD attribute Message number Identifies the message index in the catalog that contains the description of this attribute Leading zeros are ignored Attribute name Specifies two characters except for group header attributes which are five characters Limits field Specifies limits for the attributes Attribute value string Specifies zero to 1000 characters Following is an example of one line in a colon file 023 _w 80 The attribute name is _w the attribute value string is 80 and the attribute description is stored in message number 23 in the message catalog specified by the mD attribute Note All attribute descriptions are stored in message catalogs If an attribute has the same description for multiple printers the attribute in each printer s database can reference the same catalog and message number If the same attribute name has a different description for different printers separate message numbers are used Guide to Printers and Printing Attribute Names The following conventions have been established for virtual printer attribute names Each attribute name must be unique Attribute names can contain the characters a through z A through Z 0 through 9 and _ underscore The name cannot begin with a numeral All attribute names must be two characters long except group header attribute names which can be five characters long Attribute names for group headers begin with _ _ two underscores and must
85. mind the definitions and legal values for O u and Q which are e O type of input paper handling 1 manual 2 continuous forms 3 sheet feed default is sheet feed e u input paper source 1 primary 2 alternate 3 envelope default is primary e Q paper size for input paper source values are printer dependent defined by combination of O and u Guide to Printers and Printing The escape sequences defining Wu say this e Case 1 If the O flag was not used on the command line then return the colon file default value for u For example if the user did not specify a type of input paper handling then return the input paper source either from the command line or the default from the colon file to the evaluation of lwQ e Case 2 If the O flag was used on the command line but its value was not 1 then return the colon file s default value for u For example if the user specified a type of input paper handling other than manual then return the input paper source either from the command line or the default from the colon file to the evaluation of lwQ e Case 3 If the O flag was used on the command line and its value was 1 and the u flag was not used on the command line then return a 0 For example if the user specified manual paper handling but did not specify an input paper source then return a 0 to the evaluation of lwQ e Case 4 If the O flag was used on the command line and its value was
86. never access both backend usr lib lpd piobe Each of these stanza pairs defines a queue When the backend for a queue is piobe each queue also has an associated virtual printer While it is possible to create virtual printer definitions the hard way virtual printer definitions are typically created at the same time as the queue definition via smit and the piomkpq command The virtual printer definition is not contained in etc qconfig Its presence is implied by the fact the spooler backend for a given queue is piobe but it is stored elsewhere in the base operating file system The name of the queue is used to identify and access the virtual printer definition The physical printer known to the base operating system as Ip1 clearly supports at least four distinct data stream types they are ASCII asc Plotter Emulation g1 Printer Command Language pc1 and PostScript ps Each queue with its associated virtual printer definition is designed to process a particular data stream type hence the four queues This is the basis for the base operating system notion of a logical separation of physical and virtual printers Spooler Queue Names and Status Formats Spooler queue names the name of a queue stanza can be over seven characters in length but only the first seven characters will be displayed in the output of a queue status query Device names the name of a device stanza are limited to five characters in the output of a qu
87. never trailer always or group or never access both or write backend full_path_name_to_backend_program Remote Queue queue_name device device_nam up TRUE OF FALSE host remote_hostname s_statfilter full_path_to_short_filter l statfilter full path to long filter rq remote queue nam device name backend full path name to backend program letc qconfig is composed of text blocks referred to as stanzas Each queue is represented by a pair of stanzas The first stanza in a pair is referred to as the queue stanza the second stanza in a pair is referred to as the device stanza Stanzas are composed of parameters and parameter values that describe the queue s properties and function When the qdaemon parses the ASCII version of etc qconfig the first non commented line it identifies must be a word followed by a colon this line represents the beginning of the queue stanza This word is the name of a queue to which a user can submit jobs There must be one or more lines indented by tabs following this line One of these lines must be device device name The value of the device parameter is a link from the queue stanza to the device stanza this parameter has no other function When a queue is initially setup the operating system will frequently use the name of a printer such as 1p1 as the value of the device parameter While the queue may actually be setup to use 1p1 the use of 1p1 as the value of the
88. not passed are the spooler flag options removed by the enq command The qdaemon command has already opened the printer device and redirected standard output to the printer A status file provides communication between the qdaemon and the backend Guide to Printers and Printing If a header page is needed the piobe command retrieves a header page pipeline used to generate the header page The header page pipeline is passed to a shell In the pipeline the standard output from the header page filter becomes the standard input for the formatter filter The formatter filter processes the header page and writes the result to standard output Standard output for the formatter filter becomes standard input for the device driver interface program that writes the filtered header page to the printer device driver Formatter Filters A formatter filter provides the capability of either formatting the input print file or passing it through unmodified based on an input parameter Even if the formatter passes the input file unmodified it still sends printer commands to initialize the printer before the input file is printed and restores the printer after printing is complete A formatter driver is device independent There is a formatter for each type or group of types of input data For example there is one formatter for all the supported Proprinters The formatter filter is made up of the following components e Adevice independent formatter driver e
89. not be longer than five characters A group header attribute formerly called a comment attribute marks the beginning of a group of related attributes For example the group header attribute _ FLG marks the beginning of a group of attributes that define the default values for command line flags The grouping of attributes is for readability purposes and does not affect how the attributes are processed An attribute name beginning with _ an underscore except for group headers can be overridden by a command line flag of the same name as the second character of the attribute name For example w 132 specified with the qprt command overrides with a value of 132 the value specified for the _w attribute in the colon file Automatic Attributes Automatic attributes are names and values that are provided automatically and that cannot be in the database 0 Always a null string This attribute name can be used wherever an attribute name for a null string is needed 91 A string containing the full path name of the file being printed This attribute name is available only to attributes that define pipelines and attributes included by pipelines The file being printed will be a temporary file if the c flag is specified with the qprt command 02 An integer containing the number of bytes to be passed through when 9ex is found in a command string by the piocmdout subroutine obtained from the passthru parameter passed to the piocmdout subr
90. not pass message catalog information and parameters for a message Therefore the print supervisor must be able to accept the expanded message itself or accept the catalog information and parameters and then build the message accordingly Setting Queue States The qchk command displays the status of a particular device One of the entries in the table that is displayed shows the current state of the queue This information is taken from the status file See usr include IN backend h in your status file for a list of valid queue states and their explanation Normally the qdaemon keeps the status file updated However some backends may want to set explicitly the state to WAITING include lt IN backend h gt if they can no longer send output to the device and set it back to RUNNING when output resumes For example a backend that paused at the end of each page waiting for user response might want to set the status to WAITING during this time The log status status routine can be used to change the status of the job from RUNNING to WAITING and back again For more information see Understanding Backend Routines in libqb on page 4 32 The parameter is the new status In the case of a DEV WAIT state on a queue device issue enq U Pqueue to attempt to get the queue to a state of readiness If this does not work move all the jobs in that queue and issue enq G in order to flush the other queues and bring down the qdaemon Then restart th
91. on page 3 1 Guide to Printers and Printing Using Exit Codes When a backend exits the qdaemon looks at its exit code for such information as whether the job was completed successfully and whether the device is still usable Therefore it is important that backends use the same convention for their exit codes The backend should use include lt IN standard h gt for the values of the codes given here The permissible exit codes are EXITOK No problems encountered EXITBAD The parameters could not be acted upon Two common examples are a flag s not being valid or a file that could not be opened The qdaemon sets the state of the device displayed by qchk to OFF sends a message to the console and does not run any further jobs on that device until someone has explicitly set its state to ON again with an enq Pqueuename U command EXITERROR The backend could not finish printing the job The qdaemon restarts the same job from the beginning on the same device The qdaemon enforces a limit on the number of times the job will be restarted EXITFATAL The job could not be finished because of a problem in the device that requires manual intervention The qdaemon sets the state of the device displayed by qchk to OFF sends a message to the console and does not run any further jobs on that device until someone has explicitly set its state to ON again with an enq Pqueuename U command EXITSIGNAL The backend was interrupted by a SI
92. on page 4 50 Pass Through Mode Both virtual printers and the printer device driver can operate or function either in pass through mode or in non pass through mode With Pass through mode a data stream is passed through to the printer byte by byte unmodified The mode of operation selected for a given job determines how or even if a data stream is processed It is important to understand the difference between the two modes when each mode is in effect and if the mode can be changed Printer Device Driver Pass Through Mode The printer device driver itself for instance dev Ip0 by default operates in non pass through mode A user can query or modify the operating rules for dev IpO by issuing the splp command For example below are the results of issuing the command splp IpO on a system with an IBM 4029 LAserPrinter defined as IpO The results are output to the display element specified by the TERM environment variable device dev 1p0 yes no CURRENT FORMATTING PARAMETERS ignored by qprt lpr and lp commands Note p causes the other formatting parameters to be ignored ep 4 pass through e send carriage returns l 64 page length lines n send line feeds w 80 page width columns a CE S carriage rtn after line fee i 0 indentation columns Stat suppress tab expansion W wrap long lines p send backspaces ec 4 convert to upper case ep send form feeds CURREN ERROR PRO
93. per inch 10 PUSH Integer Constant 10 PUSH pop2 popl END PUSH pop2 popl 7 IF G W PUSH DOUBLE WIDE print St lt THEN gt S 6000 PUSH Integer Constant 6000 Se lt ELSE gt 3000 PUSH Integer Constant 3000 END PUSH pop2 popl Sd POP ASCII String OUTPUT The calculation of w begins by pushing the value of z page orientation onto the stack The job submission command being used in this example qprt al Pasc fp p12 scourier C N3 etc motd specifies a z value of 1 so a 1 is pushed onto the stack The 1 pushes another 1 onto the stack after which the amp pops the top two values both 1 s off the stack and performs a bitwise AND with the two values The result of the bitwise AND a 1 is pushed onto the stack Note The test is a bitwise AND instead of a simple test for equality because the legal values for the z flag are 0 1 2 and 3 corresponding to the legal number of 90 degree rotations that can be applied to a printed page The next t finds a true non zero value on the stack and so the then clause GwK is resolved before any more work is done resolving w As formatted by Isvirprt wK is defined as follows Primary Page Length z 0 or Secondary Page Width z 1 in pels wK G OSPq GWu S 3 t gq 1 t 3200 e gq 2 t 4100 e g q 3 t 2935 e gq 4 t 3407 e 3050 e gq 1 t 2 150 e gq 2 t 256
94. pio trans2 509 dD usr lib lpd pio dev 414 dF var spool lpd pio local flags Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 9 Miscellaneous Attributes The MIS group header attribute groups miscellaneous printer attributes Miscellaneous attributes begin with the letter m and store values such as the printer description and printer model number The device name and queue name are also stored in the miscellaneous group The mn attribute stores the device name and the mq attribute stores the queue name Here are some typical miscellaneous attributes for a supported PostScript laser printer MIS MISCELLANEOUS mA Printer Data Stream Description mD Name of message catalog Containing Attribute Descriptors mF Path Name of Font File To Be Downloaded must include download commands mL Printer Description mN Printer model number mY Datastream Mode to Which Printer is Restored at End of Job 0 IBM PPDS Plotter 3 PostScript mc String to Send to Printer Job Is Cancelled mz Times When md Output Data Stream Type exampl Initialized By piodigest mf Path Name of the Default Formatter running standalone mi Input Data Stream Names 1 character Separated by commas for mp Attribute mm File Name Of Digested Data Base piodigest mt md mn mq mv Initialized By mn Device name example 1p0 piodigest mo Command String to Invoke Devic Program end of pipeli
95. piomode Guide to Printers and Printing Command names form feed vertical increment and decrement define Ff cmd Ff cmd piomode define Vincr cmd Vincr cmd piomode define Vdecr cmd Vdecr cmd piomode Work variables for vertical increment and decrement define Vincr Vincr piomode define Vdecr _Vdecr piomode Variables referenced by above defines int _Pglen _Pgwidth _Tmarg _Bmarg _Indent _Beginpg _Do_ formfeed _Passthru _Init_printer _Restoreprinter _Vincr _V decr struct str info Ff cmd Vincr cmd _Vdecr_cmd TABLE OF ATTRIBUTE VALUES struct attrparms attrtable name data type lookup address of pointer b VAR INT NULL union dtypes amp Bmarg g VAR INT NULL union dtypes amp Beginpg i VAR INT NULL union dtypes amp Indent j VAR INT NULL union dtypes amp Init printer l VAR INT NULL union dtypes amp Pglen t VAR INT NULL union dtypes amp Tmarg w VAR INT NULL union dtypes amp Pgwidth J VAR INT NULL union dtypes amp Restoreprinter Z VAR INT NULL union dtypes amp Do formfeed wp VAR INT NULL union dtypes amp Passthru wf VAR STR NULL union dtypes amp Ff cmd wi VAR STR NULL union dtypes amp Vincr cmd wy
96. pitch lineprinter 17 pitch For example entering the following command qprt s Lineprinter p 17 FileName causes the file FileName to be printed in lineprinter font at 17 pitch 17 characters per inch The following are the type styles for Arabic Greek and Hebrew Arabic Type Styles Greek Type Styles Hebrew Type Styles typing typing italic grcour grcour oblique shalom shalom bold typing bold grcour bold shalom italic typing bold italic grcour bold oblique shalom bold italic rokaa rokaa italic grhelvet grhelvet bold narkisstam narkisstam bold rokaa bold rokaa bold italic grhelvet oblique narkisstam italic grhelvet bold oblique narkisstam bold italic setting setting italic grtimesnr grtimesnr bold narkissim narkissim bold setting bold grtimesnr oblique narkissim italic setting bold italic grtimesnr bold oblique narkissim bold italic Note Be sure to download the fonts to the Flash SIM or to a hard disk drive on the printer when using the Arabic Greek or Hebrew type styles The IBM Network Printer 12 17 and 24 support the following output bins The output bins can be accessed using the flag of the qprt command The following table shows the possible values and the corresponding output bin destination o Wammemmy anata Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 57 B Main Bo Main B JMaiBmBng p weOWpiBn Main Output Tray Face up Rear Bin Siar Finish
97. pitch of 17 is supported for the lineprinter font style The optional duplex feature is supported by the Y flag of the qprt command The default value is 0 or simplex mode Yd mplex Ydu plex long edge binding Yd plex short edge binding The optra W810 printer supports collation of multiple copies of a print job internally This feature is controlled by the W and S flags of the qprt command Stollation off Seollation on W imber of copies Notes 1 This function is independent of the N flag of the qprt command The N flag will cause the print job to be sent to the printer times The W flag will send the print job once and copies of the job will be printed 2 The function is limited by the amount of memory installed in the printer and the size of the print job Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 109 Separator Pages Finisher Stapes Finisher Offset Hole Punch Output Destination 4 110 Guide to Printers and Printing The printer supports internally generated separator pages This feature is controlled by the E flag of the qprt command EBlone EBetween Copies EBetween Jobs EBetween Pages The paper source defaults to Tray 1 To change the default the uS attribute must be changed in the virtual printer The valid values for uS are uSTtay 1 uSmay 2 uSTay 3 uSMay 4 Note This function is independent of the B flag of the qprt command
98. point value is not larger than the number of code points in the table and the value is not SC If the character is in the code page the translated code point is sent to the printer The formatter selects the printer code page by sending the appropriate printer command string By convention the printer command string s 2 character attribute name is at index 0 in the Command Names array If the character is not in the code page the formatter repeats the process for the next stage 2 translation table in the ring If the formatter cannot find a translation table in the ring that can print the character it prints a substitute character underscore instead The following example C language code generates a stage 2 translation table named XY2 999 which translates code points from the intermediate code page to code points for the printer s code page The c1 attribute is assumed to contain the printer command string that will cause the printer to select code page XYZ 999 include piostruct h include fcntl h Table to Translate Code Points for the Intermediate Code Page to Code Points for a Printer Code Page struct transtab table 00 000 CP CP CP CP P FC 252 63 CP 94 1 SC Command Names for the Translate Table char cmdnames 2 o mua eee By index 0 select the code page eb pf be E index 1 next byte is graphic Write th
99. popl Sd POP ASCII String OUTPUT The calculation of _I begins by pushing the value of _z page orientation onto the stack The job submission command being used in this example qprt a1 Pasc fp z1 p12 scourier C N3 etc motd specifies a z value of 1 so a 1 is pushed onto the stack The 1 pushes another 1 onto the stack after which the amp pops the top two values both 1 s off the stack and performs a bitwise AND with the two values The result of the bitwise AND a 1 is pushed onto the stack Note The test is a bitwise AND instead of a simple test for equality because the legal values for the z flag are 0 1 2 and 3 correpsonding to the legal number of 90 degree rotations that can be applied to a printed page Calculating Page Lenght Using Printer Colon File Escape Sequence A 1 The next t finds a 1 on the stack and so the then clause Gwd is resolved before any more work is done on resolving l As formatted by Isvirprt wJ is defined as follows Primary Page Width z 0 or Secondary Page Length z1 wJ G OSPq GWuS S 3 t gqg 1 t 2400 e gq 2 e gq 3 t 1999 e 9gq 4 t 2330 e 2025 Ses gq t 1012 e gq 2 t 1012 e gq 3 149 e gq 5 t 1763 e 1928 sd t 1087 e gq 4 t 1 A 2 Guide to Printers and Printing oo oo oo oo oe oO ct 0 ag oe oe oe oe oe o o o9 oe oe oo oe oe ct 0 ct o o o9 oe o oo
100. port a or port b You can also perform this task with the mkque and mkquedev commands Additional flags are required to add plotter support Creating a Plotter Setup File To send plot files to the plotter you need a special file containing the instructions for the type of pacing protocol you are using Instructions for Xon Xoff Pacing Protocol and Data Transmit Rate DTR Pacing Protocol follow For Xon Xoff Pacing For DTR Pacing ESC R ESC R ESC M2 ESC M2 ESC N2 ESC N2 ESC P1 ESC P3 Each line must be entered with no spaces ESC has the ASCII value 27 The period is part of the command Adding a Local Printer to an Existing Queue Prerequisites To perform this task you must be one of the following e User with root authority e A member of the printq group Web based System Manager 1 At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers 2 In the Web based System Manager Printer Queues window use the menus to select the local attachment type manufacturer and printer model 3 Provide additional information as prompted You can also perform this task with the SMIT fast path smit mkpqprt Printers Print Jobs and Queues for Systems Administrators 2 11 Adding an ASCII Terminal Printer to an Existing Queue Prerequisites To perform this task you must be one of the following e User with root authority e A member of the printq group smit Command 1 At the system prompt type smit mkpqprt 2
101. print HPGL files do the following 1 Enter a print queue name for the HPGL data stream when making the print queue Insert the 3 1 2 inch diskette labeled HPGL Emulator in the diskette drive Make sure you are the root user AUN Enter the following to copy the HPGL emulator files from the DOS diskette to the appropriate directory usr lib lpd pio etc pioqms100 Q When HPGL print files are submitted to the HPGL print queue the system downloads the HPGL emulator to the printer and selects the emulator as needed PostScript files can also be submitted to the HPGL print queue The files must begin with the two character string 96 so the system can recognize them as PostScript instead of HPGL files Texas Instruments OmniLaser 2115 Page Printer Automatic selection of the printer data stream PostScript HP LaserJet Diablo 630 TI 855 Plotter is not supported The data stream must be selected manually using the control panel You can also print ASCII files using the PostScript data stream Only DP mode is supported for the TI 855 software interface WP mode is not supported Each time the printer controller is turned on enter the following splp F lpx where 1px is the printer device name such as 1p0 This tells the system that the HPGL emulator needs to be downloaded to the printer again When you reboot the system turn the printer off and on to reinitialize it 4 112 Guide to Printers and Printing Printer
102. printer most closely emulates You might need to consult the printer documentation 2 Use the mkvirprt command to create a virtual printer definition by entering mkvirprt Respond to the prompts specifying the printer type you selected Remember that all device names and queue names must begin with an alphabetic character Review the attribute values and descriptions with the Isvirprt command Because you will need to compare these values in a later step redirect the output to a temporary file by entering lsvirprt q QueueNam d QueueDeviceName gt tempfil 4 Display the output from the Isvirprt command either in another window or as a hardcopy printout Compare the attribute descriptions and values to those of the printer you are adding Determine the changes to be made Copy the printer colon file from the Predefined Database directory usr lib Ipd pio predef to the Customized Database directory var spool Ipd pio local custom Change the attribute values in the colon file as described in Adding a New Printer Type in AIX 5L Version 5 2 Kernel Extensions and Device Support Programming Concepts These will include the printer type mt attribute the printer description mL attribute and the printer emulation mode ep attribute 4 48 Guide to Printers and Printing 8 Run the chvirprt command specifying the queue name and the queue device name with no attribute values This action causes a digested version of
103. processed as if they were local jobs but when the end of the pipeline is reached the ts print program will deliver the output data stream to port 11 on the terminal server instead of pioout delivering it to a device driver In general the mo attribute in the virtual printer definition for a queue with piobe as the backend can be redefined to deliver a processed data stream to any file or device the user chooses provided the you can write the code to do it 4 134 Guide to Printers and Printing Filters Virtual printer definitions contain predefined and open undefined filter attributes For instance an AIX Version 4 1 ASCII queue on an IBM 4029 LaserPrinter offers the following filter attributes e 1 f2 f3 f4 and f5 open user defined filters e fb bidi filter for Hebrew Arabic e fc cifplot filter e fd TeX DVI filter e ff FORTRAN filter e fg plot filter e f passthru filter e fn ditroff filter e fp pr filter e fv Raster image filter e fc fd ff fg fl fn ft fv open user defined filters e fp pr filter Filters are the first programs in the input data stream processing pipeline set up by the piobe command that have an opportunity to selectively manipulate the data stream A particular filter can be selected from the command line on a per job basis or permanently selected by modifying the virtual printer definition The qprt command uses the f flag to select a particular fi
104. produced by the filter respectively They will each be a type registered with the filter e The value for the TERM template is the printer type e The value for the PRINTER template is the name of the printer that will print the final output e The values for the CPI LP LENGTH and WIDTH templates come from the user request the form being used or the default values for the printer e The value for the PAGES template is a list of pages to be printed Typically it is a comma separated list of page ranges each of which consists of a dash separated pair of numbers or a single number such as 1 6 8 10 for pages 1 through 6 8 and 10 However whatever value was given in the P option to a print request is passed unchanged e The value for the CHARSET template is the name of the character set to be used e The value for the FORM template is the name of the form requested by the f option of the Ip command e The value of the COPIES template determines the number of copies made of the file If the filter uses this template the print service will reduce to 1 the number of copies of the filtered file it will have printed because this single copy will really be the multiple copies produced by the filter e The value of the MODES template comes from the y option of the Ip command the command used to submit a print request Because a user can specify several y options there may be several values for the MODES template The va
105. qmov mNewQueue 4JobNumber PQueue uUser See the qmov command in the A X 5L Version 5 2 Commands Reference for the complete syntax For example to move job number 280 to print queue hp2 type qmov mhp2 280 For example to move all print jobs on print queue hp4D to print queue hp2 type qmov mhp2 Php4D smit Command To move a print job using SMIT type smit qmov 1 10 Guide to Printers and Printing Holding and Releasing a Print Job qhld Command This section discusses how to hold a print job after it has been sent to the print queue You can later release the print job for printing with these same commands Note You cannot hold and release remote print jobs Prerequisite The printer must be physically attached to your system Web based System Manager To hold or release a print job using Web based System Manager type wsm then select Printers In the Printer Queues window select the print job then use the menus to put it on hold or to release a held job for printing qhid Command The qhld command puts a print job on hold after you have sent it You can either put a particular print job on hold or you can hold all the print jobs on a specified print queue To determine the print job number type the qchk command For more information see qchk Command on page 1 12 The basic format of the qhld command is ghld r JobNumber PQueue uUser See the qhld command in t
106. request to the rembak backend program rather than the piobe backend e The rembak program transmits the print job to a remote server via the TCP IP network e Onthe remote server the Ipd daemon monitors port 515 for remote print requests e When the Ipd receives a remote print request it places the job in the appropriate local queue e The print request is then processed by the qdaemon on the print server e The qdaemon passes the request to the piobe backend on the print server e The piobe backend formats the data stream for printing on the specified printer The following sections discuss how to configure use and manage a remote printing environment e The rembak Program on page 2 29 e The Ipd daemon on page 2 30 rembak Program The local queue set up to serve remote print requests must be configured to use rembak the remote print backend command When you set up the queue the system prompts for a backend program path name The entry at this prompt tells the qdaemon command which backend program to use to process print requests To set up a queue to handle remote print requests type usr lpd rembak The rembak command also processes status requests job cancel requests and requests to kill a remote queuing system Status requests such as qchk A or Ipstat query the status of local print queues and devices by analyzing the qconfig file and the local print spooling subsystem status files In a remote print environment the qch
107. same names the terminfo names may differ from one printer type to the next To specify a list of character set names and to map them into terminfo names or numbers type usr sbin lpadmin p printer name S characterset_list The characterset_list is a list of names separated by commas or spaces If you use spaces to separate the names enclose th ntire list but not the S in quotes Each item in the list is a character set name mapping alias that looks like one of the following cs N characterset_name characterset namel1 characterset name2 The variable N is a number between 0 and 63 that identifies the number of the character set in the terminfo database characterset_namel identifies the character set by its name in the terminfo database In both instances the name to the right of the equal sign is the name you choose as an alias of the character set Note You do not have to provide a list of aliases for the character sets if the terminfo names are adequate You can refer to a character set by terminfo name by number or by your alias For example your printer has two selectable character sets sets 1 and 2 in addition to the standard character set set 40 The printer type is 5310 Enter the following commands to determine the names of the selectable character sets tput T 5310 csnm 1 english tput T 5310 csnm 2 finnish The words english and finnish which are the names of the selectable c
108. software entities whose function is to process jobs in specific ways e Allows users to submit jobs usually but not always printer jobs to a queue for processing e Provides serial access through a queue to a device such as a real printer or to a program such as a compiler avoiding simultaneous use of a single device or program by multiple users e Allows users to query the status of queues through status files e Allows users to control the availability of queues and the status of jobs e Performs extensive manipulation of print job data stream e Offers a wide range of delivery mechanisms for the processed job Spooler Backends A spooler backend is a collection of programs a pipeline started by the spooler s qdaemon command to manage a spooler job that is queued for processing When the backend is for a print queue the spooler backend typically performs the following functions e Receives from the qdaemon command a list of one or more jobs to be processed e For print jobs uses printer and formatting attributes from the database overridden by any flags specified on the command line e Initializes the printer before processing a print job e Provides filters for simple formatting of ASCII documents e Uses filters to convert print job data stream to a format supported by the printer e Provides support for printing national language characters e Passes the filtered data stream of a print job to the printer device driver
109. some applications or special terminals produce cannot be printed on a PostScript printer because they are not described in the language The print service provides optional filters to convert many of these files to PostScript so that users can take advantage of PostScript and continue to use their standard applications such as troff Retail Type 1 fonts can be installed for use with applications running on the desktop These fonts can be downloaded to PostScript printers if the application generates PostScript output that uses them The Ip command handles this automatically using the download filter Using a PostScript Printer When the PostScript printers and filters have been installed the print service manages PostScript files like any others If psfile is a file containing a PostScript document and psprinter has been defined to the print service as a PostScript printer the command lp d psprinter T PS psfile schedules the print request and manages the transmission of the request to the PostScript printer Supporting Non PostScript Print Requests Because PostScript is a language and PostScript printers are expecting print requests written in that language some applications may produce standard print requests that may not be intelligible to PostScript printers The following are examples of print requests that may not be interpreted by some PostScript printers System V Printer Configuration 6 29 Non PostScript Content Types Con
110. store data instead of sending it to the printer P Name of file usually the header page to be sent to the printer before the first byte of the print file is sent S Name of file to be sent to the printer after the last byte of the print file has been sent Reserved Attribute Names Reserved attribute names are names that are assumed by the print job manager First two characters are _ Group header attribute First character is Value is provided automatically First character is _ Default value for flag argument First character is i Pipeline for input data stream First character is Flags prohibited for input data stream First character is f Command string for the filter flag First character is z and second character is D P or S zD Default state of the colon file when in the lvar spool Ipd pio custom directory means expanded means contracted zP Name of the colon file s parent colon file The parent colon file is assumed to be in the usr lib Ipd pio predef directory zS Current state of the colon file means expanded means contracted First character is y Values for terminal attached printers Suggested Attribute Names 4 22 Suggested attribute names are names that are assumed by many formatter filters First character is s System administrator value First character is d Directory path First character is m Miscellaneous value constant First character is w Work value changes whil
111. tell program are its main detection tools If the print service must interrupt the printing of a file at any time it kills the interface script with a signal 15 see the signal command and the kill command for more information If the interface script stops upon from receipt of any other signal the print service assumes that future print jobs are not affected and continues to use the printer The print service notifies the person who submitted the print job that the job did not finish successfully System V Printer Configuration 6 11 The signals SIGHUP SIGINT SIGQUI and SIGPIP trap numbers 1 2 3 and 13 are ignored when the interface is invoked The standard interface script changes this to trap these signals at appropriate times interprets these signals to mean that the printer has a problem and issues a fault Exit Codes The following table describes how the print service interprets exit codes 1 to 127 The print service encountered a problem in printing the job for example there were too many nonprintable characters or the job exceeded the printer s capabilities This problem does not affect future print jobs The print service should notify the person who submitted the print job via write or mail that an error occurred in printing the job If a printer fault occurred it was cleared Reserved for internal use by the print service Interface scripts must not exit with this code The print service encount
112. that existed but adds one new one When the formatter filter operates in passthru mode the mapping of linefeeds to carriage returns and linefeeds is disabled The forms still do not print correctly Suppose that the application does not allow the insertion of carriage returns into the data stream you can fix this problem with a simple filter as follows include lt stdio h gt 4 136 Guide to Printers and Printing main int argc char argv int ch while EOF ch fgetc stdin switch ch case 10 fputc ch stdout fputc 0x0D stdout break default fputc ch stdout break Compile your program and name it cr_mapper and install it in an accessible location such as usr lib Ipd Assign it ownership of root printq and permissions 555 Assuming you have an ASCII queue named asc on an IBM 4029 LaserPrinter you can use Isvirprt to select the asc queue and then format the f1 filter attribute You should see something like the following User defined filter 1 fl As the f1 attribute has a null default value the definition is sparse Edit the f1 attribute so its definition appears as follows User defined filter 1 fl usr lib lpd cr mapper When you save the new definition of f1 you can again format it with Isvirprt you should see something like the following User defined filter 1 fl usr lib lpd cr mapper usr lib lpd cr mapper The f1 filter can now be used f
113. the Print Processing Properties dialog You can also perform this task with the SMIT fast path smit pqfilters Deleting a Print Queue The following procedures apply to both local and remote print queues Prerequisites e For local print queues the printer must be physically attached to your system e For remote print queues your system must be configured to communicate with the remote print server e To delete a queue or queue device you must have root authority Procedure 1 At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers 2 26 Guide to Printers and Printing 2 In the Web based System Manager Printer Queues window select Queue Print Processor or Destination If you select a queue all copies of devices for that printer are removed If you select a print processor or destination only that print processor or destination is removed You can also use the rmque rmquedev and rmvirprt commands or the SMIT fast path smit rmpq to perform this task Note If the selected queue has only one printer the queue and its printer are removed If the queue has more than one printer only the selected printer is removed Listing All Supported and Defined Printers List All Supported Printers At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers You can also use the smit lssprt fast path command Output similar to the following is displayed bul11021 parallel Bull Compuprint Page Master 1021 ibm2380 parallel IBM 2380 P
114. the AIX system that will serve as the centralized repository for System V print information do the following Note If the system has the IBM Directory Server installed go directly to step 2 1 Install the IBM Directory server software from the AIX base operating system media software The IBM DB2 database is required by IBM Directory and is installed by default when you install the IBM Directory server unless an IBM DB2 database is already installed on the system System V Printer Configuration 6 43 6 44 Note For detailed instructions on installing and troubleshooting IBM Directory refer to the documentation provided with the IBM Directory product 2 To configure IBM Directory to store System V print information run the mkprtldap command with the server flag options The syntax is as follows mkprtldap S a AdminDN p Adminpasswd WwW ACLBindPasswd LSE d node DN The server flag options are described in detail in Server Flag Options on page 6 47 The mkprtldap command works even if the directory server has been set up for other purposes for example for white pages information In this case the mkprtldap command adds the AIX information tree and the print subtree information to the existing database This print tree is protected independently from other trees by use of an Access Control List ACL In this case the LDAP server works as usual Back up your existing database before you use the mkprtldap command to configure
115. the InfoPrint 20 are 0 Main 1 Main with Offset Option set Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 59 4 60 s Name Guide to Printers and Printing Specifies paper size for the print job The Q options for the InfoPrint 20 are 1 Letter Legal Folio 11 x 17 A4 B4 A3 Universal paper size B5 JIS 10A5 11 Executive 12Statement 13Hagaki 14Monarch envelope 15COM10 envelope 16C5 envelope o ON OO A2 CO Iw 17DL envelope 18Universal envelope size Specifies a type style with the Name variable Typestyles for the InfoPrint 20 are e courier e courier bold e courier italic e courier bold italic e gothic e lineprinter e gothic bold e gothic italic prestige elite prestige elite bold prestige elite italic e prestige elite bold italic IBM InfoPrint 32 Printer Type of Output Paper Handling Default Printer Setting Main Face Down Face up Rear Bin Finisher Bin 1 Face Down Top Finisher Bin 2 Face Down Middle Finisher Bin 3 Face Down Bottom oa fF o NH o Any Finisher Bin Face Down e Specifies Staple Collation This option flag only works if a face down finisher bin is selected See option flag Default Printer Setting Portrait Staple Landscape Staple Two Portrait Staples Two Landscape Staples Offset Jog at end of Job Offset Jog at end of Set o0 F WN o No Stapling or Collating k Specifies the number of
116. the information displayed by the cmd to list field is a range of information rather than a list Validity checking is always done on a range The data in a range list is in the form of x y 1 30 or y 30 or x 1 where x and y are integers and specify the upper and lower bounds of a range Validity checking ensures that the attribute value is in the range specified The integer can be negative however the upper bound y value must be greater than or equal to the lower boundary x value To designate that the field list operation is a range between 50 and 100 enter 100 _1 G 50 100 60 Specifies the message catalog specification for help text for a corresponding attribute The message catalog specification includes message catalog name set number and message number The help text is used in SMIT dialog that use the attributes for which help is assigned To assign help to a flag b from the pioattrl cat dialog enter 100 _b H pioattrl cat 5 123 60 Specifies the publication specification for help text for a corresponding attribute The publication specification includes values for the help_msg_id help_msg_base and help_msg_book fields in the sm_cmd_opt SMIT object class The help text is used in the SMIT dialog that uses the attributes for which help is assigned To assign help to a flag b from the publication specification enter 100 b 1 100145 60 Specifies that a pop up list is displayed when the user
117. the outer if then else statement and the Q value of 3 will select an envelope length of 1087 pels Our example is case 1 neither the O nor the u flags were used on the command line so Wu is assigned a value of 1 the default u value for this colon file When the evaluation of wQ resumes the match occurs on s1 and a 1 is returned to the evaluation of wJ The u value of 1 direct the process into the if piece of the outer if then else statement and the Q value of 1 selects a page length of 2400 pels This value is returned to the evaluation of l The remaining printer colon file escape sequences defining reason that if there are 2400 pels available vertically and if we want six lines per inch and if there are 300 pels per inch the resolution of the printer then 48 lines can be printed on a page The value 48 is returned to the evaluation of ia That s basically where the 148 in the PIPELINE OF FILTERS came from A 10 Guide to Printers and Printing Appendix B Calculating Page Width Using Printer Colon File Escape Sequences The printer colon file for an ASCII queue on an IBM 4029 LaserPrinter defines page width in characters with the work attribute wW As formatted by the Isvirprt Viewing Formatting or Modifying Virtual Printer Definitions on page 4 121 command wW is defined as follows Page Width In Characters Using Width From Data Base used in pipelines wW S SCwStSf wsesI_w 7 IF
118. the page has a portrait orientation then wK is length If the page has a landscape orientation then wJ is length After the page length in pels is resolved the remainder of the escape sequences in the definition of wY just take vertical line denisty into account while converting the number of pels to the number of lines The wg attribute is selected because the page orientation is landscape Thus far all that is known is that the dimensions have been flipped what the dimensions actually are is still unknown The evaluation of wJ begins by fetching the value if any of a command line usage of the Q flag which is a printer dependent value requesting a specific paper size If the Q flag was used on the command line then that value will be used to select the paper length in pels otherwise a value for Q will be determined by evaluating Wu which is a value for the paper source based on the attributes _O type of input paper handling and u input paper source Note that Q is defined as lwQ whose definition begins with lWu Since Q was not used on the command line the evaluation of Wu determines that the O flag wasn t used either and so executes the else clause in the outer if then else statement in the definition of Wu returning the default colon file value of u 1 to the evaluation of wQ Since this is as deep as the nesting of escape sequences goes for the evaluation of I it is worth taking a closer look at the logic defining Wu Keep in
119. the printer formatter subroutines refer to the example of a print formatter Example of Print Formatter on page 4 24 Spooler Overview 3 11 etc qconfig Spooler Configuration File The etc qconfig file describes all of the queues defined to the base operating system A queue is a named ordered list of requests for a specific device A device is something either hardware or software than can handle those requests one at a time The queue provides serial access to the device Each queue must be serviced by at least one device often it can be handled by more than one device etc qconfig File Structure The etc qconfig file is the most important file in the spooler domain e t contains the definition of every queue known to the spooler e A system administrator can read this file and discern the function of each queue e Although it is not recommended this file can be edited Editing the etc qconfig File on page 4 138 to modify spooler queues without halting the spooler The qdaemon reads the ASCII version of etc qconfig and creates a binary version letc qconfig bin etc qconfig must adhere to a specific structured format in order for the qdaemon to be able to parse it This format is detailed in the etc qconfig File Structure examples below Local Queue queue name device device nam up TRUE or FALSE discipline fcfs or sjn device_name file physical_device_name or FALSE header always or group or
120. the user or to write the message on the user s terminal The valid values defined in usr include IN backend h file are DOMAIL Mails the error message to the user DOWRITE Writes the message to the user s terminal if the user is logged on If the user is not logged on the message is mailed to the user Printer Code Page Translation Tables Translation of code points in the print file to code points for the printer is a two stage process translation of code points for Oriental languages is handled differently The first stage translates code points from the print file to code points in an intermediate code page The intermediate code page consists of 16 bit integer code points for all supported characters The intermediate code page is defined in the usr lib Ipd pio etc codepage txt file Stage 1 Translation 4 34 The example C language code shown below generates a stage 1 translation table to translate code points from a hypothetical Code Page 123 to the intermediate code page include piostruct h include fcntl h Table to Translate Code Points for Input Code Page 123 to Code Points for the Intermediate Code Pag FREI short table 256 00 000 CP CP CP CP FC 252 CP SC 126 CP Write the Table to a File Error Processing Not Shown main int fildes int fmt type 1 fildes open usr lib lpd pio transl 123 O CREAT O_WRONLY 0664 write filde
121. the virtual printer definition to be built 9 Verify that the newly defined printer prints correctly 10 If you want to create a predefined virtual printer definition do so with the piopredef command SXX Pushes a pointer to the current string value for the xx attribute onto the stack The only operation that can be performed on the string pointer is to use to compare the string with another string whose pointer is also on the stack 9eLxx Pushes the length of the xx constant or variable string onto the stack For example if the value of attribute ss is IJKLMN the sequence ABC SLss dDEFG produces the string ABC6DEFG However if xx is the attribute that contains the Lxx sequence the length will be the length of that part of the string that has been constructed when the 9eLxx is encountered For example if the value of the st attribute is ABCSLst dDEFG the constructed string for attribute st is ABC3DEFG Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 49 Printer Specific Information 4 50 The format and content of the header and trailer pages can be customized by editing the files containing the prototype text These files are in the usr lib Ipd pio burst directory The file names are in the format X yyy where X is either H to indicate header pages or T to indicate trailer pages yyy indicates the type of data stream ascii for ASCII ps for PostScript or gl for plotter emulation For example the file name
122. them for equality and pushes the resultant 0 onto the stack 38 t Pops the 0 off the stack and since it is a FALSE zero value calls for the evaluation of 96G p 39 96G p Pushes a 12 onto the stack 40 10 Pushes a 10 onto the stack 41 96 Pops the top two values a 10 and a 12 off the stack multiplies them together and pushes the resultant 120 onto the stack 42 Pops the top two values a 120 and a 3200 off the stack multiplies them together and pushes the resultant 384000 onto the stack 43 G_w Pushes a 0 onto the stack 44 t Pops the 0 off the stack and since it is a FALSE zero value calls for the evaluation of 3000 45 3000 Pushes a 3000 onto the stack 46 96 Pops the top two values a 3000 and a 384000 off the stack divides the second value popped by the first value popped and pushes the resultant 128 onto the stack 47 d Pops the 128 off the stack and returns it in ASCII format to the in progress calculation of ia the input data stream pipeline for ASCII jobs Guide to Printers and Printing Why the Stack Language Describing Page Width Works The IBM LaserPrinter 4029 Series technical reference contains a figure and a table that together describe the printable and unprintable areas on a page and the paper and envelope dimensions in pels for standard paper and envelope sizes For instance the printable area on an 8 5 x 11 width by length inch p
123. then press Enter to assign the attribute that value e Enter a v and press Enter to engage in a vi session with the raw colon file e Enter the name of an attribute immediately followed no blank spaces by a v and press Enter to engage in a vi session with a heavily formatted version of the attribute Each of these five options will be discussed in the context of the asc queue and the associated virtual printer definition with its underlying colon file Entering an asterisk and pressing Enter will result in the following being displayed Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 121 Name Description Value __FLG VALUES THAT MAY BE OVERRIDDEN WITH FLAGS ON THE COMMAND LINE _0 not used x not used 7 not used E not used _4 not used 225 not used _6 not used _7 not used E not used 4 not used _A stderr returned 0 no 1 yes amp pipelines 2 1 yes amp values pipelines _E Double High Print no yes LE not used Font file name _G Page format use only printable page use ntire addressable area ZH Name To Replace Host Name On Burst Page D Font ID overrides pitch and type style _J Restore the Printer at the End of the Print Job ne yes _K not used _L Wrap Long Lines no yes _O Type of Input Paper Handling 1 manual 3 3 sheet feed AQ Paper or Envelope Size For the Pap
124. underscores If you need to change a filter reenter one of the same commands You need provide information only for those items that must be changed Items for which you do not specify new information remain the same Removing a Filter The print service imposes no fixed limit on the number of filters you can define Remove filters that are no longer applicable to avoid extra processing by the print service which must examine all filters to find one that works in a given situation To remove a filter run the following command usr sbin lpfilter f filter name x Examining a Filter After you have added a filter definition to the print service you can examine it by running the Ipfilter command The output of this command is the filter definition displayed in a format that makes it suitable as input You may want to save this output in a file that you can use later to redefine the filter if you inadvertently remove the filter from the print service To present the definition of the filter on your screen type the following command usr sbin lpfilter f filter name 1 To capture the definition of the filter in a file for future reference type the following command usr sbin lpfilter f filter name 1 gt filename Restoring Factory Defaults for Filters The software is shipped from the factory with a default set of filters As you add change or delete filters you might overwrite or remove some of these original filters To rest
125. using the printer The names must contain no more than 14 characters and may include only letters digits and underscores The following table lists and describes some accepted content types Note The names simple and any are recognized as having particular meanings by the print service be sure to use them consistently The name terminfo is also reserved as a reference to all types of printers Commonly Used Content Types 6 28 Types Description cif Output of BSD cifpbt daisy Print files intended for a Diablo 630 daisy wheel printer dmd Print the contents of a bit mapped display from a terminal fortran ASA carriage control format otroff CAT typesetter instructions generated by BSD or pre System V troff old troff pel HP LaserJet native output format plot Plotting instructions for Tektronix displays and devices postscript PostScript language raster Raster bitmap format for Varian raster devices simple ASCII file tek4014 Print files formatted for a Tektronix 4014 device tex DVI format files troff Device independent output from troff When a file is submitted to the print service for printing with the printer specified by the d any option of the Ip command the print service searches for a printer capable of handling the job The print service can identify an appropriate printer through either the content type name or the printer type name Therefore you may specify either name or no name when submitting a file for
126. value of 7 is used Specifies the font style If this flag is not specified the Courier font is used The PostScript printer must have access to the specified font Acceptable values are Courier Oblique Helvetica Helvetica Oblique Helvetica Narrow Helvetica Narrow Oblique NewCenturySchlbk Italic Optima Optima Oblique Palatino Roman Palatino ltalic Times Roman Times lItalic Rotates the output 90 degrees landscape mode The following is a list of examples of how these qrpt command flags can be used e To send the ACSII file myfile ascii to the PostScript printer named Msps1 enter qprt da PMspsl1 myfile ascii e For example to send the ACSII file myfile ascii to the PostScript printer named Msps1 and print out in the Helvetica font enter qprt da PMspsl sHelvetica myfile ascii e To send the ASCII file myfile ascii to the PostScript printer named Msps1 and print out in the point size 9 enter qprt da PMspsl p9 myfile ascii Command Summary for Printers Print Jobs and Queues cancel Cancels requests to a line printer Ip Sends requests to a line printer Ipq Examines the spool queue Ipr Enqueues print jobs Iprm Removes jobs from the line printer spooling queue Ipstat Displays line printer status information pr Writes a file to standard output qcan Cancels a print job qchk Displays the status of a print queue qhid Holds or releases a print job qmov Moves a print job to ano
127. wL involves evalutating embedded references in the definition of wL As formatted by the Isvirprt commmand wL is defined as follows Page Length In Chars pipelines Using Length From Data Base used in wL Cl t f l e I 1 5 lt IF gt Cl PUSH 1 If l Flag on Command Line Otherwise 0 t THEN SEDE For Each Flag x on Command Line xArgument OUTPUT Se lt ELSE gt SI l INCLUDE LINES per page END The CI checks to see if the I flag was used on the command line if it was then a 1 is pushed onto the stack else a 0 is pushed onto the stack In this case the I flag was not used on the command line so a 0 is pushed onto the stack The t checks for a true non zero value on the stack and not finding one executes the 96e else construct 9el I lis defined as sIwy shown below as formatted by the Isvirprt command Default Page Length lines WY G z 1 amp t GwJS etSGwK G vt 300 2 d 7 lt IF gt SG_z PUSH Page ORIENTATION 1 PUSH Integer Constant 1 amp PUSH pop2 amp popl Bitwise AND St lt THEN gt GwJ PUSH Primary Page Width z 0 or Secondary Page Length z1 in pels Se lt ELSE gt SGwK PUSH Primary Page Length z 0 or Secondary Page Width z1 in pels END G v PUSH LINE DENSITY lines per inch PUSH pop2 popl 300 PUSH Integer Constant 300 PUSH pop2
128. want To specify the way the print service will recover after a fault has been cleared type one of the following commands usr sbin lpadmin p printer name F continue usr sbin lpadmin p printer nam F beginning usr sbin lpadmin p printer name F wait System V Printer Configuration 6 39 These commands direct the print service to continue at the top of the page restart from the beginning or wait for you to enter an enable command to re enable the printer If you do not specify how the print service is to resume after a printer fault it will try to continue at the top of the page where printing stopped or failing that at the beginning of the print request If the recovery is continue but the interface program does not stay running so that it can detect when the printer fault has been cleared printing will be attempted every few minutes until it succeeds You can force the print service to retry immediately by issuing an enable command Alerting to Mount Forms and Font Cartridges 6 40 If you have printers that accept changeable font cartridges and you have listed the font cartridges allowed on each users can submit a print request to use a particular font cartridge However if the font cartridge is not mounted when a user requests to use it the job waits in the queue until you mount the font cartridge See Specifying Font Cartridges to Use With a Printer on page 6 38 If a form or font cartridge is not mounted when
129. you must understand what happens when you print a file which options you have for sending control information to the printer and which printer characteristics you can control You can use Web based System Manager type wsm then select Printers the System Manager Interface Tool SMIT or the qprt command to send a file to a printer You can also use Web based System Manager or SMIT to cancel or prioritize a print job A file does not go directly to the printer Web based System Manager SMIT or the qprt command calls the enq command and places the print request in a queue The print request stays in the queue until a printer becomes available at which point the qdaemon command runs the printer input output backend piobe command The piobe command processes the file and sends it along with control information to the printer The printer receives a data stream containing the contents of the file and the control information specified with the qprt command Printers Print Jobs and Queues for Systems Administrators 2 1 Controlling the Printing Process Add printer control information to the printer data stream in the following ways e Include printer control codes in the file Note Set the print queue data stream to passthru that is dzp Refer to Printer Colon File Conventions on page 4 20 for more information Include all printer control information that is unique to that file For example to underscore the title of a book or p
130. you print a file and specify that form the job waits in the queue until you mount the appropriate form See Mounting a Form on page 6 16 In these cases you might want to set up the print system to alert you when you need to mount a form You can specify that you are to receive alerts when the number of requests waiting for a font cartridge or form exceeds some threshold To arrange for alerting to the need to mount a form type lpforms f form nam A alert method Q number W minutes alert method alerting method to use mail write or a desired command number number of waiting requests to restart alerting minutes number of minutes between alerts For example to direct the print service to send electronic mail alerts every five minutes whenever the printer queue contains two or more requests for the check form and it is not already mounted type lpforms f check A mail Q 2 W 5 To arrange for alerting to the need to mount a font cartridge type lpadmin S font cartridge nam A alert method Q number W minutes For example to direct the print service to write alerts to your terminal every two minutes whenever the printer queue contains three or more requests for the dingbat font cartridge and it is not already mounted type lpadmin S dingbat A writ Q3 W 2 To arrange for alerting whenever the queue contains requests for any form or font cartridge type one of the following lpforms f any A mail W 5 lpadmi
131. 0 S5 Use the Isvirprt command Paper size selection is supported by using either one or both of the qprt command flags O and Q The O flag controls paper versus envelopes A value of 3 indicates a paper size and 4 an envelope size Envelopes are only valid for manual feed feeder or feeder 2 The default for O is 3 or paper The default for Q is 1 or Letter for paper sizes and Com 10 for envelope sizes Paper Sizes 0 3 Envelope Sizes 0 4 Q 1 Letter 7 3 4 Monarch Q 2 Legal 9 Com 9 Q 3 B5 paper 10 Com 10 Q 4 A4 DL Q 5 Executive C5 Q 6 A5 B5 Envelope Q7 Other Envelope The Optra Plus printer supports paper types rough normal default transparency labels and cardstock using the y parameter of the qprt command or the y attribute in the colon file y Rough ylZormal default y lransparency y labels y Gardstock Print Resolution Pitch Duplex Mode The Optra Plus printer supports print resolution of 300 600 and 1200 dpi using the q flag of the qprt command The default is 600 dpi q300 q600 q1200 Pitch selection is supported for the PCL 5 emulation by using the p flag for pitch and the s flag for font name with the qprt command Pitch values between 1 and 100 characters per inch cpi in whole integers are supported The condensed print flag K is not supported Font Name Pitch S courier p 1 to 100 s courier bold
132. 014 Output In this example the user Marty created a graphic image that can be displayed on a Tektronix 4014 terminal Marty now wants to print this image but all of the printers are PostScript printers Fortunately your system provides a filter called posttek that converts Tektronix type files to PostScript Because you set the printer type to PostScript the print service recognizes that it can use the posttek filter to convert Marty s output before printing it Task 2 Handling Special Modes Filters can handle special printing modes Each filter you add to the filter table can be registered to handle special modes and other aspects of printing such as e Special modes e Printer type e Character pitch Line pitch e Page length e Page width e Pages to print e Character set e Form name e Number of copies A filter is required to handle the special modes and printing of specific pages the print service provides a default handling for the rest However it may be more efficient to have a filter handle some of the rest or it is possible that a filter has to know several of these aspects to fulfill its other roles properly A filter may need to know for example the page size and the print spacing if it is going to break up the pages in a file to fit on printed pages As another example some printers can handle multiple copies more efficiently than the print Service so a filter that can control the printer can use the information about the
133. 1 and the u flag was used on the command line and its value was not greater than 2 then return a 0 For example if the user specified manual paper handling and also specified either the primary or alternate input paper source then return a 0 to the evaluation of lwQ e Case 5 If the O flag was used on the command line and its value was 1 and the u flag was used on the command line and its value was greater than 2 then return a 4 For example if the user specified manual paper handling and also specified an input paper source of envelope then return a 4 to the evaluation of 9elwQ The definition of wQ is an if then else then else then else then else statement that repeatedly compares the value of Wu to the integers 0 1 2 and 3 looking for a match The match selects the value of one of the attriubes s0 s1 s2 s3 or s4 respectively s4 is selected when there is no other match The items these attributes define are as follows e s0 paper size for manual paper feed e S1 paper size for tray 1 upper S2 paper size for tray 2 lower e s3 envelope size for envelope feeder e s4 envelope size for manual envelope size In the virtual printer definition for an ASCII queue on an IBM 4029 LaserPrinter there are only two unique values for these five attributes sO s1 and s2 are all 1 while s3 and s4 are both 3 Looking back up the nested escape sequences you can see that the definition of wJ is composed of an o
134. 100 S courier italic p 1 to 100 s courier bolditalic p 1 to 100 S gothic p 1 to 100 s gothic bold p 1 to 100 S gothic italic p 1 to 100 s lineprinter p 17 Note To format ASCII for other font styles use the base operating System enscript utility or the qprt command with the da s and p flags to a PostScript queue For PostScript queues p stands for point size and the valid list of fonts is located in usr lib ps fontmap Valid point sizes are any integer from 1 to 1008 Only a pitch of 17 is supported for the lineprinter font style The W flag of the qprt command controls how many copies of each page is printed The default is 1 copy and the maximum value is 999 w number of copies Example If a three page job is submitted with W2 on the qprt command then two copies of page 1 followed by two copies of page 2 followed by two copies of page 3 will occur in that order Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 97 Lexmark Optra M410 Laser Printer 4 98 Page Rotation Paper Source Guide to Printers and Printing Page rotation selection is supported for the PCL 5e emulation by using the z flag of the qprt command z Bortrait z landscape Paper source selection is supported for both the enhanced PCL R 5e emulation and the PostScript Level 2 emulation by using the u flag of the qprt command There are several optional input source
135. 100 s lineprinter p 17 Note To format ASCII files for other font styles use the base operating system enscript utility or the da flag to a Postscript queue with the qprt command Also only a pitch of 17 is supported for the lineprinter font style Only a pitch of 17 is supported for the lineprinter font style Normally the N command line option is used to specify the number of copies desired This method will cause that many copies of the entire print job to be submitted or queued to the print system Since the Optra K 1220 supports collation internally options were added to support it and the number of copies of each page internally This functionality is limited by the amount of memory installed in your printer and the size of the job The W option determines how many copies of each page is desired where is the number of copies The S option controls whether collation is desired The default is or not The main advantages of using the W and S options are to conserve printer subsystem usage and allow the printer to handle multiple copies instead of sending copies to the printer Using the S options with W also allows copies of each page in a row if that is desired Note that using N and W simultaneously is allowed This would result in N print jobs with W copies of each page in each job The E flag controls separator pages The valid values are 0 1 2 and 3 which represent NONE BETWEENCOPI
136. 2 e 9gq 3 t 2750 sesgqs 4 t 2498 e gq 5 t 2604 e 2852 sd B 2 Guide to Printers and Printing oo oo oo oo oe oo oe ct 0 ct 0 ct 0 a o o o9 oe oo oe oe oe o oe oe oe oo o o9 oe ll Q oe oO oo oo oo oo oe oo oe e o d oe o o9 oe o oe oe oe oo ll NQ oe oe oe oe oe oO Ch 0 ct oO o o9 oe oo oe oe oe oo o o9 oe ll Q ct oe N Oo e od oe oO oe 2852 z oe oe a oo PUSH PAP POP gt In TIE PUS In HC EN H In In C C mou uuo muucu VE HC PUSH E In In In In USH E gt USH E H T In In d T USH E gt T USH E US US US H T EN gt PUSH ELS US US US H H H D E AX tU FJ FU Cm ACCU EU LFU AC me A FO ORD Ase ACK RO Ae AOAC ACA H T EN gt USH E gt USH D gt D gt H H H P S D ER SIZE pop2 popl Integer Cons popl Integer Cons popl Integer Cons popl Integer Cons Integer Cons popl Integer Cons popl Integer Cons popl Integer Cons popl Integer Cons popl Integer Cons Integer Cons override for input paper source ternal Variable q Calculate value for paper source based on teger
137. 2 17 and 24 on page 4 57 e IBM InfoPrint 20 on page 4 59 e IBM InfoPrint 32 Printer on page 4 61 e IBM InfoPrint 40 Printer on page 4 63 e Canon LASER SHOT LBP B404PS Lite on page 4 65 e Canon LASER SHOT LBP B406S D E G A404 E A304E on page 4 65 e Dataproducts LZR 2665 Laser Printer on page 4 65 e Hewlett Packard LaserJets Il IIl IIISi 4 4Si 4Plus 4V 4000 5Si 5Si MX 5Si Mopier 8000 Color and 8500 Color on page 4 65 e Lexmark 4227 Forms Printer on page 4 69 e Lexmark Optra Laser Printer on page 4 70 Guide to Printers and Printing e Lexmark Optra Plus LaserPrinter on page 4 72 e Lexmark Optra Color 1200 Printer on page 4 74 e Lexmark Optra Color 40 Printer on page 4 78 e Lexmark Optra Color 45 Printer on page 4 81 e Lexmark Optra K 1220 Printer on page 4 83 e Lexmark Optra C Color LaserPrinter on page 4 86 e Lexmark Optra E LaserPrinter on page 4 89 e Lexmark Optra N LaserPrinter on page 4 91 e Lexmark Optra E310 Laser Printer on page 4 95 e Lexmark Optra M410 Laser Printer on page 4 98 e Lexmark Optra Se Laser Printer on page 4 101 e Lexmark Optra T Laser Printer Family on page 4 104 e Lexmark Optra W810 Laser Printer on page 4 107 e Lexmark Plus Printer Models 2380 3 2381 3 2390 3 2391 3 on page 4 111 e OKI MICROLINE 801PS F 801PSII F 800PSIILT on page 4 112 e Printronix P9012 Line Printer on page 4 112 e QMS ColorScript 100 Model 20 Printer on page 4 112 e Texas Instruments OmniLaser 2115 Pa
138. 2 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 14 2 15 2 15 2 17 2 19 2 19 2 20 2 21 2 21 2 21 2 21 2 21 2 21 Showing Status of Print Queues Web based System Manager Starting and Stopping a Print Queue Prerequisites 22000 0000 Setting the Default Print Queue Prerequisites 2 20 000000 Procedure 2 0e0ce ee eeeee Holding and Releasing a Print Job qhld Command 2000 e eee Prerequisites 2 2 000000 Procedure 2 000ce ee eeeee Moving a Job between Queues Prerequisites 2 02 0000 Web based System Manager Scheduling Print Jobs Prerequisites 22000 0000 Changing or Showing Queue Characteristics 0 00 neeaae Prerequisites 22 0 00005 Specifying Paper Size Prerequisites 22 0000005 Web based System Manager Changing or Showing Printer Connection Characteristics 005 Prerequisites 2 2 0200005 Web based System Manager Changing Showing Pre Processing Filters Prerequisites 0 0005 Web based System Manager Deleting a Print Queue Prerequisites 22 002 0000 Procedure 2 0eece up eee Listing All Supported and Defined Printers List All Supported Printers List All Defined Printers
139. 2 and IBM 5579 H02 K02 on page 4 54 IBM 4216 Personal Page Printer Model 031 on page 4 54 IBM 4234 Printer on page 4 54 IBM 5202 Quietwriter Ill on page 4 54 IBM 5204 Quickwriter on page 4 55 IBM 4216 510 and IBM 5327 011 on page 4 54 IBM 5575 B02 F02 H02 and IBM 5577 B02 F02 FU2 G02 H02 J02 K02 on page 4 55 IBM 5584 G02 H02 IBM 5585 H01 IBM 5587 G01 H01 and IBM 5589 H01 on page 4 55 IBM 6252 Impactwriter and IBM 6252 Printer on page 4 55 IBM Network Color Printer on page 4 55 IBM Network Printer 12 17 and 24 on page 4 57 IBM InfoPrint 20 on page 4 59 IBM InfoPrint 40 Printer on page 4 63 Lexmark Optra Laser Printer on page 4 70 Lexmark Optra Plus LaserPrinter on page 4 72 Lexmark Optra C Color LaserPrinter on page 4 86 Lexmark Optra E LaserPrinter on page 4 89 Lexmark Optra E310 Laser Printer on page 4 95 Lexmark Optra M410 Laser Printer on page 4 98 Lexmark Optra N LaserPrinter on page 4 91 Lexmark Optra Se Laser Printer on page 4 101 Lexmark Optra T Laser Printer Family on page 4 104 Lexmark Optra W810 Laser Printer on page 4 107 Lexmark Plus Printer Models 2380 3 2381 3 2390 3 2391 3 on page 4 111 Lexmark 4227 Forms Printer on page 4 69 Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 117 e OKI MICROLINE 801PS F 801PSII F 800PSIILT on page 4 112 e Printronix P9012 Line Printer on page 4 112 e QMS OolorScript 100 Model 20 Printer on page 4 112 e Texas Instruments OmniLaser 2115 Page Printer
140. 3 Hagaki 14Monarch Envelope 15COM10 Envelope 16C5 Envelope 17DL Envelope 18 Universal Envelope Size coe N Oo OC FF QN a Ce Valid queue names located on the IBM Network Printer 12 17 24 and InfoPrint 20 32 and 40 are as follows TEXT Data that requires line feed carriage return processing PASS Data that requires no further processing Canon LASER SHOT LBP B404PS Lite The Japanese PostScript and ASCII data streams are supported Japanese language text files cannot be printed Canon LASER SHOT LBP B406S D E G A404 E A304E The Japanese code sets are supported Do not use the IBM 5575 emulation card The lips3 queue cannot be used for models LBP B406S D A404 with LIPS Il mode Dataproducts LZR 2665 Laser Printer The data stream PostScript Diablo 630 must be selected manually using the control panel ASCII files can also be printed using the PostScript data stream Hewlett Packard LaserJets Il Ill IIISi 4 4Si 4Plus AV 4000 5Si 5Si MX 5Si Mopier 8000 Color and 8500 Color Hewlett Packard LaserJet printers can print on paper other than the default 8 1 2 by 11 inch size The paper size can be changed using SMIT as described in Specifying Paper Size on page 2 25 To change paper size for a single print job specify the Q flag with the qprt command To print more lines per page than the line space allows 6 or 8 lines per inch specify the number of lines per page The line spacing is compress
141. 9x only sscript 239x only The valid quality values include Quality q flag 0 fast draft 1 draft 2 near letter quality 238x only 2 letter quality 239x only 3 enhanced letter quality 239x only The valid pitch values are 10 12 17 20 and 24 for 239x only Notes 1 Selection of draft or fast draft will override the selected font 2 Bold font is supported using the e flag and emphasized print Italic font is supported using the k flag and italic print Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 111 Page Width The w flag controls the width of the printable page in characters Plus Printer Default 2380 and 2390 80 2381 and 2391 136 OKI MICROLINE 801PS F 801PSII F 800PSIILT The Japanese PostScript and ASCII data streams are supported Japanese language text files cannot be printed All OKI MICROLINE series printers are connected by RS 232C cabling Printronix P9012 Line Printer Only the Serial Matrix command set is supported The P series command set is not supported QMS ColorScript 100 Model 20 Printer The QMS ColorScript 100 Model 20 printer can print color PostScript files and HPGL Hewlett Packard Graphics Language files The HPGL emulator is shipped on a DOS diskette with the printer ASCII files can also be printed using the PostScript data stream To print PostScript files do not enter a print queue name for the HPGL data stream when making the print queue To
142. A device dependent formatter The formatter driver is invoked by a pipeline and is passed the name of a formatter to be driven The formatter driver dynamically loads and links the formatter and calls the formatter s setup function which indicates whether data formatting or data pass through is requested After the formatter s setup function performs the necessary functions it returns to the formatter driver The formatter driver calls the initialize function The initialize function outputs a string of printer commands to initialize the printer and returns to the formatter driver The formatter driver either calls the passthru function once or calls the lineout function for each line in the print file based on the return code from the setup function If the lineout function is called the formatter driver performs all vertical spacing including line spacing vertical tabs form feeds and top and bottom margins Line spacing and vertical tabs are performed by the lineout function Other vertical spacing functions are performed automatically When processing is complete the formatter driver calls the restore function The restore function outputs a string of printer commands to restore the printer to its default state defined by the database attribute values For more information about how the print formatter interacts with the printer formatter subroutines refer to the Example of Print Formatter on page 4 24 Printers Print Jobs and
143. Bull AIX 5L Guide to Printers and Printing AIX ORDER REFERENCE 86 A2 30EF 01 Bull AIX 5L Guide to Printers and Printing AIX Software October 2002 BULL CEDOC 357 AVENUE PATTON B P 20845 49008 ANGERS CEDEX 01 FRANCE ORDER REFERENCE 86 A2 30EF 01 The following copyright notice protects this book under the Copyright laws of the United States of America and other countries which prohibit such actions as but not limited to copying distributing modifying and making derivative works Copyright Bull S A 1992 2002 Printed in France Suggestions and criticisms concerning the form content and presentation of this book are invited A form is provided at the end of this book for this purpose To order additional copies of this book or other Bull Technical Publications you are invited to use the Ordering Form also provided at the end of this book Trademarks and Acknowledgements We acknowledge the right of proprietors of trademarks mentioned in this book AIX is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation and is being used under licence UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States of America and other countries licensed exclusively through the Open Group The information in this document is subject to change without notice Groupe Bull will not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the use of this materi
144. CESSING PARAMETERS T 600 timeout value seconds e return on error CURRENT SERIAL INTERFACE PARAMETERS B 19200baud rate s 8 character size bits N enable parity ES two stop bits P 4 odd parity The p parameter determines whether the printer device driver dev IpO will default to a pass through mode of operation the mode of operation can be overridden for a specific data stream By default the value of the p parameter is or no It is important to note that the question asked by the p parameter is Will the mode of operation be pass through mode If the value of the p parameter is then all of the other parameters listed are honored by the device driver during data stream processing Likewise if the value of the p parameter is or yes then all of the other parameters are ignored during data stream processing Using the splp command to change the parameter values of the printer device driver does not affect the operation of the spooler The splp command affects commands such as cat when they are used to access the device driver directly bypassing the spooler For example the command cat etc motd gt dev lpO 4 118 Guide to Printers and Printing opens dev IpO and writes the contents of the message of the day directly to the printer The output on the printer is formatted similar to the following example This is a test version of etc motd used
145. CL emulation and Diablo 630 emulations check the first two characters of each print file If the first two characters are the file is assumed to be a PostScript file and the virtual printer for PostScript is used instead of the virtual printer implied by the print queue name If you have not configured a print queue for PostScript the print job will fail If you want to print a PostScript file as an ASCII file instead of a PostScript file specify the da flag and parameter with the qprt command when you submit the print job for the IBM Proprinter XL PCL emulation or Diablo 630 emulations IBM 4216 510 and IBM 5327 011 The Japanese data stream is supported To print Japanese characters specify 24x24 dot font with the F option on the qprt command as follows qprt Pkji F usr lib X11 fonts JP IBM JPN17 pcf Z file IBM 4234 Printer The system assumes that the appropriate character set printed language has been selected from the printer s control panel Refer to the section on setting a printed language in the printer s operating instructions manual If the selected character set is not 02 PC Multilingual 1 Type the SMIT fast path smit chpq 2 Select the appropriate print queue then select Printer Setup on the Change Show Characteristics menu 3 Select the character set for the PRINTED LANGUAGE attribute IBM 5202 Quietwriter III Although this printer detects the presence of a font cartridge the host system cann
146. CL emulation data stream without manual intervention The LaserPrinter can print on paper other than the default 8 1 2 by 11 inch size and on envelopes other than the default 10 envelope The paper or envelope size can be changed using SMIT and described in Specifying Paper Size on page 2 25 To change paper or envelope size for a single print job specify the Q flag with the qprt command If a font card is installed the system must be alerted To handle this do the following 1 As the root user type smit chpq 2 Select the appropriate print queue and select Printer Setup on the Change Show Characteristics menu Specify which font card is installed in the top card slot Specify which font card is installed in the bottom card slot Note The value of the nn variable is the font card identifier which is the two digit number just above the arrow on the font card If a PostScript option is installed in your 4019 LaserPrinter and the PostScript option supports automatic emulation mode switching the printer can be configured to switch automatically between PostScript mode and emulation modes as well as switching between emulation modes To determine if the PostScript option installed in your printer supports this check the guide to operations manual that came with your PostScript option Or verify that the PostScript interpreter is version 52 3 or later by checking the PostScript startup page that is printed when the printer
147. Code Page 850 you must notify the system 1 Type smit chpq as the root user 2 Select the appropriate print queue and select Printer Setup on the Change Show Characteristics menu 3 Select the code page for the ACTIVE CODE PAGE attribute IBM Network Color Printer The predefined files support the IBM Network Color Printer 2 0 or higher controller code level Additional qprt option flags that are valid using only the Network Color Printer PS queue Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 55 4 56 Specifies brightness level Default Printer Setting Lightest Lighter Light Normal Dark Darker Nn Oo 0 25 WO DY o Darkest Specifies the finish 0 Default Printer Setting 1 Normal 2 Matte 3 Glossy Specifies the color model 0 Default Printer Setting 1 CMYK 2 Grayscale Specifies the color rendering dictionary Default Printer Setting Scanner Highlight Photographic Presentation Monitor Solid Color Specifies the print mode 0 Default Printer Setting 1 Photo Quality o a A WO N o 2 Business Graphics The following valid queue names are located on the IBM Network Color Printer ibmcolor_direct ibmcolor_print ibmncp_direct ibmncp print 1 03 or 1 1 controller code and 16MB of memory 1 03 or 1 1 controller code and 32MB or 48MB of memory 2 0 or higher controller code and 16MB of memory 2 0 or higher controller code and 32MB or 48MB of memory Note To deter
148. Ctrl R key sequence Adding Support for Nonsupported Terminals The control sequences must be added to the terminfo database in the usr share lib terminfo directory To add the control sequence values for your terminal edit the appropriate ti file Then compile th e file using the tic command Refer to the documentation supplied with your terminal for more information about control sequence values The virtual printer database is a series of files that describe the way print requests should be processed such as the data stream to be delivered to the printer User configurable attributes specific to terminal at tached printers are defined in the virtual printer database and are based upon the asynchronous communications adapter being used The virtual printer attributes are defined when the virtual printer is configured The naming convention for attributes unique to terminal attached printers is y N where N is an integer greater than or equal t o 0 The value of yO is reserved It designates that the virtual printer queue is configured for a terminal attached printer and contains the hardware line discipline for the terminal port The sections that follow detail the adapter specific virtual printer attributes for terminal attached printers To change the attribute values on an existing virtual printer use the Web based System Manager Devices fast path You can also use the smit ps lsvirprt fast path command Printers Print Jobs and
149. Description 9600 9600 baud rate cs8 8 bit bytes cstopb 1 stop bit per byte parenb No parity generation ixon Enable XON XOFF flow control ixany Allow only XON to restart output opost Postprocess data stream as listed below olcuc Do not map lower case to upper case onlcr Map linefeed into carriage return linefeed ocrnl Do not map carriage return into linefeed onocr Output carriage returns even at column 0 nlo No delay after linefeeds cro No delay after carriage returns tab0 No delay after tabs bs0 No delay after backspaces vto No delay after vertical tabs ffo No delay after form feeds You may find that the default characteristics are sufficient for your printers However printers vary enough that you may have to set different characteristics See the stty command for a complete list of characteristics If you have a printer that requires printer port characteristics other than those handled by the stty program you will have to customize the interface program See Printer Interface Scripts on page 6 9 for help When you add a new printer you may specify an additional list of port characteristics The list you provide will be applied after the default list so that you do not need to include in your list items that you do not want to change Specify the additional list as follows System V Printer Configuration 6 41 usr sbin lpadmin p printer name o stty stty option list Note that both the double quotes
150. ES BETWEENJOBS and BETWEENPAGES respectively The paper source for separator pages is set via the colon file attribute uS and defaults to TRAY 1 The valid values for uS are the same as uH and uT except manual feed is not a valid source for separator pages To change the default the uS attribute must be changed in the virtual printer to one of the valid values see paper source above Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 85 Lexmark Optra C Color LaserPrinter 4 86 Printing Color Files in PCL 5 Emulation Mode Paper Source Paper Size Guide to Printers and Printing To print color files or any preformatted print job in PCL language use the dp flag of the qprt command This sets the base operating system printer backend to passthrough mode and should be used any time you are printing from an application in PCL emulation The print queue default can be changed to passthrough by modifying the d attribute in the colon file See A X 5L Version 5 2 Commands Reference Volume 3 for information about the Isvirprt command Paper source selection is supported for both the PCL 5 emulation and the PostScript Language by using the u flag of the qprt command PCL PostScript u 1 Top tray u 1 Top tray u 2 Bottom tray u 2 Bottom tray u 3 feeder u 3 feeder Paper size selection is supported for the PCL 5 emulation by using the Q flag of the qprt command Paper Sizes Size Qr amp tter de
151. ExecJet llc e Lexmark ValueWriter 600 e Lexmark 2380 Plus Printer Model 3 e Lexmark 2381 Plus Printer Model 3 e Lexmark 2390 Plus Printer Model 3 e Lexmark 2391 Plus Printer Model 3 e Lexmark Plus Printer Model 2380 3 e Lexmark Plus Printer Model 2381 3 e Lexmark Plus Printer Model 2390 3 e Lexmark Plus Printer Model 2391 3 e Lexmark 4039 Plus LaserPrinter e Lexmark 4079 Color JetPrinter Plus e Lexmark 4227 Forms Printer e OKI MICROLINE 801PS F 801PSII F 800PSIILT e Printronix P9012 Line Printer e QMS ColorScript 100 Model 20 Printer e Texas Instruments OmniLaser 2115 Page Printer For more information on certain printers listed above see 4 116 Guide to Printers and Printing Canon LASER SHOT LBP B404PS Lite on page 4 65 Canon LASER SHOT LBP BA406S D E G A404 E A304E on page 4 65 Dataproducts LZR 2665 Laser Printer on page 4 65 Hewlett Packard LaserJets Il Ill IIISi 4 4Si 4Plus 4V 4000 5Si 5Si MX 5Si Mopier 8000 Color and 8500 Color on page 4 65 IBM Personal Printer II Models 2380 2381 2390 2391 2380 2 2381 2 2390 2 2391 2 on page 4 51 IBM 3812 Model 2 Page Printer on page 4 51 IBM 3816 Page Printer on page 4 52 IBM 4019 LaserPrinter and 4029 LaserPrinter on page 4 52 IBM 4037 and IBM 4039 LaserPrinter on page 4 53 IBM 4072 ExecJet on page 4 53 IBM 4076 InkJet Printer on page 4 53 IBM Proprinter Models 4201 3 4202 3 4207 2 4208 2 on page 4 53 IBM 4208 502 IBM 5572 B02 IBM 5573 H0
152. GTERM signal include lt signal h gt EXITWARN The backend has issued a warning to the qdaemon The job may or may not be completed successfully but in either case when the qdaemon receives an EXITWARN from the backend qdaemon returns a message explaining the problem Returning Error Messages When an error event occurs the backend should send a message to the user Before sending a message the backend should check the PIO IPCWRITEFD environment variable If it is set the message is sent to a print supervisor by way of a pipe The print supervisor interprets the message and sends it to the user If the PlO_IPCWRITEFD environment variable is not set the backend sends the message to the user with the sysnot routine The qdaemon print spooler always uses the sysnot Understanding Backend Routines in libgb on page 4 32 routine to send messages Non base operating system print spoolers can use sysnot routine or the pipe to send messages Using the sysnot Routine The backend can send messages directly to the user with the sysnot Understanding Backend Routines in libqb on page 4 32 routine The sysnot routine can either mail the message to the user or write the message to the user s terminal The sysnot routine is called with the following syntax sysnot user host message S pref char user char host char message unsigned int pref P The value of the pref parameter should be DOMAIL or DOWRITE DOMAIL mails t
153. However for a printer on a client system consider where slow filtering is to occur since network and system resource management may be of concern By specifying valid content types other than PS you can force the slow filtering of input to occur on the server system Conversely if you specify a content type of PS the input will be filtered locally before the print request is forwarded to the server system for fast filtering and printing To configure a printer on a server system usr sbin lpadmin p ps1 T PS b I PS m PS To configure a printer on a client system without local filtering usr sbin lpadmin p ps1 T PS b I simple daisy dmd tek4014 plot To configure a printer on a client system with local filtering usr sbin lpadmin p ps1 T PS b I PS As part of the installation procedure you may want to install fonts on the printer or downloadable fonts on the computer See Installing and Maintaining PostScript Fonts on page 6 33 for details Installing and Maintaining PostScript Filters The PostScript filters provided cover the majority of situations In certain circumstances however you may find it helpful to change the filter descriptions and install the filters differently This section describes the location and function of these filters PostScript filters are contained in the directory usr lib Ip postscript Note There are two types of filters fast filters and slow filters For definitions of
154. However if manual editing is desired first issue the enq G command to bring the queuing system and the qdaemon command down after all jobs are present Then edit the etc qconfig file and restart the qdaemon command with the new configuration Configuring a Local Printer and Adding a Queue Prerequisites Note If you want to configure a printer without adding a print queue see Configuring a Printer without Adding a Queue on page 2 9 Read the documentation for your printer You may need printer specific information to connect and configure the printer e Review the configuration of your system Determine to which parallel or serial port you want to connect the printer e You must have root authority Web based System Manager 2 6 1 Connect the printer directly to the serial or parallel port on the local host a Type shutdown at the system prompt to halt the system b Turn off the system and any external devices c Connect the printer to the appropriate serial or parallel port d Set up your printer as described in the printer documentation e Restart the system 2 At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers Guide to Printers and Printing In the Web based System Manager Printer Queues window use the menus to complete the steps to configure a printer device and one or more print queues You can also perform this step with the SMIT fast path smit mkpq Note If the printer supports more than one type of pr
155. IX information trees on the directory in this example gt cn aixdata o ibm c us and cn aixdata The print information will be under 6 48 Guide to Printers and Printing the cn aixdata object suffix cn aixdata For the mkprtldap command it is recommended to use the default location to add the print information to the directory 5 To configure a client to use IBM Directory setup for System V Print on host server ibm com type mkprtldap c h server ibm com w passwd Ensure that the ACL bind password passwd is the same as the one specified during the setup of the Directory server Running the command without specifying a print bind DN value with the d option will cause the command to use the default print bind DN ou print cn aixdata The Print Bind DN must match the one displayed as a result end of running the mkprtldap command when you configure the server 6 To change the information in the client side configuration files run the mkprtldap command with the new information Type mkprtldap c h server ibm co uk w aclpasswd d ou print cn aixdata c uk Running this command on a client that has already been configured will change the information in the etc Idapsvc server print and etc Idapsvc system print files to contain the new configuration information The original contents of the letc Idapsvc server print and etc Idapsvc system print files will be stored in the letc Idapsvc server print save and etc Idapsvc system pr
156. In the calculation of page width however we will be interested in pitch and in whether or not double wide printing was selected The next escape sequence evaluated is G_p This fetches the value of the p attribute which defines the pitch in characters per inch for this queue The default value for this queue is 10 but the command line being used in this example specified a pitch of 12 p12 so a 12 is pushed onto the stack The 17 pushes a 17 onto the stack The pops the top two values a 17 and a 12 off the stack and checking them for equality fails a 0 is pushed onto the stack The t finds the 0 a false value and the following else clause is evalutated G_p again pushes a 12 onto the stack The 10 pushes a 10 onto the stack The 96 pops the top two values a 12 and a 10 off the stack and multiplies them together the resulting 120 is pushed onto the stack The 96 terminates this if then else sequence The following pops the top two values a 120 and a 3200 off the stack and multiplies them together the resulting 384000 is pushed onto the stack The G_W fetches the value of W and pushes it onto the stack W is a yes 1 or no 0 question concering whether or not double wide printing is needed The default value is 0 and we did not override it on the command line so a 0 is pushed onto the stack The t finds the 0 and so executes the else clause The 3000 pushes a 3000 onto the stack The 96 terminates this if then
157. Job between Queues Prerequisites To perform this task you must be one of the following e The print job owner e Auser with root authority e A member of the printq group Web based System Manager 1 At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers 2 In the Web based System Manager Printer Queues window select the job you want to move 3 Select Destination Queue You can also perform this procedure with the following commands smit qmov OR qmov m DestinationQueue JobNumber OR qmov m DestinationQueue P Queue OR qmov m DestinationQueue u User Scheduling Print Jobs Use the SMIT fast path to perform the following tasks Prerequisites Your root user login name must be included in the var adm cron at allow file or you must have root user authority Listing All Scheduled Print Jobs At the prompt type smit lsat This command displays a list of all the print jobs you have scheduled If you have root user authority the command lists all currently scheduled print jobs Scheduling Print Jobs 1 At the prompt type smit sjat 2 Select or type the appropriate date and time fields 3 Provide additional information as prompted Removing a Scheduled Job At the prompt type 2 24 Guide to Printers and Printing smit rmat Select List to delete the job number Changing or Showing Queue Characteristics The following procedures apply to both local and remote print queues and print queue
158. LI fileptr int ch charcount 0 for ch 0 ch lt Indent ch whil pioputchar ch piogetc fileptr Mn amp amp amp charcount lt Pgwidth charcount t t pioputchar c vpos Vincr return charcount passthru Pass through Option int ch whil ch piogetc stdin EOF if piodatasent amp amp Do_formfeed pioputchar ch f xy amp Vincr cmd ptr amp Vdecr emd ptr amp Ff cmd ptr ff at eof amp Do formfeed Initialize the Printer 0 NULL amp ch y void piocmdout FF CMD NULL 0 return 0 restore Restore the Printer if Restoreprinter void piocmdout REST_CMD NULL 0 return 0 Guide to Printers and Printing EOF NULL NULL Compile and Link the Print Formatter Use an editor to create an imports file named sample imp The file should contain the following main piogetvals piogetopt piomsgout pioexit piomode piodatasent piopgskip statusfile piocmdout piogetstr Use an editor to create an exports file named sample exp The file should contain the following setup initialize passthru restore lineout Enter the following to compile and link the formatter cc o sample bI sample imp bE sample exp sample c Understanding the Interaction between qdaemon and the Backend T
159. M 4029 LaserPrinter or whatever is correct for your situation provide the name of an existing file in the dev directory This is the file to which processed jobs submitted to the queue you are creating are written The name of the file can be anything that adheres to the base operating Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 133 system naming conventions A reasonable action is to create a file just for the purpose of being the target of file queues For instance the root user can issue the command touch dev Ixx to create a file named Ixx in the dev directory After you provide the name of a file in the dev directory choose a queue name for each input data stream supported by the printer type you selected earlier In this example suppose the name asc was chosen for an ASCII queue An entry like the following would appear in etc qconfig asc device 1xx lxx file dev lxx header never trailer never access both backend usr lib lpd piobe Any print job submitted to the spooler queue asc is processed by the pipeline set up by piobe The processed data stream is written to dev Ixx This is not what you want to happen Since the goal is to have ts print write the output to port 11 on the terminal server there should in fact not even be a file associated with this queue To this end edit the new stanza pair in etc qconfig and change the value of the file parameter to FALSE like this asc device 1
160. M_JPN23 file IBM 4072 ExecJet If support for Greek or Turkish characters is needed and an NLS font card is installed the System needs to know that the font card is installed 1 As the root user type smit chpq 2 Select the appropriate print queue and select Printer Setup on the Change Show Characteristics menu Specify which font card is installed in the left card slot Specify which font card is installed in the right card slot Note The value of the nn variable is the last two digits of the font card part number IBM 4076 InkJet Printer The system selects the IBM ASCII or PCL emulation data stream without manual intervention The InkJet printer can print on paper other than the default 8 1 2 by 11 inch size and on envelopes other than the default 10 envelope The paper and envelope size can be changed using SMIT as described in Specifying Paper Size on page 2 25 To change paper or envelope size for a single print job specify the Q flag with the qprt command IBM Proprinter Models 4201 3 4202 3 4207 2 4208 2 If support for Greek or Turkish characters is needed and the appropriate font diskette is available install the fonts by entering as root user piofontin t PrinterTyp c CodePage d DeviceName Specifically when issuing this command the PrinterType parameter is 4201 3 4202 3 and the CodePage parameter is 851 Greek or 853 Turkish The DeviceName parameter for example dev d1 is
161. NCLUDE File Name Of Digested Data Base Init By piodigest mt md mn mq mv s ANEN EA Idf INCLUDE Directory Containing Loadable Formatter Routines piof5202 L J SIsH INCLUDE FORMATTING FLAGS for header page u SIuH INCLUDE Input PAPER TRAY for header page else Ide INCLUDE Directory Containing Miscellaneous Modules pioburst SF H If H Argument on Command Line 4 Argument gt OUTPUT SIdb INCLUDE Directory Containing Header and Trailer Text Files SMYHEADER Ide INCLUDE Directory Containing Miscellaneous Modules pioformat Q Idd INCLUDE Directory Containing Digested Data Base Files d Imm INCLUDE File Name Of Digested Data Base Init By piodigest mt md mn mq mv EA TOE Idf INCLUDE Directory Containing Loadable Formatter Routines piof5202 L J SIsH INCLUDE FORMATTING FLAGS for header page u SIuH INCLUDE Input PAPER TRAY for header page PNG gS p f The original st definition is repeated twice in the new st definition The shell code checks to see if MYHEADER is defined if MYHEADER is not defined then the header page template H ascii is used else the header page template SMYHEADER is used 4 132 Guide to Printers and Printing Modifying the mo Virtual Printer Attribute All virtual printer definitions contain an attribute named mo The mo attribute specifies the command string to invoke th
162. Packard LaserJets Il Ill IIISi 4 4Si 4Plus 4V 4000 5Si 5Si MX 5Si Mopier 8000 Color and 8500 Color 0 cee eee eens 4 Lexmark 4227 Forms Printer 2 00 c cece eee teen ees 4 69 Lexmark Optra Laser Printer 0000 e eee eee eens 4 70 Lexmark Optra Plus LaserPrinter 0000 ccc eee e eee e nee ene eens 4 72 Lexmark Optra Color 1200 Printer 0 c cece eects 4 74 Lexmark Optra Color 40 Printer 0 000 c cece eee eens 4 78 Lexmark Optra Color 45 Printer 0 00000 c cece eee ete eee 4 81 Lexmark Optra K 1220 Printer 0006s 4 83 Lexmark Optra C Color LaserPrinter 0 00 cece eee eee e eee es 4 86 Lexmark Optra E LaserPrinter 00000 cece cece eee ees 4 89 Lexmark Optra N LaserPrinter 0 000 e cece eee ee eens 4 91 Lexmark Optra E310 Laser Printer 000s cece eee eens 4 95 Lexmark Optra M410 Laser Printer 00 ccc eee eee eee eens 4 98 Lexmark Optra Se Laser Printer 0 0 ccc cece eee eee eens 4 101 Lexmark Optra T Laser Printer Family 0 000 cee eee eee eee ees 4 104 Lexmark Optra W810 Laser Printer 0000 cece eee eens 4 107 Preface ix X Lexmark Plus Printer Models 2380 3 2381 3 2390 3 2391 3 OKI MICROLINE 801PS F 801PSII F 800PSIILT Printronix P9012 Line Printer 0 cc ccc eee eee QMS ColorScript 100 Model 20 Printer
163. Pitch values between 1 and 100 characters per inch cpi in whole integers are supported The condensed print flag K is not supported Font Name Pitch S courier p 1 to 100 s courier bold p 1 to 100 S courier italic p 1 to 100 s courier bold italic p 1 to 100 S gothic p 1 to 100 s gothic bold p 1 to 100 S gothic italic p 1 to 100 s lineprinter p 17 Note To format ASCII files for other font styles use the base operating system enscript utility or the qprt command with the da s and p flags to a Postscript queue For Postscript queues p stands for point size and the valid list of fonts can be found in usr lib ps fontmap Valid point sizes are any integer from 1 to 1008 Only a pitch of 17 is supported for the lineprinter font style Collation Separator Pages Normally the N command line option is used to specify the number of copies desired This method will cause that many copies of the entire print job to be submitted or queued to the print system Since the Optra Color 1200 supports collation internally options were added to support it and the number of copies of each page internally This functionality is limited by the amount of memory installed in your printer and the size of the job The W option determines how many copies of each page is desired where is the number of copies The S option controls whether collati
164. Queues for Systems Administrators 2 19 Native 8 Port 16 Port and Third party Controllers Native port 81 or S2 8 port and 16 port controllers do not provide hardware support for terminal attached printers and the hardware support for third party controllers is unknown As a result print files must be split into small data blocks The mc5 control sequence precedes each data block which is in turn followed by the mc4 control sequence When the terminal receives the mc5 control sequence all subseq uent data is routed to the AUX port until an mc4 control sequence is received Data blocks sent to the terminal must be kept relatively small Sending too many characters to the tty at once may cause output to the printer to be mixed with the echo of what is typed during the sending operation A delay time between data block transmissions must also be established to minimize data reception errors Native port 8 port 16 port and third party controllers have the following virtual printer attributes for specifying block size and delay value y1 Indicates the maximum number of characters in a data block y2 Indicates the number of microseconds to delay between data block transmissions 64 Port Controller The 64 port controller provides hardware support for terminal attached printers The 64 port controller has the following virtual printer attribute yl Sets the priority with which printing will be done over terminal activity Th
165. RePro Collated Copies Printer must have a hard disk drive installed to perform this function S Name Specifies a type style with the Name variable Examples are courier courier bold courier italic courier bold italic lettergothic lineprinter lettergothic bold lettergothic italic prestigeelite prestigeelite bold prestigeelite italic and prestigeelite bold italic u Sets the paper source to one of the following 0 Use Current Input Source Selected on Printer 1 Tray 1 2 Auxiliary Tray Manual Feed for papers 3 Auxiliary Tray Manual Feed for envelopes 4 Auxiliary Tray automatic 5 Tray2 6 Envelope Tray 7 Tray 3 8 Tray 4 9 Tray 5 Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 61 4 62 Guide to Printers and Printing Rotates page printer output the number of quarter turns clockwise as specified by the Value variable The length I and width w values are automatically adjusted accordingly 0 Portrait 1 Landscape 2 Reverse Portrait 3 Reverse Landscape Specifies paper size for the print job Letter Legal Folio 11x17 A4 B4 A3 Universal Paper Size 9 B5 JIS 10A5 11 Executive 12Statement 13 Hagaki 14Monarch Envelope 15COM10 Envelope 16C5 Envelope 17DL Envelope ce N Oo oa 5 WO DNDN a 18Universal Envelope Size IBM InfoPrint 40 Printer Type of Output Paper Handling Default Printer Setting Main Face Down Face up Rear Bin Finisher Bin 1
166. SCW PUSH 1 If w Flag on Command Line Otherwise 0 t THEN fiw For Each Flag x on Command Line xArgument OUTPUT Se lt ELSE gt SI_w INCLUDE COLUMNS per page END The Cw checks to see if the w flag was used on the command line if it was then a 1 is pushed onto the stack else a 0 is pushed onto the stack In this case the w flag was not used on the command line so a 0 is pushed onto the stack The t checks for a true non zero value on the stack and not finding one executes the 96e else construct 9el w The w attribute is defined as lwX shown below as formatted by the Isvirprt command Default Page Width characters wX G z 1 amp t GwK e GWJS SG_WSt 6000 e 3000 G p 17 t 171 e G p 10 d Calculatin Page Width Using Printer Colon File Escape Sequence B 1 oe M IF G z PUSH Page ORIENTATION 1 PUSH Integer Constant 1 amp PUSH pop2 amp popl Bitwise AND St lt THEN gt SGwK PUSH Primary Page Length z 0 or Secondary Page Width z 1 in pels Se lt ELSE gt SGwJ PUSH Primary Page Width z 0 or Secondary Page Length z 1 in pels END 7 IF G p PUSH PITCH characters per inch 17 PUSH Integer Constant 17 S PUSH pop2 popl St lt THEN gt 171 PUSH Integer Constant 171 Se lt ELSE gt G p PUSH PITCH characters
167. Support Printers Support for each printer is provided as a separately installable package To see a list of printers for which support has already been installed on your machine type smit lssprt To install support for additional printers type smit printerinst If your printer is not supported you can configure it as a supported printer that is functionally similar to your printer Otherwise you can configure your printer as a generic printer To do this 1 Select Other as the printer manufacturer or printer model when adding a print queue for the printer OR 2 Select Other serial printer or Other parallel printer when adding a printer device definition for the printer The following is a list of supported printers References for more information on specified printers are provided at the end of this list e Bull Compuprint 4 51 e Bull Compuprint 4 54 e Bull Compuprint 914 e Bull Compuprint 914 N e Bull Compuprint 922 e Bull Compuprint 923 e Bull Compuprint 924 e Bull Compuprint 924 N e Bull Compuprint 956 e Bull Compuprint 970 e Bull Compuprint 1070 e Bull Compuprint PageMaster 200 e Bull Compuprint PageMaster 201 e Bull Compuprint PageMaster 411 e Bull Compuprint PageMaster 413 e Bull Compuprint PageMaster 422 e Bull Compuprint PageMaster 721 e Bull Compuprint PageMaster 815 e Bull Compuprint PageMaster 825 e Bull Compuprint PageMaster 1015 e Bull Compuprint PageMaster 1021 e Bull Compuprint PageMaste
168. Y 790 G S E025 I 1810502 IWY 621 H S F350 1I 1810503 Dy 202425 TL iD 791 _J3 S C950 1 1810533 IWY SAIL KS Dnm 793 L S D020 1 1810504 IWY 697 _O DnEnR 1 3 3 2683 _0 S E020 1 1810505 En IW6 SIwQ 794 _W S B025 1 1810506 Iwy 2795 _X S D030 1 1810507 EtL usr bin ls 1 usr lib lpd pio tran sl usr bin s ed 850S d V WX 1S08859 1 808 _Y Dn 614 _Z DnSIWY 063 _a DnEnR 0 1 0 635 b S D010 I 1810508 E4G 0 25 G 1 0j t e G 1 G t 1 5 d 0 658 d S C925 I 1810509 EnL IW2 Fl1 a 615 e S B010 I 1810510 IWY 659 f 8 C930 I 1810535 EtL S IW3 F1V W7 Dy 623 g S8 C250 I 1810511 ESG 1 1 var spool lpd pio 8local custom asc lpl1 318 lines 15318 chara cters As is indicated by the last line of this sample this is a vi session with the raw unformatted version of the undigested printer colon file for this queue If a write command is issued in this vi session the definition is digested by the piodiges t command and a new version of the digested printer colon file is created The most powerful option in Isvirprt is to type an attribute name followed by a v For instance entering ia v and pressing Enter will result in something like the following being displayed ASCII ia Ide pioformat Idd Imm Idf piof5202 1 IwL w IwW f begijpqstuvxyzEGIJLOOWXZ Uh 4 124 Guide to Printers and Printing Ide INCLUDE Dire
169. a PostScript Printer The Text Formatting System includes the enscript filter for converting ASCII print files to PostScript for printing on a PostScript printer This filter is called by the qprt da command when submitting a print job to a PostScript print queue Prerequisites e The printer must be physically attached to your system e The printer must be configured and defined e The transcript portion of Text Formatting Services must be installed Several flags may be specified with the qprt command to customize the output when submitting ASCII files to a PostScript print queue 1 h string value L p S 1 16 Guide to Printers and Printing Adds page headings Formats the output in two columns Prints the page headings dates and page numbers in a fancy style This is sometimes referred to as gaudy mode Prints the file even if it contains unprintable characters Lists characters that are not included in a font Specifies a string to be used for page headings If this flag is not specified the heading consists of the file name modification date and page number Specifies the maximum number of lines printed per page Depending on the point size fewer lines per page may actually appear Truncates lines longer than the page width Specifies the point size If this flag is not specified a point size of 10 is assumed unless two column rotated mode 2 z1 is specified in which case a
170. ack and stored in the internal variable q Wu already determined to be 1 is again pushed onto the stack 3 pushes a 3 onto the stack then the 96 pops the top two values a 3 and a 1 off the stack and checks to see if the second value popped is less than the first value popped 1 is less than 3 today so a 1 is pushed onto stack The t find the 1 and so enters the if then else then else then else sequence looking for an integer to pair with the paper size value calculated for Q The gq fetches the stored value of _Q from the internal variable q and pushes it onto the stack The 1 pushes a 1 onto the stack The pops the top two values two 1 s off the stack and checking them for equality succeeds a 1 is pushed onto the stack The t finds the 1 and so evaluates the 3200 which pushes a 3200 onto the stack The calculation of wK then falls through all but the last line of the remaining printer colon file escape sequences defining wK The last escape sequence d pops the top value 3200 off the stack and returns it in ASCII format to the in progress calculation of wX The 3200 returned to the in progress calculation of wX is the value of wK and is pushed onto the stack The 96GwJ in the else clause is skipped and the 96 terminates the if then else sequence At this point in the calculation of wJ the remainder of the attribute definition dealt with factors that affected page length in lines such as vertical line density
171. ag to specify either the primary or alternate paper source but definitely not envelopes As with case 3 a page width of 3200 pels will be chosen Case 5 The user specified manual paper handling on the command line and also used the u flag to specify an envelope paper source so Wu is assigned the value 4 and that value is returned to the evaluation of wQ The 4 will cause wQ to be assigned the value of s4 the Guide to Printers and Printing envelope size for manual envelope size a 3 When the evaluation of wK is resumed the u value of 4 will direct the process into the else piece of the outer if then else statement and the Q value of 3 will select an envelope width of 2498 pels e Our example is case 1 neither the O nor the u flags were used on the command line so Wu is assigned a value of 1 the default _u value for this colon file When the evaluation of wQ resumes the match occurs on s1 and a 1 is returned to the evaluation of wK The u value of 1 direct the process into the if piece of the outer if then else statement and the Q value of 1 selects a page width of 3200 pels This value is returned to the evaluation of _w The remaining printer colon file escape sequences defining _w reason that if there are 3200 pels available horizontally and if we want 12 characters per inch and if the resolution of printer is 300 pels per inch then 128 characters can be printed across the page Both the pitch and the printer resolution are mu
172. age is 2400 x 3200 pels width by length Note that if the page is rotated either 90 or 270 degrees for landscape printing the dimensions are swapped and become 3200 x 2400 pels width by length The evaluation of 9elwW begins by checking to see if the w flag was used on the command line if it was then there are no calculations to perform The requested value will be used That is not a promise that it will work just that it will be used If the w flag was not used on the command line then piobe has to figure out how wide the page is under the current job environment as determined by other command line flags and by colon file defaults The first item checked in the evaluation of _w page width is page orientation _z As noted above rotating the page by odd multiples of 90 degrees flips the page dimensions Looking at the if then else statement that is the beginning of the definition of wK it can be seen that the value of _z is a switch that controls which of wJ and wK will be used for page width If the page has a portrait orientation then wJ is width If the page has a landscape orientation then wK is width After the page width in pels is resolved the remainder of the escape sequences in the definition of wK just take pitch and character width double wide or not into account while converting the number of pels to the number of characters The wK attribute is selected because the page orientation is landscape Thus far all that is k
173. al About This Book This book contains information for understanding the print process and provides printer configurations Who Should Use This Book This book is for system administrators and programmers who want to resolve print related problems Before you read this book you should know basic operating system commands This book assumes you are familiar with the information and concepts presented in the following publications e AIX 5L Version 5 2 System User s Guide Operating System and Devices e AIX 5L Version 5 2 System User s Guide Communications and Networks e AIX 5L Version 5 2 Installation Guide and Reference Highlighting The following highlighting conventions are used in this book Bold Identifies commands subroutines keywords files structures directories and other items whose names are predefined by the system Also identifies graphical objects such as buttons labels and icons that the user selects Italics Identifies parameters whose actual names or values are to be supplied by the user Monospace Identifies examples of specific data values examples of text similar to what you might see displayed examples of portions of program code similar to what you might write as a programmer messages from the system or information you should actually type Case Sensitivity in AIX Everything in the AIX operating system is case sensitive which means that it distinguishes between uppercase and lowerc
174. al operators 4 17 command line flags 4 19 conditional operators 4 17 description of 4 13 input values 4 14 internal variables 4 16 logical operators 4 16 pass through from input to output 4 18 relational operators 4 16 F files formatting for printing 1 14 filters formatter 3 10 grep command 5 5 H Hewlett Packard printer information 4 65 IBM printers 4 51 iconv subroutine 4 36 L LDAP configure server 6 43 configure storage 6 43 Lexmark 4227 Forms Printer 4 69 Lexmark Optra C Color laserprinter 4 86 Lexmark Optra E Laser Printer 4 89 Lexmark Optra laserprinter 4 70 Lexmark Optra N Laser Printer 4 91 Lexmark Optra Plus laserprinter 4 72 Lexmark Plus Printers 4 111 libqb backend routines 4 32 local printers 1 1 Ipd daemon 2 30 subsystem 2 34 lpq command 5 7 lprm command 5 7 lpstat command 5 5 mount command 5 8 specifying for F0 2 25 specifying for Hewlett Packard printers 2 25 P piobe command 2 20 pioout command 2 20 Index X 1 PIOTERM environment variables 2 19 plotter 2 9 adding support for 2 10 PostScript printers printing ASCII files 1 16 pr command 1 14 print formatter example of 4 24 print jobs canceling 1 8 definition 1 1 displaying status 1 12 formatting files for 1 14 holding 1 11 moving 1 10 prioritizing 1 9 releasing 1 11 scheduling 2 24 starting 1 4 print queue adding print queue device 2 10 characteristics 2 25 clear
175. al optional input sources refer to your printer documentation to determine which are installed The optional input sources apply no matter which ones are installed If one is not present choosing one will use the default The input source number is for both PCL and PostScript ur anual feed utay 1 ut a3y 2 ut amp y 3 ue amp hvelope feeder urBultipurpose tray Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 91 4 92 Paper Size Guide to Printers and Printing Paper size selection is supported by using O and Q flags of the qprt command The O flag controls paper versus envelope A O value of 3 indicates a paper size and 4 an envelope size The values 1 and 2 were skipped for backward compatibility The first five paper sizes are also numbered for backward compatibility Whenever an invalid value for the input source is selected it is ignored The default for O is 3 or paper The default for Q is 1 or Letter for paper sizes and Monarch for envelope sizes Paper Sizes 0 3 Envelope Sizes 0 4 Q 1 Letter 7 3 4 Monarch Q 2 Legal 9 Com 9 Q 3 B5 paper 10 Com 10 Q 4 A4 DL Q 5 Executive C5 Q 6 A5 B5 Envelope Q 7 B4 Other Envelope MPT only Q8 Q edger 11x17 QCAOtom 11 69x17 69 To change the defaults change sO s5 attributes for each valid input value Since manual feed envelope feeder and the multipurpose tray support both paper and
176. alid existing node DN on the directory under which the AIX information tree and print subtree will be created adminpasswd Specifies the directory LDAP administrator s password Indicates the command is being run to configure the directory for System V print ACLBindPasswd Specifies the password to ACL protect the print subtree on the directory The force flag is required by the mkprtidap command to force the creation of the print subtree and AIX information subtree if needed when one or more AIX information trees exist on the directory Client Side Options Indicates the command is being run to configure clients to use the directory for System V print information Directory Hostname of the IBM Server Directory server set up to Hostname store System V print information Undo a previous configuration of a client ed PrintBindDN Specifies the print bind DN The default print bind DN is ou print cn aixdata The print bind DN to use during client configuration is displayed at the end of the server setup of the mkprtidap command System V Printer Configuration 6 47 Usage Examples ap Pwamse escrito Displays usage information for the mkprtidap command 1 To configure a new installation of IBM Directory for System V print with the administrator DN cn root and root password type mkprtldap s a cn root p root w aclpasswd where the ACLBindpassword is the password used so t
177. als Used for data pacing when DTR is set to yes Held high after printer port opened Provides host status to printer 2 If you use FG as a cable shield make sure that it is only connected at one end It makes no difference which end is connected This provides an efficient shield against electrical noise 3 If your RTS signal is used to supply voltage to CTS on the printer port check to see what your printer does with its RTS signal Although RTS and CTS data pacing is not supported on serial printers the device driver will block the open of the printer port until the voltage of CTS becomes high The CTS signal is usually supplied by the RTS signal from the printer However some printers use the RTS signal for data pacing These printers drop RTS when they want the system to stop sending data Since the queuing system always needs the port opened to check for status if the printer drops the RTS signal the port closes and the queue goes down 4 Some printers require that you raise the voltage of DCD and DSR or CTS on the printer side There are several methods for raising the voltage Use DTR or RTS on the computer side to supply the voltage OR Obtain the voltage from the printer side 2 14 Guide to Printers and Printing Printing with Terminal Attached Printers Many asynchronous ASCII terminals have an auxiliary AUX port that can be used to connect a printer Terminal attached printing is supported for terminals
178. and A value of 3 for the O flag indicates paper and a value of 4 indicates envelope Envelopes are not valid in tray 2 Paper Sizes 0 3 Envelope Sizes 0 4 Q 1 Letter 7 3 4 Monarch Q 2 Legal 9 Com 9 Q 3 B5 paper 10 Com 10 Q 4 A4 DL Q5 Executive C5 Q 6 A5 B5 Envelope Q7 Other Envelope Note The printer file optra_e pcl for PCL 5 defaults the paper size to letter To change the default size change the values for the s1 s3 attributes in the file For example to make A4 the default size for all paper sources change s1 s2 and s3 to 4 This changes the top tray bottom tray and feeder tray sizes respectively The Optra E printer supports paper types rough normal default transparency labels and cardstock using the y parameter of the qprt command or the y attribute in the colon file y Rough ygormal default y Pransparency y labels y Gardstock Note These values apply only to paper and not envelopes The only values supported for tray 2 are rough and normal Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 89 4 90 Print Resolution Pitch Number of Copies for Each Page Guide to Printers and Printing The Optra E printer supports print resolution of 300 and 600 dpi using the q flag of the qprt command The default is 300 dpi q300 q600 Pitch selection is supported for the PCL 5 emulation by using the p flag for pitch and the s flag for
179. and Printing If you are not using the system resource controller SRC you can also restart the queue daemon with the qdaemon command Let the qdaemon print all the jobs in the print queue 3 Make sure the Ipd daemon is up and running by entering startsrc s pd The Ipd daemon provides the remote print server on a network Clearing a Print Queue Backlog To clear the queuing system you must stop qdaemon and check if the var file system is full If so use the following procedure to clear the queue directories and restart the qdaemon 1 Make sure you are logged in as root 2 If possible let all current print jobs finish printing or cancel them To cancel a print job issue the Ipstat command to get the print job number Then use the enq command to cancel each job enq x JobNumber The Ipstat command displays information about the current status of the line printer The enq command enqueues a file 3 Issue the following command to stop qdaemon stopsre s qdaemon 4 Issue the following commands to verify that qdaemon did not fork other processes ps f grep qdaemon ps ef grep pio The ps command shows the current status of processes The grep command searches a file for a pattern If you get one line back from each of the above grep commands skip step 5 and go to step 6 If you get more than one line go to step 5 5 If other qdaemons or pios were returned by the ps ef command kill these processes by
180. and single quotes are needed if you give more than one item in the stty option list Suppose your printer is to be used for printing graphical data where linefeed characters should be output alone without an added carriage return You would type the following command usr sbin lpadmin p printer name o stty onlcr Note that the single quotes are omitted because there is only one item in the list As another example suppose your printer requires odd parity for data sent to it You would enter the following command usr sbin lpadmin p printer name o stty parenb parodd cs7 Setting Up a Printer With Multiple Names 6 42 The print service allows you to set up a single printer with multiple names to perform multiple functions For example if your printer supports both portrait and landscape modes you can set up a different name for each function and then send jobs to each printer name These multiple printers are called virtual printers The print spooler system differentiates printers by name only not by the device to which the printer is connected To specify different names for the same device and prevent multiple print jobs from appearing simultaneously you must set up both the rea printer and additional virtual printers Thr real printer performs the actual printing and the virtual printers pass print jobs to the real printer For example to set up two virtual printers port and land that use the capabilities of a H
181. andard input and writing data to standard output may be used as filters e Examine the kinds of files users will submit for printing that will require processing by the program A good program is one that stands alone that is it does not need to refer to other files Determine if the program expects any files other than those submitted by a user for printing If it does those files must be in the directory of the person using the filter or they must be readable by all users authorized to use the filter The latter prerequisite is necessary because filters are run with the user ID and group ID of the user who submitted the print request e f referenced files are permitted in the files submitted for printing or if the program will need files other than those submitted by a user then the program unable to access the additional files is likely to fail Rather than using the program under consideration as a filter instead have users run the program before submitting files for printing Referenced files that are always specified by full patnnames may be acceptable but only if the filter is used for local print requests When used on requests submitted from a remote machine for printing on your machine the filter may still fail if the referenced files exist only on the remote machine Defining a Filter 6 20 When adding a new filter you must define the characteristics of its use To do this issue the Ipfilter command with arguments t
182. ands in the A X 5L Version 5 2 Commands Reference for the exact syntax See the qprt command in the A X 5L Version 5 2 Commands Reference for the complete syntax smit Command To start a job using SMIT type smit qprt Printers Print Jobs and Queues Overview for Users 1 7 Canceling a Print Job qcan Command This section discusses how to cancel any job in the print queue When you cancel a print job you are prompted to provide the name of the print queue where the job resides and the job number to be canceled This procedure applies to both local and remote print jobs Prerequisites e For local print jobs the printer must be physically attached to your system or in the case of a network printer attached and configured on the network e For remote print jobs your system must be configured to communicate with the remote print server Web based System Manager To cancel a print job using the Web based System Manager fast path type wsm printers In the Printer Queues container select the print job then use the menus to cancel it from a print queue qcan Command The qcan command cancels either a particular job number in a local or remote print queue or all jobs in a local print queue To determine the job number type the qchk command The basic format of the qcan command is qcan PQueueName x JobNumber See the qcan command in the A X 5L Version 5 2 Commands Reference for the complete syntax For example
183. appropriate responses The Optra Se printers support paper types Plain Paper default Bond Transparency Card Stock Labels Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Envelope default for envelope feeder and Custom Type x where x can be 1 through 6 This colon file does not attempt to set these values and will use whatever the printer is set to for that input source The user should insure that the proper paper type is actually installed in the specified source Pitch Duplex Mode Collation Pitch selection is supported for the PCL 5 emulation by using the p flag for pitch and the s flag for font name or type face with the qprt command Pitch values between 1 and 100 characters per inch cpi in whole integers are supported The condensed print flag K is not supported Font Name Pitch S courier p 1 to 100 Ss courier bold p 1 to 100 S courier italic p 1 to 100 s courier bolditalic p 1 to 100 S gothic p 1 to 100 s gothic bold p 1 to 100 S gothic italic p 1 to 100 s lineprinter p 17 Note To format ASCII for other font styles use the base operating system enscript utility or the da flag to a PostScript queue with the qprt command Only a pitch of 17 is supported for the lineprinter font style The qprt command line option Y supports this 0 simplex operation 1 duplex long edge binding 2 duplex short edge binding Normall
184. ar spool Ipd and var spool qdaemon The print queue can back up if the queue daemon has stopped functioning the printer has gone down or has been turned off or a large print job sent to the printer has occupied all resources The var file system can also fill up if other directories in the file system besides the spooling directory grow too large When the var file system is full perform one of the following tasks e Reactivating the Queue Daemon on page 5 4 e Clearing a Print Queue Backlog on page 5 5 e Reallocating Printer Resources on page 5 7 e Deleting Unnecessary Directory Files on page 5 8 Reactivating the Queue Daemon The queue daemon or qdaemon process tracks print job requests and the printers available to handle these requests The qdaemon maintains queues of outstanding requests and as devices become available sends them to the proper device at the proper time If the qdaemon stops functioning you will experience printing problems and will then need to restart the qdaemon using the following procedure Note Some commands may require root user or system group authority 1 Determine if the qdaemon has stopped functioning by entering the following ps command ps f grep qdaemon If you do not see a process called var sbin qdaemon qdaemon or etc qdaemon running the qdaemon is not running 2 Restart the qdaemon by entering the following startsrc command startsrc s qdaemon 5 4 Guide to Printers
185. asc fp z1 p12 s courier C N 3 etc motd and press Enter 3 Type umount bin enq and press Enter The qprt command in step 2 attempts to submit a print job to the spooler and have it placed on the queue named asc requesting three copies of the message of the day in a 12 point Courier font rotated 90 degrees qprt parses its command line arguments and builds an argument vector to pass to enq When the qprt command tries to invoke enq with the argument vector it instead invokes the echo command which is mounted over the enq command Thus the argument vector generated by the qprt command is passed to the echo command which in turn simply echoes the argument vector to your display This procedure will work with Ip and Ipr as well Aside from demonstrating that qprt really is a front end to enq this technique is also useful when you are trying to figure out how to get unsupported flags into the spooler Refer to Filters on page 4 135 for further information Execution of the qprt command in step 2 should cause the following output to be written to the display element specified by your TERM environment variable P asc o o f o p z o 1 o p o 12 o s courier C N 3 etc motd This is the argument vector generated by this specific instance of the qprt command If echo had not been mounted over enq the following job submission command would have been executed nq P asc o f o p o z o 1 o p o 12 o s courier C N 3
186. ase letters For example you can use the Is command to list files If you type LS the system responds that the command is not found Likewise FILEA FiLea and filea are three distinct file names even if they reside in the same directory To avoid causing undesirable actions to be performed always ensure that you use the correct case Preface iii ISO 9000 ISO 9000 registered quality systems were used in the development and manufacturing of this product Related Publications The following publications contain information on system management and the commands and files used in the operating system e AIX 5L Version 5 2 System Management Guide Operating System and Devices e AIX 5L Version 5 2 Commands Reference e AIX 5L Version 5 2 Files Reference iV Guide to Printers and Printing Contents About This BOOK eresia er eile ere err lr mem Ie durer iii Who Should Use This Book 0 00 cc cece teen eh iii RIQhighting as ce pene ee hu seared Share be ade Lixem iux 3 re fees iii Case Sensitivity in AIX 2 0 0 0 cece ne iii IS9 9000 0 of Leu obo deut liectt n ned sick eoi cioe LE Sta iv Related Publications 0 00 cece eects iv Chapter 1 Printers Print Jobs and Queues Overview for Users 1 1 Printer Terminology sseeseeeeseeesee III RII 1 1 Starting a Print Job qprt Command 0 00 cece eee 1 4 Pr requisites eies oorr yip VE KASES EREA ARARE ed ER 1 4 gpre Command
187. ata Manager ODM database Objects are used in the Print a File Printer Setup and Default Job Characteristics dialog screens The limits field gives the creator of the colon file control over the type of ODM object built for a given attribute All objects built for the Limits field are part of the sm cmd opt object class The 1imits field allows control over the following fields in a sm cmd opt object class id seq num e entry type e cmd to list mode e required op type e multi select e cmd to list mode e disp values aix values values msg file values msg get help msg id help msg loc These attributes can be set to be displayed always never or only if the attribute is referenced in the pipeline For detailed descriptions of these fields see sm cmd opt SMIT Dialog Selector Command Option Object Class in A X 5L Version 5 2 General Programming Concepts Writing and Debugging Programs The validation information is used to validate attribute values when the colon file is digested and when a print job is submitted Guide to Printers and Printing Contents of the limits Field The limits field is the fourth field in the colon file Colon file attributes have the following format Message Catalog Message Number Attr Name Limits Value Information in the 1imits field has two components The first component is a single letter operator specifying an action The letter value can be one of the followin
188. ated under this new object cn aixdata o ibm c us 4 To configure System V print information under a separate AIX information tree when the directory contains an existing AIX information tree for other subsystem specific information There could be situations in which the directory may contain an existing AIX information tree with Security or NIS information It may be necessary to store the print information in a separate location on the directory under a different AIX information tree By default the mkprtldap command does not create an AIX information tree if one exists on the directory To force the mkprtldap command to create an AIX information tree to store the print information use the f flag Consider an example where the security and NIS subsystem information is stored under the AIX information tree at cn aixdata o ibm c us To create a new AIX information tree for print information different from the existing one run the command with the f flag and specify the default location or another node The Administrator DN and password are required to configure System V print on the directory For example if the existing administrator s DN and password are cn admin and passwd type mkprtldap a cn admin p passwd w passwd123 f Running the command creates an AIX information tree cn aixdata with the suffix cn aixdata and the print information is stored under this new AIX information tree ou print cn aixdata There will be two A
189. canon jet 10ex name Canon Bubble Jet 10ex terminfo bj 10ex interface standard hp laserjet name HP LaserJet PCL terminfo hplaserjet interface standard contents pcl stty clocal onlcr Printer Interface Scripts A printer interface script is a program that the print service uses to manage the printer each time it prints a file The interface script initializes the printer takes advantage of its particular capabilities prints the file and reports any errors Note If you have an interface program that you have used with the print service of an older UNIX system it should still work Be aware though that several o options have been standardized and will be passed to every interface program These options may interfere with similarly named options your interface program uses The printer interface scripts are associated with the printer model and are located in etc lp model For example the printer interface script for a PostScript printer is called etc lp model PS You can also create your own interface scripts or customize existing ones to suit your needs See Creating Printer Interface Scripts on page 6 10 Interface scripts do the following e Initialize the printer port the connection between the computer and the printer The standard etc Ip model standard interface script uses the stty command to initialize the printer port e Initialize the physical printer restore the printer to a normal stat
190. cece eect eens 4 52 IBM 4019 LaserPrinter and 4029 LaserPrinter 0 0 cee eee eee 4 52 IBM 4037 and IBM 4039 LaserPrinter 0 0 0 cece eee eee 4 53 IBM 4072 ExecJet iongu d edena nar bas rid IU ER T aS RRMERRU ned eed 4 53 IBM 4076 InkJet Printer 2 cent enes 4 53 IBM Proprinter Models 4201 3 4202 3 4207 2 4208 2 005 4 53 IBM 4208 502 IBM 5572 B02 IBM 5573 H02 and IBM 5579 H02 K02 4 54 IBM 4216 Personal Page Printer Model 031 Lseeuessuss 4 54 IBM 4216 510 and IBM 5327 011 2 eee 4 54 IBM 4234 Printer orei enpa teeta 4 54 IBM 5202 Quietwriter II 6 eee teens 4 54 IBM 5204 QUICKWTITIGE to reete Era bee e gana see etre 4 55 IBM 5575 B02 F02 H02 and IBM 5577 B02 F02 FU2 G02 H02 J02 K02 4 55 IBM 5584 G02 H02 IBM 5585 H01 IBM 5587 G01 H01 and IBM 5589 H01 4 55 IBM 6252 Impactwriter and IBM 6252 Printer sssleeeseeeesssesss 4 55 IBM Network Color Printer 00 0c cece eee eee III 4 55 IBM Network Printer 12 17 and 24 0 ee eee eee 4 57 IBM InfoPrint 20 iere iad pad RIETI eke tae 4 59 IBM InfoPrint 32 Printer 00 eee eens 4 61 IBM InfoPrint 40 Printer aa e E E ees 4 63 Canon LASER SHOT LBP B404PS Lite 000 0c c cece eee eee ee 4 65 Canon LASER SHOT LBP B406S D E G A404 E A304E 4 65 Dataproducts LZR 2665 Laser Printer 0 0 cece eee eee eee 4 65 Hewlett
191. check to see if the qdaemon is waiting on a job to complete before it runs any more jobs use the Ipstat command to see if any jobs have a status of RUNNING If so physically examine the printers that show RUNNING jobs and verify that at least one job is actually running If one or more printers are showing DEV WAIT because of paper jams or because they are out of paper fix the problem and see if the printers begin printing If they do not begin printing again use the Ipstat command to see if the queue status is RUNNING In any of these circumstances the purpose of checking the printers is to verify that at least one printer is actually printing even though the qdaemon is not starting new jobs Now submit a new job to the spooler with the command enq Pasc etc motd Use the Ipstat command to examine the queue status If the new job has a job number of NEW then the qdaemon is for some reason focused on running other jobs and will not start any new jobs until the current jobs are complete You can only wait You can not even cancel the jobs that are running Job cancellation requests are jobs as well and the qdaemon is not taking new jobs Troubleshooting the Base Operating System Spooler 5 13 Testing a Spooler Queue When spooling jobs from an application it is often not clear if a job is actually getting to the spooler Again assume you are having problems with a queue named asc Issue the command disable asc to disable the spooler queu
192. cified printer backend flag values This validation is useful in checking for illegal flag values at the time of submitting a print job If the validation is not specified an incorrect flag value will stop the print job later when the job is actually being processed The following list contains examples of how to use the qprt command flags To request the file myfile to be printed on the first available printer configured for the default print queue using default values type qprt myfile To request the file myfile to be printed on a specific queue using specific flag values and to validate the flag values at the time of print job submission type qprt f p Pfastest v somefile This passes the myfile file through the pr filter command the f p flag and prints it using emphasized mode the e flag on the first available printer configured for the queue named fastest the Pfastest flag e To printmyfile on legal size paper type qprt 02 myfile e To print three copies of each of the files new index c print index c andmore c at the print queue Msp1 type qprt PMspl N 3 new index c print index c more c e To print three copies of the concatenation of three files new index c print index c and more c type cat new index c print index c more c qprt PMspl N 3 Note The base operating system also supports the BSD UNIX print command Ipr and the System V UNIX print command Ip See the Ipr and Ip comm
193. com http www bull com at N R f rence CEDOC Qt N R f rence CEDOC Qt N R f rence CEDOC Qt no revision number means latest revision pas de num ro de r vision signifie r vision la plus r cente 2 ee E SCA een E SEIN NE eae Es ee See esee SENE eee ell pj I ES j user i i NOM NAME Date SOCIETE COMPANY ADRESSE ADDRESS PHONE TELEPHONE FAX E MAIL For Bull Subsidiaries Pour les Filiales Bull Identification For Bull Affiliated Customers Pour les Clients Affili s Bull Customer Code Code Client For Bull Internal Customers Pour les Clients Internes Bull Budgetary Section Section Budg taire For Others Pour les Autres Please ask your Bull representative Merci de demander votre contact Bull BULL CEDOC 357 AVENUE PATTON B P 20845 49008 ANGERS CEDEX 01 FRANCE ORDER REFERENCE 86 A2 30EF 01 tc Ww z O we z W 9 om cz c mo uuo gt sw zl JUGI Ico Illa uuvo uc uvcuvUupvce puUul YOIH Ivo CUJUS Use the cut marks to get the labels AIX AIX 5L Guide to Printers and Printing 86 A2 30EF 01 AIX AIX 5L Guide to Printers and Printing 86 A2 30EF 01 AIX AIX 5L Guide to Printers and Printing 86 A2 30EF 01
194. command and the enq command have the appropriate permissions The person with root authority owns both the qdaemon command and the enq command The qdaemon command and the enq command must run as if they are run by the user who owns them 5 10 Guide to Printers and Printing The permission bit s sets the effective owner user ID of a process to that of the nominal owner The appropriate permissions for these two commands are qdaemon r sr s To check these permissions enter aclget usr sbin qdaemon To reset permissions enter tcbck y usr sbin qdaemon You must have root user authority to reset these permissions enq r sr sr x To check these permissions enter aclget usr bin enq To reset permissions enter tcbck y usr bin enq You must have root user authority to reset these permissions If you continue to have problems with the qdaemon command you can use the following procedure to reinitialize the entire queuing system 1 If the qdaemon command is running use the ps ef command to find out end it by entering stopsrc s qdaemon 2 If any backends are running use the kill command to stop them 3 Delete the contents of the following directories var spool lIpd stat var spool lpd qdir Note All jobs currently queued for printing are canceled and must be resubmitted 4 Restart the qdaemon command by entering startsrc s qdaemon Troubleshooting the Base Operating System Spooler 5 11 Que
195. ction Spooler Concepts Formatter Filters Local and Remote Spooler Local and Remote Printers Printer Devices qdaemon Real Physical and Virtual Spooler Spooler Backends Spooler Job Queues and Spooler Devices Printers oe saarena a cud nrbe ixi Generic Base Operating System Spooler 0c ccc cece eee eens Spooler Parts Spooler Data Flow Commands and Backend cece eee eens Spooler Data Flow eng Command 0 0 cee cece eee tenes Overview of Backend Processing ccee eect teen eee aee Datastream Flow for Common Print Jobs 00 0 cece eee ene ees Virtual Printers and Formatter UTS aes Mics ost mete elt set ue eem e exe dus letc qconfig Spooler Configuration File 0 cece cece eee eens etc qconfig File Structure Spooler Queues Virtual Printers and Physical Printers Spooler Queue Names and Status Formats 0 00 cee eee eens Chapter 4 Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming Printer Backend Overview for Printer Backend Data Flow Programming cece eect eee Virtual Printer Definitions and Attributes 00 eee eee Working with Virtual Printer Attributes l l Printer Colon File Escape Sequences cc cece eee e eens Pr
196. ctionality is limited by the amount of memory installed in your printer and the size of the job The W option determines how many copies of each page is desired where is the number of copies The S option controls whether collation is desired The default is or not The main advantages of using the W and S options are to conserve printer subsystem usage and allow the printer to handle multiple copies instead of sending copies to the printer Using the S options with W also allows copies of each page in a row if that is desired Note that using N and W simultaneously is allowed This would result in N print jobs with W copies of each page in each job The E flag controls separator pages The valid values are 0 1 2 and 3 which represent NONE BETWEENCOPIES BETWEENJOBS and BETWEENPAGES respectively The paper source for separator pages is set via the colon file attribute uS and defaults to TRAY 1 The valid values for uS are the same as uH and uT except manual feed is not a valid source for separator pages To change the default the uS attribute must be changed in the virtual printer to one of the valid values see paper source above Lexmark Optra Color 45 Printer Paper Source Paper Size Paper source selection is supported for both the PCL 5 emulation and the PostScript Language by using the u flag of the qprt command ur anual feed utay 1 Paper size selection is supported by using th
197. ctory Containing Miscellaneous Modules pioformat Idd INCLUDE Directory Containing Digested Data Base Fil es ry SImm INCLUDE File Name Of Digested Data Base Init By piodigest mt md mn mq mv LEA Idf INCLUDE Directory Containing Loadable Formatter Rou tines piof5202 1 SIwL INCLUDE Page Length In Chars Using Length From Dat a Base used in pipelines w SIww INCLUDE Page Width In Characters Using Width From Data Base used in pipelines r r Sf begijpqstuvxyzEGIJLOQWXZ For Each Flag x on Command Line xArgument gt OUTPUT Uh Indicate to piobe Pass the Following Attributes to s ubsequent printer commands tmp asc lpl ia 24 lines 1001 characters As is indicated by the last line of the sample this is again a vi session but this time the attribute definition has been formatted and annotated Here the root user can modify the attribute definition if a write command is issued in this vi session the definition is digested by the piodigest command and a new version of the digested printer colon file is created The formatted sample is divided into three parts The first part is the iaz followed by the attribute definition strung out horizontally The second part is the annotations on the right hand side of the vi session the comments that describe the function of each particular printer colon file escape seque
198. d setup attempt For details on how to remove data or databases see the IBM DB2 documentation System V Print Information Subtree System V print information is stored under the print subtree which in turn is stored under a default AIX Information tree cn aixdata on the directory The AIX information tree is a top level container object under which the different directory enabled AIX subsystems can store their information It is recommended to store the print information in the default location on the directory However the mkprtldap command provides the option to store the print information under an existing node on the directory The following illustration shows the AIX System V print information stored in the directory in the form of a directory information tree DIT Figure 5 Organization of AIX System V Print Information This tree chart shows the organization of the System V print information in the LDAP directory The AIX Information tree contains a top level object cn aixdata of objectclass type container The suffix under which the information is stored is also cn aixdata Subsystem specific information is stored under this top level container object The top level container object has subsystem specific top level objects for example ou print for System V print information and cn aixsecdb for User Group information under it System V print information is stored under the ou print object The ou print object has three objects unde
199. d H ascii is the prototype text for header pages to be printed in ASCII and T ps is the prototype text for trailer pages to be printed in PostScript The escape sequences used in the text files begin with the 96 percent character and are described with the pioburst command The following sections give you information specific to certain printers that you might need to configure and set up your printer and queue systems e BM Personal Printer II Models 2380 2381 2390 2391 2380 2 2381 2 2390 2 2391 2 on page 4 51 e IBM 3812 Model 2 Page Printer on page 4 51 e IBM 3816 Page Printer on page 4 52 e IBM 4019 LaserPrinter and 4029 LaserPrinter on page 4 52 e IBM 4037 and IBM 4039 LaserPrinter on page 4 53 e IBM 4076 InkJet Printer on page 4 53 e IBM Proprinter Models 4201 3 4202 3 4207 2 4208 2 on page 4 53 e IBM 4072 ExecJet on page 4 53 e IBM 4208 502 IBM 5572 B02 IBM 5573 H02 and IBM 5579 H02 K02 on page 4 54 e IBM 4216 Personal Page Printer Model 031 on page 4 54 e IBM 4216 510 and IBM 5327 011 on page 4 54 e IBM 4037 and IBM 4039 LaserPrinter on page 4 53 e IBM 5202 Quietwriter Ill on page 4 54 e IBM 5204 Quickwriter on page 4 55 e IBM 5575 B02 F02 H02 and IBM 5577 B02 F02 FU2 G02 H02 J02 K02 on page 4 55 e IBM 5584 G02 H02 IBM 5585 H01 IBM 5587 G01 H01 and IBM 5589 H01 on page 4 55 e IBM 6252 Impactwriter and IBM 6252 Printer on page 4 55 e IBM Network Color Printer on page 4 55 e IBM Network Printer 1
200. d Printing Paper size selection is supported by using O and Q flags of the qprt command The O flag controls paper versus envelope A O value of 3 indicates a paper size and 4 an envelope size The values 1 and 2 were skipped for backward compatibility Envelopes are only valid for manual feed envelope feeder or the multipurpose tray The default for Q is 1 or Letter for paper sizes and 3 or Com 10 for envelope sizes To change the defaults change the s0 s7 attributes respectively for each of the valid input sources Since manual feed and the multipurpose tray support both paper and envelopes the default for paper is the e se part e1 and the default for envelopes is the then part t3 of sO and s7 Paper Sizes O 3 Envelope Sizes O 4 Q 1 Letter 7 3 4 Monarch Q 2 Legal 9 Com 9 Q 3 B5 JIS B5 10 Com 10 Q4A4 DL Q 5 Executive C5 Q 6 A5 B5 Envelope Q 7 Custom Universal Other Envelope Note For PCL queues if the selected size is not in the selected input source a search sequence will be used to find the size requested If the size is found that source will be used For PostScript queues if the selected size is not in the selected input source the printer will prompt the user to load the source with the appropriate size This may result in an unexpected paper source being used or an op panel message that may not make sense at first Please refer to the manual to determine
201. d by the W and S flags of the qprt command Saollation off Soellation on Snumber of copies Note This function is independent of the N flag of the qprt command The N flag will cause the print job to be sent to the printer times The W will send the print job once and copies of the job will be printed Separator Pages The Optra C printer supports internally generated separator pages This feature is controlled by the E flag of the qprt command ENone EBetween Copies EBeiween Jobs EBetween Pages The paper source defaults to Feeder To change the default the uS attribute must be changed in the virtual printer The valid values for uS are the same as the paper source flag Note This function is independent of the B flag of the qprt command Guide to Printers and Printing Lexmark Optra E LaserPrinter Paper Source Paper Size Paper Type Paper source selection is supported for both the PCL 5 emulation and the PostScript Language by using the u flag of the qprt command PCL umhanual feed ut amp p tray ul bttom tray By default the banner and trailer pages come from the top tray To change the default change the values for the uH and or uT attributes respectively in the colon file to the value for the desired paper source s1 s3 Use the Isvirprt command Paper size selection is supported for the PCL 5 emulation by using the Q and O flags of the qprt comm
202. d names define SMIT selector IDs The Value variable must contain a SMIT selector ID The selector ID value of each field specifies the target of the branch The SMIT fields are e submit job add queue add printer remove queue printer conn change queue change filters Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 39 Every attachment file should contain the description add queue and remove queu fields All other fields are optional Fields with a null value are treated as if the field were missing There is no restriction on the other contents of an attachment file The following example attachment file is named term serv attach description term serv cat 1 3 Printer Attached to Terminal Server seq num 2 submit job term serv start job add queue term serv add add printer term serv printer remove queue term serv remov printer conn term serv printer conn change queue term serv change change filters term serv change filters unsupported ibm6252 ibm6262 Attachment File Field Definitions 4 40 The following field definitions detail the attachment type fields formats for the field values and practical examples of field values description Specifies the description string that appears on the SMIT Attachment type menu The SMIT Attachment type menu lists all supported attachment types on the system This field is required in order for the attachment type to appear on
203. d output the full path name of your current directory from the root directory The rm command removes the entries for the specified file or files from a directory 10 Change the directory again cd var spool lpd stat 11 lssue a pwd command to verify that you are in the proper directory Then remove all files in this directory xm 12 Change the directory again cd var spool qdaemon 13 lssue a pwd command to verify that you are in the proper directory Then remove all files in this directory rm 14 Follow this step if you are having trouble with the remote queue or Ipd Change the directory cd var spool lpd Issue a pwd to verify that you are in the proper directory Then remove all files in this directory using the rm command rm Note The rm command will not remove the subdirectories 15 Start qdaemon startsrc s qdaemon The queuing system should start normally If some queues are still down bring them up by entering nable QueueNam 5 6 Guide to Printers and Printing Reallocating Printer Resources Use the following procedures to avoid having one print job use all of the printer resources Note Some commands may require root user or system group authority 1 Determine if a print job is using all resources in one of two ways Use the following Ipq command lpq The Ipq command when entered without flags reports the status of the default queue Use the following eng command enq q The
204. d use Web based System Manager to manage your print service Print Service Commands Available to All Users cancel Cancels a request for a file to be printed Ipstat Reports the status of the print service The administrator can give users the ability to disable and enable a printer so that if a printer is malfunctioning the user can turn the printer off without having to call the administrator 6 4 Guide to Printers and Printing However in your printing environment it might not be reasonable to allow regular users to disable a printer The Administrative Print Service Commands Table lists print service commands available only to the administrator To use the administrative commands you must be logged in as root user The administrative print service commands are located in the usr lib directory If you use these commands frequently include usr lib in your PATH variable Administrative Print Service Commands accept Permits jobs to be queued for a specified reject destination Prevents jobs from being queued for a specified destination Cancels requests to a line printer enable Activates the named printers disable Sets up or changes printer configurations Provides BSD line printer control pfilter 1 Sets up or changes filter definitions Sets up or changes preprinted forms use usr sbin Ipadmin to mount a form Moves output requests from one destination to another Ipsched Starts the
205. default suffix cn aixdata to the etc sldap32 conf file if the suffix does not exist Creates the AIX information tree container object cn aixdata if it not found in the Directory The cn aixdata is a top level container object under which the print subtree ou print is then created 6 The print subtree is ACL protected with the value of the ACLBindPasswd parameter passed to the command The same value must be used when configuring clients to use the directory for System V print information 7 If the d flag is used and a valid existing node on the directory is passed to the command the AIX information subtree is created under the given node The print subtree is then created under the AIX information subtree 8 Starts the IBM Directory server after all the previous steps are completed Note If IBM Directory has been configured previously the Administrator DN and password are needed to run the mkprtldap command The LDAP configuration is saved in the etc slapd32 conf file Note If the IBM Directory LDAP server configuration is not successful no undo option is provided for the server side configuration Refer to the IBM Directory documentation for any errors that occur during the configuration If Guide to Printers and Printing the database information was created by the mkprtldap command you must remove it manually If the mkprtldap command has added data to a preexisting database you must determine how to recover from a faile
206. default values supported include 10 pitch courier font q uality 1 or draft The valid font values include Font Name gast draft raft scourier gothic The valid quality values include Quality q flag 0 fast draft 1 draft 2 near letter quality The valid pitch values are 10 12 17 and 20 Notes 1 Selection of draft or fast draft will override the selected font 2 Bold font is supported using the e flag and emphasized print Italic font is supported using the k flag and italic print The w flag controls the width of the printable page in characters The default is 136 Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 69 Lexmark Optra Laser Printer 4 70 Paper Source Paper Size Paper Type Guide to Printers and Printing Paper source selection is supported for both the enhanced PCL R 5 emulation and the PostScript Level 2 emulation by using the u flag of the qprt command There are several optional input sources The input source number is the same for both PCL and PostScript ur anual feed utiay 1 ut ay 2 ut amp ay 3 uf eder or feeder 1 ufbeder 2 By default the banner and trailer pages come from the top tray To change the default change the values for the uH and or uT attributes respectively in the colon file to the value for the desired paper source s0 S5 Use the Isvirprt command Paper size selection is supported by using eith
207. definitions are required for a complete filter definition See Using Templates to Defining Options on page 6 23 When you have gathered enough information to define the characteristics of your filter you are ready to run the Ipfilter command using your data as arguments Because there are so many arguments and because some of them may need to be entered more than once with different values record this information first in a separate file and edit it if necessary You can then use the file as input to the Ipfilter command and avoid typing each piece of information separately Using Templates to Defining Options A template is a statement in a filter definition that defines an option to be passed to the filter command based on the value of one of the characteristics of the filter A filter definition may include more than one template Multiple templates may be entered on a single line and separated with commas or they may be entered on separate lines preceded by the Options prefix The format of a template is as follows keyword pattern replacement This type of statement is interpreted by the print service to mean When the information referred to by keyword has the value matched by pattern take the replacement string replace any asterisks it contains with the pattern specified or expand any regular expressions it contains and append the result to the command line As an example suppose you want to have the print service sched
208. devices Prerequisites e For local print queues the printer must be physically attached to your system e For remote print queues your system must be configured to communicate with the remote print server e To change queue or queue device characteristics you must have root authority Change or Show Print Queue Characteristics 1 At the system prompt type wsm then select Devices 2 In the Web based System Manager Devices window select Queue Print Processor or Print Destination 3 Select Properties 4 View or change the desired attributes You can also perform this procedure with the chque chquedev Isvirprt and chvirprt commands or with the SMIT fast path smit chpq Specifying Paper Size Prerequisites To perform this task the print queue must already be configured Web based System Manager 1 Load paper in the paper tray 2 Refer to your printer documentation for information about specifying the paper size then use the operator panel buttons to enter the paper size 3 At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers 4 In the Web based System Manager Printers window double click on the printer icon From the Selected menu choose Properties Information pertaining to paper size will be displayed in the Printer Properties Setup dialog You can also perform this task with the pioevattr q Queue d S Printer command or with the SMIT fast path smit chpq Printers Print Jobs and Queues for S
209. directories The information about the job is split into two files so that the system can keep sensitive information secure in the usr spool Ip requests directory The user who submitted the job has access to the request file in usr spool Ip temp only the printer administrator or root user has access to the file in usr spool lp requests The request files remain in these directories only while the job is in the queue When the job finishes printing the information in the two files is combined and appended to the request log usr spool Ip logs requests The structure of the request log allows you to extract data using common shell commands The requests are listed in the order in which they were printed separated by lines that begin with the request ID Each line below the separator line is marked with a single letter the request log code that identifies the kind of information contained in the line Each letter is separated from the data by a single space The table following the sample entry describes these codes Following is a sample entry from the print request log ps 717 uid 1532 gid 18 size 7872 Tue May 10 14 43 10 1994 ps 1 ps usr spool lp temp 717 1 20 simple hanna 0x0010 Q Gcet uooN Request Log Entries Content of line The separator line lists the comma separated request ID user ID uid and group ID gid of the user who submitted the request total number of bytes in the original unfiltered
210. dmin printer model stz contains a list of supported printers and their attributes Web based System Manager uses this file to configure a new printer The format is as follows key atir1 val attr2 val2 key2 The file includes a text description of each supported make and model pointers to a printer interface script and a terminfo entry It can also contain additional information such as required serial line settings or supported content types The following attributes are available contents A quoted comma separated list of the content types supported for a printer usually just PS for postscript pel for Hewlett Packard s Printer Control Language or simple for most other printers Additional content types can be supported by creating Print Filters See Providing Filters on page 6 18 This attribute is optional interface The Printer Interface Script should be set to standard in most cases See Printer Interface Scripts on page 6 9 This attribute is mandatory name A text description of a printer make model This attribute is mandatory terminfo Is the name of the terminfo entry associated with this printer See Using the terminfo Database on page 6 13 This attribute is optional stty Any serial or parallel line settings appropriate for the printer This attribute is optional In addition each printer must have a unique key name associated with it as shown in these examples Guide to Printers and Printing
211. dministrator without reprinting the entire job specify that the interface script send a fault message to the print service but wait for the fault to clear When the fault clears the interface script resumes printing the job When the job finishes printing the interface script can exit with zero as if the fault never occurred An added advantage is that the interface script can detect when the fault is cleared automatically so that the administrator does not have to re enable the printer To specify that fault messages be sent to the print service use the Ip tell command The standard printer interface code calls the Ip tell command with the LPTELL shell variable The Ip tell program sends its standard input to the print service The print service forwards the message as an alert to the administrator If its standard input is empty Ip tell does not initiate an alert Examine the code immediately following these comments in the standard interface script for an example of how to use the Ip tell LPTELL program Here s where we set up the SLPTELL program to capture fault messages Here s where we print the file With the special exit code 129 or Ip tell the interface script need not disable the printer itself Your interface script can disable the printer directly but doing so overrides the fault alerting mechanism Alerts are sent only if the print service detects that the printer has faulted and the special exit code and Ip
212. ds which must be filled in by the backend itself To provide this information the backend should periodically call the libqb see Understanding Backend Routines in libqb on page 4 32 for the following functions log progress pages percent log pages pages for individual function log percent percent for individual function The backend can call these routines at any time once at the end of each page is recommended Charging for the Job 4 28 When a backend completes a job the qdaemon reads the status file for a charge If the qconfig file has been set up to do so the charge is written to a file that is eventually processed by the accounting programs This results in a bill real or imaginary for the user issuing the print request The backend passes the charge back to the qdaemon with the routine log charge charge See Understanding Backend Routines in libqb on page 4 32 The backend should call this routine on exit It should also call the routine along with log progress while printing the job For more information see Updating Job Status Information on page 4 28 Otherwise if the job is canceled no charge will be made for the pages printed up to that point The charge is interpreted by all current accounting programs as the number of pages printed However a backend can set the charge to be based on any multiplier whole or fraction of pages printed For more information about job accounting see Spooler Overview
213. e Reference Ne 86 A2 30EF 01 Dat Dated October 2002 ERREURS DETECTEES ERRORS IN PUBLICATION AMELIORATIONS SUGGEREES SUGGESTIONS FOR IMPROVEMENT TO PUBLICATION Vos remarques et suggestions seront examin es attentivement Si vous d sirez une r ponse crite veuillez indiquer ci apr s votre adresse postale compl te Your comments will be promptly investigated by qualified technical personnel and action will be taken as required If you require a written reply please furnish your complete mailing address below NOM NAME Date SOCIETE COMPANY ADRESSE ADDRESS Remettez cet imprim un responsable BULL ou envoyez le directement Please give this technical publication remark form to your BULL representative or mail to BULL CEDOC 357 AVENUE PATTON B P 20845 49008 ANGERS CEDEX 01 FRANCE ICONIC FPUNMICGUUS VGC FOr Bon de Commande de Documents Techniques To order additional publications please fill up a copy of this form and send it via mail to Pour commander des documents techniques remplissez une copie de ce formulaire et envoyez la a BULL CEDOC ATTN Mr L CHERUBIN Phone T l phone 33 0 2 41 73 63 96 357 AVENUE PATTON FAX T l copie 33 0 2 41 73 60 19 B P 20845 E Mail Courrier Electronique srv Cedoc franp bull fr 49008 ANGERS CEDEX 01 FRANCE Or visit our web sites at Ou visitez nos sites web a http www logistics bull net cedoc http www frec bull
214. e Issue the command lpstat pasc to verify that the queue is DOWN Now submit a job to the queue using the application Use Ipstat to verify that the job is on the asc queue as long as the queue status is in a temporary DOWN state the qdaemon will put a job on the queue but will not allow it to be processed If the job is not on the queue use personal knowledge application documentation or application technical support to determine what might be wrong If possible determine exactly what job submission command or method is being used by the application and try it from the command line It is possible that the application is hiding error messages being returned by either enq or the qdaemon Copying Spooled Jobs Particularly in a remote spooling environment it can be useful to make a copy of a spooled print job When a job is submitted to the spooler a job description file JDF is created and stored in var spool Ipd qdir If the queue is a remote queue with something like rembak as the backend the job will be transferred to the print server where enq will make another JDF and put the job onto the specified print server queue If jobs seem to be vanishing at the print server disable the print server queue disable asc for the ASCII queue example and resubmit the job Since the asc is down the Ipstat command should show the job as queued but the queue will be DOWN and so the job will not be processed Look in var spool Ipd qdir fo
215. e options and shows the option to include on the Ip command line for each one y reverse Reverse the order in which pages are printed y landscape Change the orientation of a physical page from portrait to landscape y xz numbery number Change the default position of a logical page on a physical page by moving the origin y group number Group multiple logical pages on a single physical page y magnifyz number Change the logical size of each page ina document o lengthz number Select the number of lines in each page of the document P num Jlist Select by page numbers a subset of a document to be printed where num Jlist is page numbers or page ranges separated by commas for example 1 4 6 8 14 prints pages 1 4 6 7 8 and 14 through the end n number Print multiple copies of a document 6 30 Guide to Printers and Printing Note If these filters are to be used with an application that creates PostScript output make sure that the format of the application conforms to the format of the PostScript file structuring comments In particular the beginning of each PostScript page must be marked by the comment S Page label ordinal where ordinal is a positive integer that specifies the position of the page in the sequence of pages in the document and abel is an arbitrary page label For example you have a file called report2 that has a content type simple meaning that the content of this file is in ASCII for
216. e text after the parameters are extracted from the message catalog file in the server s locale The print supervisor can use the message text or build its own message text from the supplied message catalog information and the message parameters However the printer backend cannot provide message catalog information message number set number and catalog name and variable message parameters in all cases Therefore the print supervisor must check for the catalog name field pm catnm field to determine if the catalog name is a null string If the catalog name is a null string the print supervisor must use the supplied expanded message text If a catalog name is provided the print supervisor can extract the message from the catalog and place any supplied message parameters in the message The message parameters can be integer or string type However message parameters are passed from the printer backend as strings concatenated to the expanded message text If the print supervisor extracts the message from the specified catalog and places the parameters in the message the following conventions apply Guide to Printers and Printing e Parameters can be integer or string type but are always passed in the pipe as strings with a trailing NUL character The length of each parameter in string format is supplied in the parameter s associated header frame e Extracted messages can contain escape sequences recognized by the printf subroutine Therefore
217. e Optra Color 45 supports collation internally options were added to support it and the number of copies of each page internally This functionality is limited by the amount of memory installed in your printer and the size of the job The W option determines how many copies of each page is desired where is the number of copies The S option controls whether collation is desired The default is or not The main advantages of using the W and S options are to conserve printer subsystem usage and allow the printer to handle multiple copies instead of sending copies to the printer Using the S options with W also allows copies of each page in a row if that is desired Note that using N and W simultaneously is allowed This would result in N print jobs with W copies of each page in each job The E flag controls separator pages The valid values are 0 1 2 and 3 which represent NONE BETWEENCOPIES BETWEENJOBS and BETWEENPAGES respectively The paper source for separator pages is set via the colon file attribute uS and defaults to TRAY 1 The valid values for uS are the same as uH and uT except manual feed is not a valid source for separator pages To change the default the uS attribute must be changed in the virtual printer to one of the valid values see paper source above Lexmark Optra K 1220 Printer Paper Source Paper source selection is supported for both the enhanced PCL R 5e emulation and the
218. e Schedules the work of one or more printers e Starts programs that interface with the printers e Keeps track of the status of jobs e Alerts you to printer problems e Keeps track of mounting forms and filters e Issues error messages when problems arise When a user sends a file to a printer the print service assigns to the request print job a unique name the request ID The request ID consists of the name of the printer on which the file is to be printed and a unique number identifying the file Use this request ID to find out the status of the print job or to cancel the print job The print service keeps track of all the print requests in the request log The print job is spooled or lined up with other print jobs to be sent to a printer Each print job is processed and waits its turn in line to be printed This line of pending print jobs is called a print queue Each printer has its own queue you can hold jobs in the queue move jobs up in a queue or transfer jobs to another queue Overview of Print Request Processing As the following figure illustrates each print request is sent to a spooling daemon background program that keeps track of all the jobs This information is archived in the request log The daemon is created when you start the print service The spooling daemon is also responsible for keeping track of the status of the printers and slow filters when a printer finishes printing a job the daemon initiates printing
219. e Table To a File Error Processing Not Shown main int fildes int num_commands sizeof cmdnames 2 fildes open usr lib lpd pio trans2 XYZ2 999 O CREAT O WRONLY N 0664 write fildes PIOSTAGE2XLATE00 16 write fildes amp num_commands sizeof num commands write fildes cmdnames sizeof cmdnames write fildes table sizeof table return 0 The 63 at code point 252 means that code point 252 should be translated to code point 63 before being sent to the printer The CP at code point 253 means that code point 253 should be sent to the printer with no translation The 94 1 at code point 254 means that code point 254 should be translated to code point 94 before it is sent to the printer The 1 in 94 1 indicates that the printer command string whose 2 character attribute name is Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 35 at index 1 in the Command Names array should be sent to the printer before sending the code point The sc at code point 255 indicates that the character at code point 255 in the intermediate code page cannot be printed by the printer code page described by this stage 2 translation table Printer Code Page Translation for Multibyte Code Sets Multibyte code set MBCS translation from the print file to the code set differs from translation for single byte code set SBCS code points Translation from print file to code set in multibyte environment
220. e device driver interface program The device driver interface program is the last process in the input data stream processing pipeline and in the case of local spooler queues with piobe as the backend is usually pioout It is named the device driver interface program because as the last process in the pipeline it generally opens the device driver for writing and then writes the processed input data stream to the device driver See Datastream Flow for Common Print Jobs on page 3 8 for additional information The design of the base operating system spooler allows the root user to replace pieces of the input data stream processing pipeline with user written code In this article an example of redefining the mo attribute whose default value is the full path of pioout to the full path of a user written delivery program will be discussed See Overview of Backend Processing on page 3 7 for more information Handling Unsupported IP Addressable Terminal Servers Suppose that you have an IP addressable terminal server attached to your Ethernet network The terminal server has some number of asynchronous ports to which you can attach ASCII terminals modems printers or other asynchronous devices Further suppose that the terminal server vendor supplied you with a program named ts print that has the following properties e t will read from standard input e It accepts a A flag to specify an IP address e t accepts a P flag to specify a port
221. e devices For a remote printer some of the field values in the device stanza differ from those for a local printer The following table lists the fields which have particular significance for remote printers The table also shows sample values or default values for these fields Name of the remote host print server where jobs will be printed rq q2 Name of the remote queue on which jobs will be printed s statfilter usr Ipd aixshort Filter used to translate remote queue status information into a short form for queue status requests such as qchk This is the default value when the remote print server is another base operating system Printers Print Jobs and Queues for Systems Administrators 2 31 usr Ipd bsdshort Filter used to translate BSD Ipq command output short form when the remote print server is a BSD system usr Ipd attshort Filter used to translate ATT Ipstat command output short form when the remote print server is an ATT system statfilter usr Ipd aixlong Filter used to translate remote queue status information into a long form for queue status requests such as qchk This is the default value when the remote print server is another base operating system usr Ipd bsdlong Filter used to translate BSD Ipq command output long form when the remote print server is a BSD system usr Ipd attlong Filter used to translate ATT Ipstat command output long form when the remote print server
222. e flags that Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 7 address the spooling subsystem not the backend Thus listing one of these flags as a prohibited flag has no effect on the backend the flag is not prohibited _ PFL FLAGS PROHIBITED FOR INPUT DATA STREAMS 2 char l1st I 2nd data str name Is Command Line Flags Prohibited For Input Data Stream Ignored cmnrBDMPRT The colon file stores the attributes in the preceding example as follows 059 PFs s20013 rIsi Filter Flag Attributes 4 8 Attributes grouped under the FIL group header attribute store command strings for text filter flags The first character of the attribute name is always f and the second character denotes the type of filter Filter flags such as p and n specify to the backend program the type of filter used to format the print job Filter attribute designations are fp pr filter fn Formats files containing ditroff device independent troff data fl Prints control characters and suppresses page breaks ft Formats files containing data produced with troff commands fd DVI filter formats files created with tex fg Formats standard plot data files files created with plot fv Formats raster image files fc Formats files containing data produced with cifplot ff Interprets the first character of each line as a FORTRAN carriage control character fb Determines the locale support for Arabic and Hebrew Must be usr bin bprt The
223. e formatting First character is c Command aggregate First character is a ASCII control code First character is e Printer escape sequence Guide to Printers and Printing First character is t and second character is 0 9 Full path names of zero or more Stage 2 translation tables used by formatter Multiple values must be separated by commas Attribute Values The following conventions have been established for attribute values Limits Field Printer names are of the form 4201 3 reflecting the printer name 4201 and model number 3 File names in the Predefined Database are of the form PrinterType DataStreamType for instance 4216 31 asc indicates a 4216 Model 31 printer and an ASCII data stream File names in the Customized Database are of the form QueueName QueueDeviceName such as proq mypro Attribute values can contain a backslash followed by one to three octal digits to represent non ASCII values A backslash that does not begin an octal sequence should be represented by either NN or 134 Characters can be represented by hexadecimal notation of the form Nxxx where xx represents a hexadecimal value Boolean values can be represented by a plus sign for true and an exclamation point for false Because attribute values reside in colon files a colon character must not appear in the attribute value Instead a colon should be represented by 072 An attribute value that references an intege
224. e in case a previously printed file has left it in an unusual state setting the character pitch line pitch page size and character set requested by the user The standard interface script uses the Ip set command to initialize the printer e Print banner page or pages if required e Print the requested files The standard interface script calls the Ip cat command to print the files e Report any errors to the print service The standard interface script uses the Ip tell command to send descriptions of printer faults to the print service The print service forwards that information as an alert to the print administrator The print service opens the printer port The print service gives the printer port connection to the interface script as standard output and sets the printer to be the controlling terminal for the interface script If the port experiences a hangup a SIGHUP signal is sent to the interface script Many of the interface scripts provide special options that the user can specify by using the o option with the Ip command The print service runs the interface script to send the print job to the printer as shown in the following example etc lp interfaces printer id user title copies options filel file2 Arguments to the interface script are System V Printer Configuration 6 9 printer The name of the interface script the same as the printer name id Request ID returned by the Ip command user Login
225. e larger the number the greater the priority the printer has over the terminal 128 Port Controller The 128 port controller also provides hardware support for terminal attached printers The 128 port controller has the following virtual printer attributes y1 Sets the maximum characters per second CPS rate at which characters are sent to the print device The rate should be just below the average print speed for your printer Consult your printer s documentation for print speed y2 Sets the maximum number of print characters the device driver places in the output queue Reducing this number increases system overhead Increasing this number delays operator keystroke echo times when the terminal attached printer is in use y3 Sets the device driver estimate of the size of the terminal attached printer s input buffer After a period of inactivity the driver bursts the designated number of characters to the printer Consult your printer s documentation for input buff er size Printer Backend Commands The piobe command is the normal backend program run by the print spooling subsystem when printing to a locally attached printer device The piobe comm and is started via the qdaemon process It determines the data stream it is going to create by reading a flag or querying the virtual printer database The piobe process then passes the print file through a pipeline of appropriate filters so that it generates the correct data stream At the e
226. e of the remote queue on your host You can also send a remote print request with the smit qprt fast path 2 32 Guide to Printers and Printing Queue status commands such as qchk or Ipstat display information for both local and remote print queues The smit qchk command displays a menu that allows you to choose the type of queue status information you want from both local and remote queues To cancel a print job in a remote queue use Web based System Manager type wsm then select Printers the qcan command or the Iprm command You can also use the smit qcan fast path Using Remote Host Access for Printing Prerequisites e Your system must be configured to communicate as a remote print server e The ipd daemon must be installed on your system e To add a remote host you must understand naming conventions for TCP IP Listing All Remote Hosts 1 At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers 2 In the Printer Queues window select a computer object 3 From the Selected menu select Properties to view a list of remote print server hosts For detailed information or assistance see the online help You can also perform this task with the following command ruser sP OR you can use the following SMIT fast path smit lshostslpd Adding a Remote Host 1 At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers 2 In the Web based System Manager Printer Queues window select New queue and printer from the Printers menu 3 T
227. e pipeline set up and controlled by piobe is responsible for the physical delivery of the byte stream generated earlier in the pipeline In the context of a local queue this program opens a device driver which will deliver the byte stream to a locally attached printer attached serial or parallel or to a network attached printer Spooler Overview 3 5 Figure 1 Printing with the Base Operating System device Redirection En i Local LAM Attach interface Eau from clie Remote rembak is a common backend when the remote printer queue simply points to a queue on another host better known as a print server While piobe can perform extensive manipulation of a print job rembak just transfers jobs across TCP IP networks to print servers As the Printing with the Base Operating System figure depicts if the print server is another base operating system based machine rembak transfers the job across the network to the Ipd process which in turn invokes enq which creates a JDF and so on as described above Spooler Data Flow enq Command 3 6 The commands Ip Ipr qprt and eng can be used to submit a job to the spooler for processing The enq command is the true entry point to the spooler Ip Ipr and qprt all parse their own arguments and compose a call to enq This can be demonstrated by executing the following steps as the root user at a shell prompt 1 Type mount bin echo bin enq and press Enter 2 Type qprt P
228. e print job These files are printed in the order specified on the command line The format of the basic qprt command is qprt PQueueName FileNam Some useful qprt command flags are 1 4 Guide to Printers and Printing b Number B Value e Option E Option f FilterType i Number K Option Number Specifies the bottom margin The bottom margin is the number of blank lines to be left at the bottom of each page Specifies whether burst pages continuous form pages separated at perforations should be printed The Value variable consists of a two character string The first character applies to header pages The second character applies to trailer pages Each of the two characters can be one of the following a Always prints the header or trailer page for each file in each print job n Never prints the header or trailer page Prints the header or trailer page once for each print job group of files For example the B ga flag specifies that a header page be printed at the beginning of each print job and that a trailer page be printed after each file in each print job Note In a remote print environment the default is determined by the remote queue on the server Specifies whether emphasized print is wanted Indicates emphasized print is wanted Indicates emphasized print is not wanted Specifies whether double high print is wanted T Indicates double high print is wanted
229. e qdaemon Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 31 Terminating on Receipt of SIGTERM When a user cancels a running job with qcan the command passes the request to the qdaemon The backend must stop the print soon after receiving the signal There are two ways to accomplish this First the backend cannot do anything special about SIGTERM in which case the signal stops the backend process immediately This option is the simplest but it does not allow the backend to do any cleanup reset line speeds put paper at top of form hang up the phone before it terminates Second the backend can catch SIGTERM carry out whatever cleanup tasks are required and exit EXITSIGNAL include lt IN standard h gt The special exit code tells the qdaemon that the job was canceled Backends that decide to catch SIGTERM should exit very soon after receipt of the signal Understanding Backend Routines in libqb This article defines the set of library routines that the backend should use to communicate with the qdaemon process These routines are in the usr lib libqb a library they were designed to make the task of writing a backend as easy as possible These backend routines are available using the Id or cc command line option Iqb For information on using these routines with the backend see Understanding the Interaction between qdaemon and the Backend on page 4 27 get align Returns TRUE or FALSE telling whether an alignm
230. e qprt command flags O and Q The O flag controls paper versus envelope A O value of 3 indicates a paper size and 4 an envelope size The values 1 and 2 were skipped for backward compatibility The first five paper sizes are also numbered for backward compatibility Whenever an invalid value for the input source is selected it will be ignored Note Envelopes available from Manual and Tray 1 The default for O is 3 or paper The default for Q is 1 or Letter for paper sizes and Monarch for envelope sizes Paper Sizes 0 3 Envelope Sizes 0 4 Q 1 Letter 7 3 4 Monarch Q 2 Legal 9 Com 9 Q3 B5 10 Com 10 Q 4 A4 DL Q 5 A5 C5 Q 6 Executive B5 Envelope Q7 A3 Other Envelope Q 8 11 X 17 Q 9 Universal Note The printer file lexOptraC45 pcl for PCL 5 defaults the paper size to letter To change the default size change the values for the s0 s3 attributes in the file respectively for the u paper source attributes For example to make legal the default size for tray 2 change the s2 attribute value to 2 Note For PCL queues if the selected size is not in the selected input source a search sequence will be used to find the size requested If the size is found that source will be used For PostScript queues if the selected size is not in the selected input source the printer will prompt the user to load the source with the appropriate size This may result in an unexpected pap
231. e the standard qprt command settings Web based System Manager type wsm then select Printers allows you to change or show the print queue characteristics of a printer You can also use SMIT or the Isvirprt command Note You must have root authority or be a member of the printq group For example to change the standard pitch to 12 characters per inch run Web based System Manager type wsm then select Devices the chvirprt command or SMIT Select the printer from the list displayed and enter the attribute name and value separated by the equal sign The attribute names for the qprt command flags are the flag letters You can change the standard pitch to 12 by specifying p 12 2 2 Guide to Printers and Printing Print Spooler Real and The spooler is not specifically a print job spooler but a generic spooling function that can be used for queuing various types of jobs including print jobs queued to a printer The spooler does not know what type of job it is queuing When the system administrator defines a spooler queue the purpose of the queue is defined by the spooler backend program For example if the spooler backend program is the piobe command the printer I O backend the queue is a print queue Likewise if the spooler backend program is a compiler the queue is for compiler jobs When the spooler s qdaemon command selects a job from a spooler queue it runs the job by invoking the backend program When networks
232. ed generally a printer In the typical local print queue environment it is pioout that has its stdout opened onto the character special file in the dev directory as specified by the file parameter in etc qconfig This is the character special file in the dev directory that provides access to the device driver for the printer hardware Virtual Printers and Formatter Filters When the spooler queue backend is piobe the formatter filter is normally the next to last process in the pipeline of filters processing the print job The formatter filter is composed of two pieces of code A formatter filter provides the capability of either formatting the input print file or passing it through unmodified based on an input parameter Even if the formatter passes the input file unmodified it still sends printer commands to initialize the printer before the input file is printed and restores the printer after printing is complete As shown in the following figure the formatter filter is made up of the following components e Adgevice independent formatter driver e A device dependent formatter The first is the device independent formatter driver pioformat The second is a device dependent formatter of which there are fewer than 20 Code is device independent when its execution is in no way dependent upon specific hardware such as a certain physical printer Similarly code is device dependent when its execution is dependent upon specific ha
233. ed to allow the larger number of lines to fiton a page For example if the lines spacing is 6 lines per inch entering the command qprt 1 66 FileName causes the file FileName to print at 66 lines per page instead of the default 60 lines per page The HP LaserJet III ISi and 4 support the following fonts and pitches courier 10 12 or 17 pitch courier bold 10 or 12 pitch courier italic 10 or 12 pitch lineprinter 17 pitch For example entering the command qprt s Lineprinter p 17 FileName causes the file FileName to be printed in lineprinter font at 17 pitch 17 characters per inch Attaching a Hewlett Packard LaserJet printer to an RS 422A serial port requires a special cable You can construct the cable using the following pin out information Socket Connector System Pin Connector Device End End RxB Signal Ground Hewlett Packard LaserJet 5Si and 5Si Mopier Printers Output Bins The base LaserJet 5Si and 5Si Mopier printers have two possible destinations Top output bin that prints face down e Left side output bin that prints face up in reverse order Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 65 If an optional High Capacity Output HCO device is installed the additional trays are available as well The base operating system supports up to eight of the HCO output bins for the HP 5Si printer and up to 5 for the HCO output bins and a stapler bin for the 5Si Mopier The output bins ca
234. eeeeeeeee nnn nnn nnn nnn Why the Stack Language Describing Page Width Works Guide to Printers and Printing A 8 B 1 B 7 X 1 Chapter 1 Printers Print Jobs and Queues Overview for Users Depending on the printer you can control the appearance and characteristics of the final output The printers need not be located in the same area as the system unit and the system console A printer can be attached directly to a local system or a print job can be sent over a network to a remote system To handle print jobs with maximum efficiency the system places each job into a queue to await printer availability The system can save output from one or more files in the queue As the printer produces the output from one file the system processes the next job in the queue This process continues until each job in the queue has been printed This chapter discusses the following topics e Printer Terminology on page 1 1 e Starting a Print Job qprt Command on page 1 4 e Canceling a Print Job qcan Command on page 1 8 e Prioritizing a Print Job qpri Command on page 1 9 e Moving a Print Job to Another Print Queue qmov Command on page 1 10 e Holding and Releasing a Print Job qhld Command on page 1 11 e Checking Print Job Status qchk Command on page 1 12 e Formatting Files for Printing pr Command on page 1 14 e Printing ASCII Files on a PostScript Printer on page 1 16 e Command Summary for Printers Print Jobs and Queues o
235. efault as per the user s manual The input source number is the same for both PCL and PostScript ur anual feed utflay 1 ut a3y 2 ut amp y 3 utmay 4 By default the banner and trailer pages come from the top tray To change the default change the values for the uH and or uT attributes respectively in the colon file to the value for the desired paper source The valid values are the same as for the u flag Do this by editing the the virtual printer colon file by using the chvirprt command Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 107 Paper Size Paper size selection is supported by using the Q flag of the qprt command The first five paper sizes are also numbered for backward compatibility Whenever an invalid value for the input source is selected it will be ignored The default for O is 3 or paper The default for Q is 1 or Letter for paper sizes and Monarch for envelope sizes Paper Sizes Q 1 Letter Q2 Legal Q3 B5 Paper Q 4 A4 Q5 Executive Q6 A5 Q7 B4 Q8 A3 Q9 Ledger 11x17 Q 10 Universal 11 69x17 69 To change the defaults change the s0 s5 attributes respectively for each of the valid input valids The default paper size is the e se part 9661 Notes 1 Manual Feed and Tray 1 support sizes Q 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Letter Legal B4 A4 Executive A5 B4 A3 11x17 Universal 2 Trays 2 3 and 4 support sizes Q 1 2 4 7 8 9
236. efinition and create a customized virtual printer definition for the specified queue and queue device The attribute values in the custom definition can be further changed with the chvirprt or smit Isvirprt commands You must create a virtual printer for each data stream type supported by a specific printer device The supported data stream types include Data Stream Type Code for Attribute Description Name Value Pass through sent to printer unmodified 855 la Texas Instruments 855 Z When you use the mkvirprt or smit virprt command to create a virtual printer the system prompts you to select the desired printer from a list of defined printers If you have just configured a printer port for a new printer select the new printer port When the virtual printer command is executed the system creates a print queue and copies the colon file for the selected printer in the predefined database directory usr lib Ipd pio predef to the customized database directory var spool Ipd pio custom Note If no flags are specified the mkvirprt command becomes interactive Use the chvirpt or smit Isvirprt command to change or further customize the attribute values stored in a virtual printer definition To change an attribute value with smit Isvirprt enter attribute name attribute value with no spaces on either side of the equal sign Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 3 Each attribute name in a virtual printer defi
237. elected by reading a file from the usr lib X11 nls directory Printer Code Page Translation Tables for Multibyte Code Sets 4 36 A translation table consists of maps between code points that are not shared by the two code sets A printer backend can communicate with other code sets even if the code set is not supported by the iconv subroutine by using a translation table provided in the lusr lib Ipd pio transJP directory When an input or an output code set is not supported by the iconv subroutine the unsupported code set translates one of the code sets that are supported or directly to a process code set using the translation tables found in the usr lib Ipd pio transJP directory Users with root authority can add new code sets for printers by creating translation tables The naming convention for new translation tables is FromCodeSetName _ ToCodeSetName All translation tables must be defined in the trans dir file The f cp from code point in a translation table must be sorted in alphabetical order in advance The trans dir and codeset alias files are in the usr lib Ipd pio transJP directory The trans dir file format is FromCodeSetName ToCodeSetName NameofTranslationFile Code set aliases are defined in the codeset alias file The codeset alias file format is CodeSetName AliasName For example to print an MBCS file that was written with a new code set on an IBM 943 printer use the following steps Guide to Printers and P
238. em looks for carrier detect CD to recognize the printer If the device is an LP device the queuing system uses CTS to detect the printer Following is a list of print queue status conditions DEV BUSY DEV WAIT 2 36 Guide to Printers and Printing Identifies that e More than one queue is defined to a printer device IpO and another queue is currently using the printer device e qdaemon attempted to use the printer port device IpO and another application is currently using that printer device Normal recovery To recover from a DEV BUSY wait until the queue or application has released the printer device or kill the job or process that is using the printer port Indicates that the queue is waiting for the printer because the printer is offline out of paper jammed or the cable is loose bad or wired incorrectly Normal Recovery To recover from a DEV WAIT you must correct the problem that caused it to wait Check to see if the printer is offline out of paper jammed or loosely cabled It may be easier for diagnostic testing to use the enq command to move all queued jobs from the DEV WAIT queue to another queue that is either printing or is DOWN After the problem is corrected you can move any unprinted jobs back to the original queue DEV WAIT can also be caused by improper flow control to the printer particularly when using XON XOFF software control Use SMIT to see if you are using the proper flow control XON
239. enq command enqueues a file to a shared resource typically a printer that is it puts files into a queue for a particular resource The q flag displays the status of the default queue 2 Use one of the following commands to remove the job from the print queue you must have root user authority to cancel jobs other than your own Use the following enq command enq x 21 In the following example the enq command uses the x flag to cancel job number 21 Use the following Iprm command lprm P lpO 42 In the following example the Iprm command removes job number 42 from the 1p0 printer queue named with the P flag You can also remove jobs for a specific user by naming the user on the command line Use the following qadm command qadm X 1p0 In the following example the qadm command uses the x flag to cancel all jobs on the 1pO0 printer Usethe following SMIT fast path for the qcan command smit qcan In the following example you can choose the By Print Queue option to cancel either all of a particular user s jobs or all jobs on a particular printer 3 Tell the sender of the print job to first divide it into smaller pieces by using the following split command and then send the file as a series of jobs split 50 bigfile The split command reads the specified file and writes it into segments to a set of output files In the previous example bigfile is split into 50 line segments named bigfileaa bigfileab
240. ent form feed is to be printed A form feed is printed only when the printer has been idle and is about to print a new job The form feed aligns the paper to top of form and is helpful if someone moved the paper while the printer was idle get cmd line Returns a pointer to an array of characters containing the enq command line as invoked by the user The string returned does not contain the name usr bin enq any of the file names specified or any options that were sent to the backend using the enq o option For example if the user enters the command line eng P1p0 Bgn o i15 filename the get cmd line function returns the string P1pO Bgn This function is useful when the backend needs to know the command line options a user provided when the job was submitted get copies Returns the number of copies to be printed Its return value is of type int get device name Returns a pointer to an array of characters containing the device name get feed Returns the number of feed pages to be printed Its return value is of type unsigned int Feed pages are blank pages printed only when the printer has become idle This makes it easier to tear off paper from the printer get from Returns an array of characters containing the name of the person who made the print request The return value is of type char get header Returns NEVER ALWAYS or GROUP include lt IN backend h gt Its return value is of type unsigned
241. envelopes to change the defaults edit SO s4 or s5 For these three the default for paper is the else part 9661 and the default for envelopes is the then part t3 Notes 1 Envelopes are only valid for manual feed envelope feeder or the multipurpose tray 2 Trays 1 2 and 3 support only paper sizes 3 The multipurpose tray MPT supports both paper and envelopes 4 Tray 1 supports sizes Q 1 2 4 and 7 Letter Legal A4 and B4 5 Trays 2 and 3 support sizes Q 1 2 4 7 8 9 Letter Legal A4 B4 A3 Ledger 6 The multipurpose tray supports all sizes of paper and envelopes 7 The other envelope size is supported only by the multipurpose tray 8 The printer and colon file defaults paper size to Letter for the US and A4 for Europe and envelope size to COM10 for the US and DL for Europe 9 Whenever an invalid value for the input source is selected an error will be reported 10 If the selected size is not in the input source selected wrong size or empty a search sequence is used to find the size Pitch Duplex Mode Collation and Number of Copies s Pitch selection is supported for the PCL 5 emulation by using the p flag for pitch and the s flag for font name with the qprt command Pitch values between 1 and 100 characters per inch cpi in whole integers are supported The condensed print flag K is not supported Font Name Pitch S courier p 1 to 100
242. eps to configure a virtual printer and print queue 2 Select the ascii attachment type manufacturer and printer model 2 18 Guide to Printers and Printing 3 Provide additional information as prompted You can also perform this procedure with the usr lib Ipd pio etc piomkpq command or with the SMIT fastpath smit mkpq Modem Connections Terminal attached printing can also be supported by establishing a queue for a modem line instead of creating the queue for a specific terminal Since the terminal type of a dial in terminal cannot be guaranteed set t he PIOTERM environment variable to the terminal type of the dial in terminal by entering the following command export PIOTERM Dialin Terminal Typ Commands and Control Sequences Terminfo Database The terminfo database contains the capabilities and special features of a terminal device Such as cursor positioning initialization sequences and key sequences that control specific terminal operations For supporte d terminals the control sequence values are predefined in the terminfo database The control sequences that allow access to the AUX port are mc5 Value Instructs the terminal to send all data to the AUX port Printer ON mc4 Value Restores output to the terminal Printer OFF The control sequence values are terminal specific For example the printer command sequences for a 3151 terminal are mc5 P R mc4 P T In this example P R refers to the CtrlI P
243. er Source SIwQ Selected By the O and u Flag Values Refer to the s0 sl s2 s3 and s4 attributes Default value IwQ _S High speed printing _U Unidirectional printing V Vertical printing W Double Wide Print no t yes X Code Page Name For Print Data Stream file with IBM 850 same name in dir d1 cX Duplex Output 0 Simplex 1 Duplex Long Edge 2 0 Duplex Short Edge cH Issue Form Feed Between Copies amp At Job End no yes The output is formatted by the pg command hence the full colon at the bottom of the display The output above is only the first full screen The rest is available through the normal pg subcommands but will not be displayed here for reasons of brevity This output is view only the attributes cannot be modified Entering the name of an attribute such as _w page width in columns and pressing Enter will result in something like the following being displayed Name Description Value ow Page Width characters Default Value IwX SIwX value based on paper size specified with s0 s5 attributes To LIST attributes enter AttributeNamel for all attributes To CHANGE an attribute value enter AttributeName NewValu o FORMAT and EDIT an attribute value enter AttributeName v o EDIT the attribute file enter v To terminate press Enter The name of the attribute is displayed along with its text description from the message catalog and
244. er character code points may be 8 bit values where each graphical character is represented by an 8 bit integer value causing the wrong character to be printed To avoid this problem all the characters in the print files should be in the portable ASCII character set e Printed graphic files are affected when a 7 bit interface is used because some of the data points are lost qdaemon Checklist Under normal circumstances the qdaemon command starts when the system starts runs until the system shuts down and requires no attention from you Sometimes however the qdaemon command may stop running or be unable to perform its function The following article explains what you need to do under these conditions Any of the following conditions indicates that the qdaemon command needs maintenance e The eng command requests return the following message cannot awaken qdaemon request accepted anyway e The qdaemon command detects serious inconsistencies within itself and displays an error message e The ps ef command the process status command that gives a full listing of all processes does not show a process named usr sbin qdaemon or qdaemon To start the qdaemon command issue the following command startsrc s qdaemon Generally only users with root privilege can use this command The new qdaemon command goes through an initialization process If the qdaemon command does not continue running make sure that both the qdaemon
245. er one or both of the qprt command flags O and Q The O flag controls paper versus envelopes A value of 3 indicates a paper size and 4 an envelope size Envelopes are only valid for manual feed feeder or feeder 2 The default for O is 3 or paper The default for Q is 1 or Letter for paper sizes and Com 10 for envelope sizes Paper Sizes 0 3 Envelope Sizes 0 4 Q 1 Letter 7 3 4 Monarch Q 2 Legal 9 Com 9 Q 3 B5 paper 10 Com 10 Q 4 A4 DL Q 5 Executive C5 Q 6 A5 B5 Envelope Q7 Other Envelope The Optra printer supports paper types rough normal default transparency labels and cardstock using the y parameter of the qprt command or the y attribute in the colon file y Rough ylZormal default y lransparency y labels y Gardstock Print Resolution Pitch Duplex Mode The Optra plus printer supports print resolution of 300 600 and 1200 dpi using the q flag of the qprt command The default is 600 dpi q300 q600 q1200 Pitch selection is supported for the PCL 5 emulation by using the p flag for pitch and the s flag for font name with the qprt command Pitch values between 1 and 100 characters per inch cpi in whole integers are supported The condensed print flag K is not supported Font Name Pitch S courier p 1 to 100 S courier bold p 1 to 100 S courier italic p 1 to 100 s courier bold ita
246. er source being used or an operator panel message that may not make sense at first Refer to the manual to determine appropriate responses Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 81 4 82 Pitch Guide to Printers and Printing Pitch selection is supported for the PCL emulation by using the p flag for pitch and the s flag for font name or type face Pitch values between 1 and 100 characters per inch cpi in whole integers are supported The condensed print flag K is not supported Font Name Pitch S courier p 1 to 100 s courier bold p 1 to 100 S courier italic p 1 to 100 s courier bold italic p 1 to 100 S gothic p 1 to 100 s gothic bold p 1 to 100 S gothic italic p 1 to 100 s lineprinter p 17 Note To format ASCII files for other font styles use the base operating system enscript utility or the qprt command with the da s and p flags to a Postscript queue For Postscript queues p stands for point size and the valid list of fonts can be found in usr lib ps fontmap Valid point sizes are any integer from 1 to 1008 Only a pitch of 17 is supported for the lineprinter font style Collation Separator Pages Normally the N command line option is used to specify the number of copies desired This method will cause that many copies of the entire print job to be submitted or queued to the print system Since th
247. ered a printer fault in printing the job This problem affects future print jobs If the fault recovery for the printer directs the print service to wait for the administrator to fix the problem the print service should disable the printer If the fault recovery is to continue printing the print service should not disable the printer but try printing again in a few minutes Reserved for internal use by the print service Interface scripts must not exit with codes in this range Setting up Printer Interface Scripts By default the print service uses the standard interface script etc Ip model standard Use this interface script to handle most of your printing needs To change the interface script after you add the printer you can specify an interface program using the i option with the Ipadmin command The following example adds a new printer called laser on printer port dev tty01 It uses a customized interface program located in the directory usr doceng laser intface It can handle three file types i10 i300 and impress and it can be used only by the users doceng and docpub The following command example is split into multiple lines for readability lpadmin p laser v dev tty01 i usr doceng laser intface I i10 i300 impress u allow doceng docpub 6 12 Guide to Printers and Printing Using the terminfo Database The print service relies on the standard interface script and the terminfo database to
248. ersonal Printer II ibm2380 rs232 IBM 2380 Personal Printer II ibm2380 rs422 IBM 2380 Personal Printer II opp parallel Other parallel printer osp rs232 Other serial printer osp rs422 Other serial printer List All Defined Printers At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers You can also use the smit lsdprt fast path command Output similar to the following is displayed lp0 Available 00 04 01 06 Other serial printer lpl Available 00 04 01 07 Other serial printer lp2 Available 00 00 0P 00 Other parallel printer Printers Print Jobs and Queues for Systems Administrators 2 27 Moving a Printer to Another Port Prerequisites e The printer must be physically attached to your system e You must have root authority e You must have previously defined and configured a printer port See Configuring a Printer without Adding a Queue on page 2 9 Procedure 1 At the system prompt type wsm then select Devices 2 In the Web based System Manager Devices window select the printer object you want to move 3 Select Move To from the Selected menu Changing or Showing Printer Characteristics Prerequisite A printer must have been added Web based System Manager 1 At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers 2 In the Web based System Manager Devices window double click on the printer object Note If the printer has a print queue you can change the printer connection characteristics through the Devices w
249. es a paper size and 4 an envelope size The values 1 and 2 were skipped for backward compatibility The first five paper sizes are also numbered for backward compatibility Whenever an invalid value for the input source is selected it will be ignored Note Envelopes available from Manual and Tray 1 The default for O is 3 or paper The default for Q is 1 or Letter for paper sizes and Monarch for envelope sizes Paper Sizes 0 3 Envelope Sizes 0 4 Q 1 Letter 7 3 4 Monarch Q 2 Legal 9 Com 9 Q3 B5 10 Com 10 Q 4 A4 DL Q 5 Executive C5 Q 6 A5 B5 Envelope Q 7 Universal Other Envelope Note The printer file lexOptraC40 pcl for PCL 5 defaults the paper size to letter To change the default size change the values for the s0 s3 attributes in the file respectively for the u paper source attributes For example to make legal the default size for tray 2 change the s2 attribute value to 2 Note For PCL queues if the selected size is not in the selected input source a search sequence will be used to find the size requested If the size is found that source will be used For PostScript queues if the selected size is not in the selected input source the printer will prompt the user to load the source with the appropriate size This may result in an unexpected paper source being used or an operator panel message that may not make sense at first Refer to the manual to determine appropriate respon
250. es attribute values when the colon file is complete and a print job is submitted Example of Print Formatter This example shows how print formatters can interact with the documented printer formatter subroutines The procedure for writing a print formatter involves four steps 1 Creating a print formatter source file as shown below Creating an imports file Creating an exports file PN Compiling and linking the print formatter Create the Print Formatter Source File 4 24 Use an ASCII editor to create a formatter source file named sample c The file should contain the following lines include lt stdio h gt include lt piostruct h gt STRING CONSTANTS Initialize Printer Restore Printer Form Feed define INIT_CMD eects define REST_CMD feta define FF_CMD rat INTEGER and STRING VARIABLES page length page width top margin bottom margin define Pglen _Pglen piomode define Pgwidth _Pgwidth piomode define Tmarg Tmarg piomode define Bmarg _Bmarg piomode indentation begin page form feed pass through define Indent Indent piomode define Beginpg _Beginpg piomode define Do_formfeed _Do_formfeed piomode define Passthru Passthru piomode initialize printer restore printer define Init_printer Init printer piomode define Restoreprinter Restoreprinter
251. es the printer before printing a file e Provides filters for simple formatting of ASCII documents e Uses filters to convert the print data stream to a format supported by the printer e Provides support for printing national language characters e Passes the filtered print data stream to the printer device driver e Generates header and trailer pages e Generates multiple copies e Reports paper out intervention required and printer error conditions e Reports problems detected by the filters e Cleans up after a print job is canceled e Provides a print environment that you can customize to address specific printing needs The mkvirprt command defines a virtual printer to the printer backend The set of predefined attributes for the particular type of printer is copied to create a customized set of attributes The customized attributes can be listed with the Isvirprt command and changed with the chvirprt command or by using the Web based System Manager type wsm then select Devices or SMIT Change Show Print Queue Characteristics option Each time the mkvirprt or chvirprt command is used a digest utility piodigest command is automatically run to construct a memory image of the attribute values and lookup tables to be read in and used during the printing process The qdaemon command calls the piobe command the Print Job Manager and passes the flag options and the names of one or more files to be printed The only flag options
252. essed has arrived Spooler Queues Virtual Printers and Physical Printers The Four Queues Four Virtual Printers One Physical Printer example depicts an instance of etc qconfig that defines four queues on a single physical printer in this case dev lp1 Notice that all four pairs of stanzas use the string 1p1 to connect a queue stanza to a device stanza It is the file parameter in each device stanza that specifies that the printer known to the base operating system as Ip1 and whose device driver entry point is dev lp1 is the actual physical destination of any jobs submitted to any of these queues When these queues were defined via smit the command that actually creates the queue definition needed a string to connect the two halves of each stanza pair Since the physical printer at hand was 1p1 the string 1p1 was used as the both the value of the device parameter in each queue stanza and as the name of each device stanza This format is detailed in the etc qconfig File Structure examples below asc device lpl ipl file dev lpl header never trailer never access both backend usr lib lpd piobe gl device lpl lpl file dev lpl header never trailer never access both backend usr lib lpd piobe pcl device lpl lpl file dev lpl header never trailer never access both backend usr lib lpd piobe Spooler Overview 3 13 device lpl lpl file dev lpl header never trailer
253. et Simplex Duplex and 7 7 G Y Sttrue Tumble Mode duplex G Y 1 Stfalse t umble etrue tu mble Z Sefalse duplex af ASCII Control Code to Advance the Paper to showpage Top of Next Page FF ar Cannot access message catalog pioattrl cat G 6 d setreso lution at Cannot access message catalog pioattrl cat G u d setpape rtray The colon file stores these attributes as follows 0923 S DTE 512 aF G YS ttrue duplex G_Y 1 stfalse tumble etrue tumbl Sefalse duplex 113 af showpage 119 ar G 6 d setresolution 115 at G u d setpapertray Escape Sequences Attributes 4 12 Escape sequence attributes begin with the letter e and are grouped under the __ ESC group header attribute Typical PostScript printer values are ESC ESCAPE SEQUENCES ex Command to Restore Printer Datastream Mode 33 K 3 0 4 61 used only on restore GmY 2 5 t S 8 ScsesGmy Ss 1 4 c ez used only on init restore Set initial 33 K 5 0 4 61 conditions N10N0NO These same values are stored in the colon file as 054s ESCi 514 ex N33 KN3NONAN612 GmY 2 2 t 8 c e GmYS 1 4 c 263 ez N33 KN5NON4N61N10N0ONO Guide to Printers and Printing Printer Colon File Escape Sequences Embedded references and logic for attribute values in the printer backend s database colon files are defined with escape sequences placed at appropriate locations in the attribute string These e
254. et only to terminate an active alert do not specify quiet as the alert type for a new printer If the printer name is all in any of the commands discussed the alerting condition will apply to all printers If you do not define an alert method you will receive mail once for each printer fault If you define a method without the W option you will be alerted once for each fault Specifying a Printer Fault Recovery Mechanism Note This information does not apply if you are making a remote printer accessible to users on your system When a printer fault has been fixed and the printer is ready for printing again the print service will recover in the following ways e t will continue printing at the top of the page where printing stopped e It will restart printing at the beginning of the print request that was active when the fault occurred e It will wait for you to tell the print service to re enable the printer Note The ability to continue printing at the top of the page where printing stopped requires the use of a filter that can wait for a printer fault to be cleared before resuming properly Such a filter must have detailed knowledge of the control sequences used by the printer so it can keep track of page boundaries and know where in a file printing stopped None of the filters supplied with the print service can do this If an appropriate filter is not being used you will be notified in an alert if recovery cannot proceed as you
255. etc motd Guide to Printers and Printing A job submission command must end with the name of one or more real files that exist in a file system accessible by the base operating system This is true even when the queue is set up to handle jobs other than print jobs Note Make sure that you execute step 3 Otherwise the spooler will be disabled When the enq command is executed either directly or by Ip Ipr or qprt it assigns a job number to the job By default Ip will return the job number Ipr and qprt will not return the job number unless you specifically request it with a flag enq creates a JDF and places it in var spool Ipd qdir then writes the name of the JDF to a message queue and signals the qdaemon by sending it a SIGUSR2 that a new JDF exists The qdaemon then reads the name of the JDF from the message queue accesses the JDF directly and reads the data contained in the JDF into an internal data structure it maintains to track all the jobs currently in the spooler At this point in time the job has been accepted by the spooler A JDF is created for all spooling system operations other than a queue status query the structure of a JDF differs between print requests versus job cancellation requests versus queue control requests and so on but a JDF is created nevertheless Commands with the same function as Ipstat still call enq to do their work but neither is a JDF created nor is the qdaemon involved When the qdaemon dete
256. eue status query In spooler queue status queries remote spooler queues will be indicated twice once for the local queue and once for the remote queue on the print server For instance if etc qconfig contains this entry myps device kricket up TRUE host kricket s_statfilter usr lib lpd aixshort l statfilter usr lib lpd aixlong rq myps kricket backend usr lib lpd rembak the command Ipstat pmyps would return the following Queue Dev Status Job Files User PP Blks Cp Rnk myps krik READY myps myps READY The first line of the output indicates that the local spooler queue named myps with a device stanza whose name is listed as krik has a status of READY The second line indicates that the target remote spooler queue also named myps whose device stanza is listed as myps also has a status of READY It is the author s habit to make a local spooler queue name the same as the print server spooler queue name It s then easy to visually group the two lines in the output of a spooler queue status query 3 14 Guide to Printers and Printing Chapter 4 Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming This chapter discusses the following topics Printer Backend Overview for Programming on page 4 2 Virtual Printer Definitions and Attributes on page 4 3 Printer Colon File Escape Sequences on page 4 13 Printer Colon File Conventions on page 4 20 Example of Print Formatter on page 4 24 Under
257. evice dependent formatter and are supplied to pioformat at runtime when the loading and linking of the device dependent formatter by pioformat occurs The formatter driver is invoked by a pipeline and is passed the name of a formatter to be driven The formatter driver dynamically loads and links the formatter and calls the formatter s setup function which indicates whether data formatting or data pass through is requested After the formatter s setup function performs the necessary functions it returns to the formatter driver The formatter driver calls the initialize function The initialize function outputs a string of printer commands to initialize the printer and returns to the formatter driver The formatter driver either calls the passthru function once or calls the lineout function for each line in the print file based on the return code from the setup function If the lineout function is called the formatter driver performs all vertical spacing including line spacing vertical tabs form feeds and top and bottom margins Line spacing and vertical tabs are performed by the lineout function Other vertical spacing functions are performed automatically When processing is complete the formatter driver calls the restore function The restore function outputs a string of printer commands to restore the printer to its default state defined by the database attribute values For more information about how the print formatter interacts with
258. ewlett Packard LaserJet use the following procedure 1 Set up the real printer Specify the Name as real and set the Model to HPLaserJet 2 Set up the port and land virtual printers Set the Model to network Specify the same Device to which real is connected 3 Create the file usr spool Ip remote and add the following lines port lp dreal oportrait land lp dreal olandscape This specifies that when printing to printer and the print system sends the print job to printer real using the olandscape option to print in landscape mode and when printing to printer port the print system sends the print job to printer rea using the oportrait option to print in portrait mode Note The options listed after dreal depend on the printer model Check the interface script in usr spool Ip admins Ip interface for your printer to determine the printer or class dependent o options To print a file in landscape mode type lp dland filename This procedure translates the dland option to Ip to the necessary options for the printer in this example dreal ol Another way to accomplish this is to create a simple shell script to perform the type of printing For example Land shell script to print in landscape mode syntax land file file lp dreal ol Q Guide to Printers and Printing The reasons for choosing one method over the other depend on how your applications access the prin
259. execute complicated tasks and to effective problem determination and resolution The following sections describe this job flow in greater detail making special note when the queue is a print queue Spooler Parts 3 4 The base operating system spooler can be viewed as a process or a subsystem with a beginning points in between and an ending To accomplish its tasks the base operating System spooler has four basic parts 1 The enq command is the true entry point to the spooler and as such is the beginning of any spooler activity This command accepts requests for job processing 2 The qdaemon is responsible for accepting and tracking all jobs submitted to the spooler by the enq command It is also responsible once all the necessary resources are available for allowing a queue backend to process a job The qdaemon is one of the points in between in the spooler process Guide to Printers and Printing 3 The spooler backend is a collection of programs invoked by the spooler s qdaemon command to process a job in some queue The backend sends output to a specific device such as a printer When the backend is piobe it involves a formatter filter which in turn involves a printer colon file The backend is one of the points in between as well as the ending since the backend contains the specific process that will deliver the processed job to its final destination 4 The configuration file etc qconfig describes the configurati
260. fault Q 29al QED QM To change the default size change the values for the s1 s3 attributes in the file For example to make A4 the default size for all paper sources change s1 s2 and s3 to 4 This changes the top tray bottom tray and feeder tray sizes respectively Pitch Pitch selection is supported for the PCL 5 emulation by using the p flag for pitch and the s flag for font name with the qprt command Pitch values between 1 and 100 characters per inch cpi in whole integers are supported The condensed print flag K is not supported Font Name Pitch S courier p 1 to 100 s courier bold p 1 to 100 S courier italic p 1 to 100 s courier bold italic p 1 to 100 s gothic p 1 to 100 s gothic bold p 1 to 100 S gothic italic p 1 to 100 s lineprinter p 17 Note To format ASCII for other font styles use the base operating system enscript utility or the qprt command with the da s and p flags to a PostScript queue For PostScript queues p stands for point size and the valid list of fonts are located in usr lib ps fontmap Valid point sizes are any integer from 1 to 1008 Also only a pitch of 17 is supported for the lineprinter font style Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 87 4 88 Collation The Optra C printer supports collation of multiple copies of a print job internally This feature is controlle
261. fic business needs can become easier e You may see opportunities for spooler modification that you had not considered Spooler Concepts The following terms relate to the spooler overview Formatter Filters A formatter filter is part of the pipeline created and executed by the default backend for local printer queues piobe A formatter filter provides the capability of either formatting an input file or passing it through unmodified based on an input parameter Even if the formatter passes the input file unmodified it still sends printer commands to initialize the printer before the input file is printed and restores the printer to its original state after printing is complete It is the formatter filter that has the capability of using a virtual printer s colon file to perform extensive manipulation of a spooler print job Spooler Overview 3 1 Local and Remote Spooler Queues and Spooler Devices A queue is an ordered list of requests for a specific device A device is something that can handle requests one at a time such as a printer Each queue must be serviced by at least one device often it can be serviced by multiple devices Local and Remote Printers A local printer is a real printer attached to a local host for which there is a local queue All jobs submitted to this queue are processed and printed on the host on which the queue exists A remote printer is a real printer attached to a remote host The queue for a remote
262. foPrint 40 Printer IBM Network Color Printer IBM Network Printer 12 IBM Network Printer 17 IBM Network Printer 24 Hewlett Packard 2500C Color Printer Hewlett Packard LaserJet II Hewlett Packard LaserJet III Hewlett Packard LaserJet IIISi Hewlett Packard LaserJet 4 Hewlett Packard LaserJet 4Si Hewlett Packard LaserJet 4 Plus Hewlett Packard LaserJet 4V Hewlett Packard LaserJet 5000 D640 Printer Hewlett Packard LaserJet 5Si 5Si MX Hewlett Packard LaserJet 5Si Mopier Hewlett Packard LaserJet 8000 Printer Hewlett Packard LaserJet 8100 Printer Hewlett Packard LaserJet Color Hewlett Packard Color LaserJet 4500 Hewlett Packard Color LaserJet 8500 Lexmark Optra LaserPrinter Lexmark Optra E310 LaserPrinter Lexmark Optra M410 LaserPrinter Lexmark Optra Se LaserPrinter Lexmark Optra TLaserPrinter Family Lexmark Optra W810 LaserPrinter Lexmark Optra Plus LaserPrinter Lexmark Optra C Color LaserPrinter Lexmark Optra E LaserPrinter Lexmark Optra N LaserPrinter Lexmark ExecyJet llc Lexmark ValueWriter 600 Lexmark 2380 Plus Printer Model 3 2 16 Guide to Printers and Printing Lexmark 2381 Plus Printer Model 3 Lexmark 2390 Plus Printer Model 3 Lexmark 2391 Plus Printer Model 3 Lexmark 4039 Plus LaserPrinter Lexmark 4079 Color JetPrinter Plus Lexmark 4227 Forms P
263. font name with the qprt command Pitch values between 1 and 100 characters per inch cpi in whole integers are supported The condensed print flag K is not supported Font Name Pitch s courier p 1 to 100 s courier bold p 1 to 100 S courier italic p 1 to 100 s courier bold italic p 1 to 100 S gothic p 1 to 100 s gothic bold p 1 to 100 S gothic italic p 1 to 100 s lineprinter p 17 Note To format ASCII for other font styles use the base operating system enscript utility or the qprt command with the da s and p flags to a PostScript queue For postscript queues p stands for point size and the valid list of fonts are located in usr lib ps fontmap Valid point sizes are any integer from 1 to 1008 Also only a pitch of 17 is supported for the lineprinter font style The W flag allows the user to control how many copies of each page is produced by the printer itself For example if a three page job is submitted with the W flag of the qprt command then 2 copies of page one followed by 2 copies of page two followed by 2 copies of page three will be printed The default value is 1 and the maximum value is 999 Lexmark Optra N LaserPrinter Paper Source Paper source selection is supported for both the enhanced PCL R 5 emulation and the PostScript Level 2 emulation by using the u flag of the qprt command There are sever
264. g reason e The backend is spared the trouble of accessing the status file directly e The format of the status file can be changed without requiring backends to be rewritten Should the format of the status file change the backend only needs to be re linked To initialize certain data common to the library routines the backend must call the routine log init For more information see Understanding Backend Routines in libgb on page 4 32 The call is as follows log init This routine should be called to initialize the status file interface The log init routine like all log routines in the library returns a value of 1 if it fails Printing Extra Copies The enq N command prints extra copies of a file For example to print five copies of a file filename enter this command nq N5 filenam The enq command passes the information to the qdaemon process which puts it into the status file Backends should get the information by calling the get copies Understanding Backend Routines in libqb on page 4 32 routine which returns the total number of copies requested Updating Job Status Information The qchk command displays information about currently running jobs including the originator title number of pages to be printed and percentage completed All this information comes from the status file Most of the information is set up by the qdaemon when the backend is first invoked except the pages printed and percent done fiel
265. g values C D E F G H I L M Q R S T or V The second component is the data If the data is more than one character it should be enclosed in square brackets For example if the limits field contained Es the sm cmd opt object class entry type field equals the numeric value assigned to 4 The entry type field with a E4 value takes only numeric input In another example when the limits field contains none full emulator 0 1 2 then the sm cmd opt object class contains the following values Field Name Values disp values none full emulator aix values 0 1 2 The 1imits field operators provide the following types of control in SMIT e Attribute display e Characteristics of the field representing the attribute e Attribute validation and the type of auxiliary operations for example pop up menus or ring lists For example in the qprt and admvirprt SMIT dialogs the following rules apply e fDy the limits operator D with a value of y for yes is specified in a Limits field for an attribute then that attribute is always displayed e IfDn the limits operator D with a value of n for no is specified in a limits field for an attribute then that attribute is never displayed In qprt SMIT dialogs the following additional rules apply e All attributes defined in the printer colon file that begin with a _ underscore for example j and i that are referenced in the pipeline are displayed e Al
266. ge Printer on page 4 50 IBM Personal Printer Il Models 2380 2381 2390 2391 2380 2 2381 2 2390 2 2391 2 Printers purchased in Greece or Turkey have the Greek or Turkish code pages available with the printer To print Greek or Turkish characters you must notify the system that the code pages are available To do this 1 As the root user type smit chpq 2 Select the appropriate print queue and select Printer Setup on the Change Show Characteristics menu 3 Change COUNTRY to the appropriate country selection IBM 3812 Model 2 Page Printer The system assumes that a font diskette Feature 3155 is in the printer s diskette drive For the support of Greek or Turkish characters the system assumes that a Language Group 3 font diskette is in the drive Fonts are loaded into printer memory from a font diskette inside the printer The system maintains a record of which fonts have been loaded and whether the fonts in memory may have been corrupted by a print job and therefore need reloading from diskette If the printer is turned off and then turned back on run the splp command with the F flag and the device name This notifies the system that the fonts need to be loaded into the printer s memory The 3812 Model 2 Page Printer can print on paper other than the default 8 1 2 by 11 inch size You can change the paper size using SMIT This is described in Specifying Paper Size on page 2 25 To change paper size for a single print j
267. haracter sets are the output of the commands The name finnish is adequate for referring to character set 2 but better names are needed for the standard set set 0 and set 1 Type the following command to define synonyms usr sbin lpadmin p printer nam S csO0 american english british e The following three commands will then produce identical results The Ip command routes print jobs to the printer and in these examples routes the print job to any printer capable of handling the cs1 character set lp S csl d any lp S english d any lp S british d any If you do not list the character sets that can be used with a printer the service assumes a printer that has selectable character sets can take any cs N name or terminfo name known for the printer e To remove the character set mappings type usr sbin lpadmin p printer nam S non System V Printer Configuration 6 37 Specifying Font Cartridges to Use With a Printer Until you specify the font cartridges that can be used with a new printer the print service does not consider any font cartridges installable on that printer and rejects any print requests that require a font cartridge To specify a list of font cartridges to use with a printer ype usr sbin lpadmin p printer name S font_cartridge list font cartridge list is a list of font cartridge names separated by commas or spaces If you use spaces to separate the names enclose the entire list but
268. hat although they are of the correct type for a filter are in other ways not adequate for the output that the filter produces For instance you may want to dedicate one printer for fast turnaround Only files that the printer can handle without filtering will be sent to that printer Other printers of identical type you allow to be used for files that may need extensive filtering before they can be printed In this case label the filter as working with only the latter group of printers In most cases a filter works with all printers that accept its output so you can usually skip this part of the filter definition Filter type The print service recognizes fast filters and slow filters Fast filters are labeled fast because they incur little overhead in preparing a file for printing and because they must have access to the printer when they run A filter that is to detect printer faults must be a fast filter A filter that uses the PRINTER keyword as a filter option must be installed as a fast filter Slow filters are filters that incur a lot of overhead in preparing a file and do not require access to a printer The print service runs slow filters in the background without tying up a printer This allows files that do not need slow filtering to move ahead Printers will not be left idle while a slow filter works on a file if other files can be printed simultaneously Slow filters that are invoked by modes using the y option must be
269. hat specify the values of the following filter characteristics e Name of the filter that is a command name e Types of input it will accept e Types of output it will produce e Types of printers to which it will send jobs Guide to Printers and Printing e Names of specific printers to which it will send jobs e Type of the filter whether it is a fast filter or a slow filter e Options See Adding a Filter to the Print Service on page 6 26 for more information Filter definitions which can be stored in a file or entered directly on the command line have the following format Command command pathname options Input types input type list Output types output type list Printer types printer type list Printers printer list Filter type fast or slow Options template list The information can appear in any order Not all the information must be provided When you do not specify values for the items listed below default values are assigned Ipfilter Arguments Default Command no default Input types any Output types any Printer types any Printers any Filter type slow Options no default Default values define a flexible filter so at minimum you must supply the input and output type s When you enter a list you can separate the items in it with blanks or commas unless it is a template list Items in a template list must be separated by commas Each of these characteristics is described as follows e C
270. hat the ACL protects the print subtree The ACL bind password is specified during the configuration of System V print on the directory This configuration also sets the directory administrator s DN and password to cn root and root Running the command sets up a suffix and top level container object cn aixdata The print subtree ou print is created under this AIX information tree cn aixdata object 2 To configure System V print on a machine with a configured IBM Directory server the administrator DN and password are required For example if the existing administrator s DN and password are cn admin and passwd type mkprtldap s a cn admin p passwd w pass123wd 3 To configure System V print under a preexisting node on the IBM Directory server for example o ibm c us the mkprtldap command provided the d flag option This is an advanced option recommended only when it is necessary to store the print information under an existing node on the directory The recommended option is to store the print subtree in the default location on the directory by not specifying the d option The administrator DN and password are required to configure System V print on the directory Assume the existing administrator s DN and password are cn admin and passwd Type mkprtldap a cn admin p passwd w acll23passwd d o ibm c us Running the command creates an AIX information tree cn aixdata under the o ibm c us object The print subtree is cre
271. he A X 5L Version 5 2 Commands Reference for the complete syntax For example to hold job number 452 on whichever print queue the job is on type hld 452 T Q or example to hold all jobs queued on print queue hp2 type ld Php2 Q o 8 release job number 452 on whichever print queue the job is on type ld 452 r Q o 8 release all jobs queued on print queue hp2 type ghld Php2 r smit Command To hold or release a print job using SMIT type smit qhld Printers Print Jobs and Queues Overview for Users 1 11 Checking Print Job Status qchk Command This section discusses how you can display the current status information for specified job numbers queues printers or users Prerequisites e For local print jobs the printer must be physically attached to your system or in the case of a network printer attached and configured on the network e For remote print jobs your system must be configured to communicate with the remote print server Web based System Manager To check the status of a print job using Web based System Manager type wsm then select Printers In the Printer Queues window select the print job then use the menus to check its status qchk Command The qchk command displays the current status information regarding specified print jobs print queues or users The basic format of the qchk command is qchk P QueueNam 4 JobNumber u OwnerNam See the qchk co
272. he AUX port on the terminal is configured with the same settings as your printer To do this consult your terminal documentation for information about setting values for the AUX port Consult your printer documentation for information about configuring the printer s serial interface Relevant values include those for baud rate parity data bits stop bits and XON XOFF e f your terminal is emulating a terminal of a different type you may need to set the PIOTERM environment variable export PIOTERM TerminalTypeEmulated e Verify that you have the correct cable for the printer e Make sure the cable is securely plugged into the terminal s auxiliary port e Make sure the print queue is READY lpstat If the status for the terminal attached printer queue does not read READY enter the following commands to cancel all jobs on the queue and restart it qadm Xqname qadm Uqname where qname is the name of the terminal attached printer queue You must resubmit your print jobs e Verify that the pioout command has the correct permissions usr lib lpd pio etc pioout r sr xr x To reset permissions enter the following command chmod 4555 usr lib lpd pio etc pioout e Check Local Printer Checklist on page 5 2 e Sometimes printer control codes conflict with the terminal s control codes If the previous checklist items do not produce output reconfigure your virtual printer as an ASCII Printer See Configuring a Virtual Printer and Pr
273. he error message to the user DOWRITE writes the message to the user s terminal if the user is Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 29 logged on If the user is not logged on the message is mailed to the user The DOMAIL and DOWRITE constants are defined in the usr include IN backend h file Using a Pipe The backend can send messages to the user by sending the message to a print supervisor by way of a pipe This mechanism provides a one way communication path between the printer backend and the print supervisor The print supervisor must open an unnamed pipe and obtain two file descriptors one for read operations and one for write operations The print supervisor must export the write end in the PIO IPCWRITEFD environment variable before calling the printer backend with the fork and exec subroutines If the PIO IPCWRITEFD environment variable is set the printer backend writes any messages to the write end of the pipe The print supervisor typically calls the select subroutine to poll the read side of the pipe for incoming messages In addition to checking for exit status of the printer backend using the waitpid subroutine the print supervisor polls for I O on the pipe The print supervisor sets up a signal handler for the SIGCHLD signal and performs a block read on the pipe The signal handler examines the exit status of the printer backend and performs any action necessary When no unread messages remain on the pipe the p
274. he qdaemon and the backend communicate through a status file Understanding Backend Routines in libqb on page 4 32 explains the set of library routines that the backend should use to fulfill these communication requirements These routines are in the usr lib libqb a library Using the Status File When the qdaemon process invokes a backend it passes the following parameters in order 1 The parameters appearing in the etc qconfig file 2 The flags that the enq command did not recognize in the order they were given These flags will be preceded by the o option on the command line 3 The names of one or more files to be printed There is a status file for each device and its associated queue These files are found in the lvar spool Ipd stat directory The status file provides a means of communication for the qdaemon process and the backend The qdaemon passes information such as the date of the file whether to print burst pages and the number of copies to be printed The backend passes back the charge for the job it has just finished running In addition the backend periodically updates the number of pages it has printed and what percent of the job is finished This information is read by the qchk command Note Backends should never explicitly write into their status file They should call the libqb library routines to do this Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 27 The routines are called for the followin
275. he qdaemon invokes piobe and passes it arguments in the normal C programming language fashion using argc and argv For instance using the command in step 2 from Spooler Data Flow eng Command on page 3 6 qprt Pasc z1 fp p12 s courier C N3 etc motd piobe is passed the following arguments e argc 10 e argv 0 usr lib Ipd piobe e argv 1 f e argv 2 p e argv 3 z e argv 4 1 e argv 5 p e argv 6 12 e argv 7 s e argv 8 courier e argv 9 etc motd argv 0 is the name of the backend itself as usual Note that the Pasc which specifies the queue name was parsed out of the original argument vector as were the C and N3 flags and arguments piobe uses the argv values to construct a pipeline of filters that must be executed to process the job as requested After determining the structure of the pipeline piobe passes the structure to a shell for realization If the file parameter in the etc qconfig entry for this queue exists piobe will open the stdout of the last process in the pipeline onto the value specified by the file parameter The last process in the pipeline is not prevented from re opening stdout onto some other file or device Note the parent child relationship among these processes which is not apparent from the figure e qdaemon is the parent of piobe e piobe is the parent of the shell e The shell is the parent of pioout the last process in the pipeline
276. he qdaemon uses queue status information to keep track of the status of each queue and when circumstances are right will invoke the backend for the queue to process the job The backend for a queue determines precisely how a job placed on that queue will be processed The commands that allow users to submit jobs to the spooler can specify flags requesting certain treatment of the job the qdaemon can determine which job gets processed when shortest job next or first come first served but the backend is the process that actually does all the work as far as processing the job is concerned A systems administrator can read the stanzas in etc qconfig and quickly determine the function of a given queue simply by examining the backend In the following figure the two most common backends scenarios are shown a local printer queue and a remote printer queue The local queue uses piobe Printer Input Output BackEnd as a backend The remote printer queue uses rembak REMote BAcKend as a backend piobe like all backends is invoked by the qdaemon piobe sets up and controls a series of programs a pipeline that can not only perform extensive manipulation of a print job but can also send an extensive amount of control data to a printer for instance to initialize the printer to a specific mode before the processed job is delivered to the printer It is piobe that makes the initial use of the data stored in printer colon files The last program in th
277. he remote host Chapter 3 Spooler Overview The job of the spooler also called the queuing system is to manage printer use especially on systems that have more than one printer When you submit a print job to the spooler you can continue to use your workstation This chapter discusses the following topics e Spooler Concepts on page 3 1 e Generic Base Operating System Spooler on page 3 4 e Spooler Parts on page 3 4 e Spooler Data Flow Commands and Backend on page 3 5 e Spooler Data Flow eng Command on page 3 6 e Overview of Backend Processing on page 3 7 e Virtual Printers and Formatter Filters on page 3 10 e etc qconfig Spooler Configuration File on page 3 12 Spooler Introduction Because the backend piobe used to process print jobs on local queues is the most commonly used and possibly the most complex backend shipped with the base operating system it is used as the primary example in this section Using piobe in this fashion will allow a better development of the base operating system spooler concepts The purpose of this section is to demonstrate that the spooler is a real process with a beginning discrete points in between no black boxes and an end The spooler is a series of components whose interaction is completely dependent upon how a specific queue is configured Recognizing this can have the following results e Problem determination and resolution can become easier e Bending the spooler to your speci
278. he two values and pushes the resultant 1 onto the stack 6 9et Pops the 1 off the stack and since it is a TRUE non zero value calls for the evaluation of GwJ The stack labeled _ is now empty 7 96GwJ Calls for the evaluation of wJ 8 G_Q Calls for the evaluation of wQ 9 GwQ Calls for the evaluation of GWu 10 GWu Calls for the evaluation of Wu 11 96CO Pushes a 0 onto the stack since the O flag was not used on the command line 12 t Pops the 0 off the stack and since it is a FALSE zero value calls for the evaluation of G_u The stack labeled Wu is now empty 13 G_u Pushes a 1 onto the stack 14 d Pops the 1 off the stack and returns it in ASCII format to the in progress calculation of wQ 15 0 Pushes a 0 onto the stack 16 9ez Pops the 0 and 1 off the stack compares them for equality and pushes the resultant 0 onto the stack 17 t Pops the 0 off the stack and since it is a FALSE zero value calls for the evaluation of GwuU 18 96 GWu This value is already known so a 1 is pushed onto the stack 19 96 1 Pushes a 1 onto the stack 20 96z Pops the two 1 s off the stack compares them for equality and pushes the resultant 1 onto the stack 21 t Pops the 1 off the stack and since it is a TRUE non zero values calls for the evaluation of 96Gs1 22 96 Gs1 Pushes a 1 onto the stack 23 d Pops the 1 off the stack and return
279. he xx and yy values are flag attributes When a C attribute is defined the 1imits field must also contain an R ring operator to define the pop up list that is displayed to SMIT users The R operator also defines how the options on the list map to command line flags 111 Cs C s p R Courier 10 Prestige 12 2 s Courier p10 S Prestig pl2 s 1 s p I p 999 s Dn Courier 222 p Dn 10 In this example the C operator defines that the s and p flags are combination attributes The R ring defines that when the Courier 10 option is chosen from the pop up menu the flags on the command line are s Courier p10 The s 1 s p I p attribute value is resolved when the SMIT dialog is built and determines which item in the ring is displayed as the default Designates the display mode If the value is y an object is built in the sm cmd opt object class If the value is n no object is built The D operator allows programmers to suppress certain flags from being displayed in SMIT If this operator is not specified the object is built if the flag is referenced in the input pipeline Designates the sequence number in the id seq num field of the sm cmd opt object class The sequence number controls the position of the item in relation to other items in the dialog screen If no S operator is specified the dialog starts with the ID number 100 and items are numbered in the sequence they are found in the colon file The value for the S opera
280. his task with the following commands e To start the Ipd remote subsystem now startsrc s lpd To start the Ipd remote subsystem at the next system restart mkitab 1pd 2 once startsrc s lpd To start the Ipd remote subsystem both now and at the next system restart startsrc s lpd mkitab lpd 2 0nce startsrc s lpd OR you can use the following SMIT fast path smit mkitab lpd Stopping e Ipd Remote Subsystem At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers 2 In the Printer Queues window select a computer object 3 From the Selected menu select Properties 4 Select Stop Ipd daemon For detailed information or assistance see the online help You can also perform this task with the following commands e To stop the Ipd remote subsystem now stopsrc c s lpd e To stop the Ipd remote subsystem at the next system restart rmtab lpd 2 34 Guide to Printers and Printing e To stop the Ipd remote subsystem both now and at the next system restart stopsrc c s lpd rmtab lpd OR you can use the following SMIT fast path smit rmitab lpd Showing Status of Printer Server Subsystem Use the SMIT fast path to perform this task smit Command 1 At the system prompt type smit server 2 Select Show Status of the Print Server Subsystem Printers Print Jobs and Queues for Systems Administrators 2 35 Printer Queuing System Status Conditions If a printer device is added as a tty device the queuing syst
281. how the spooling system provides and controls serial access to a device If the file parameter is absent or set to a value of FALSE the qdaemon opens stdout of the backend onto dev null and executes the job immediately In this situation there is no clear file or device to which serial access should be provided so jobs will not stack up on the queue Jobs submitted to this queue will be processed just as fast as the qdaemon can set up the execution environment The absence of the file parameter effectively disables serial access to any local file or device A meaningful and common example of a queue lacking the file parameter is a remote printer queue In this situation the resource to which serial access should be provided actually exists on another host there is no reason for the local queue to attempt any type of control The backend for this type of queue by default the rembak program under the base operating system simply sends the job across the network to the remote queue and lets it handle the serial access control Spooler Overview 3 7 The default backend for a local print queue under the base operating system is piobe Multiple queues can all specify the same backend In this situation multiple simultaneous instances of piobe can exist each queue that specifies piobe as its backend can potentially generate an instance of piobe However if two or more queues also specify the same value for the file parameter the serial access rest
282. iable q and pushes it onto the stack The 1 pushes another 1 onto the stack The pops the top two values two 1 s off the stack and checking them for equality succeeds a 1 is pushed onto the stack The t finds the 1 and so evaluates the 2400 which pushes 2400 onto the stack The calculation of wJ then falls through all but the last line of the remaining printer colon file escape sequences defining wJ The last escape sequence 9ed pops the top value 2400 off the stack and returns it in ASCII format to the in progress calculation of wY The 2400 returned to the in progress calculation of wY is the value of wJ and is pushed onto the stack The Gwk in the else clause is skipped and the 96 terminates the if then else sequence The G_v fetches the line density in lines per inch 6 and pushes it onto the stack The 96 pops the top two values a 6 and a 2400 off the stack multiplies them together and pushes the result 14400 back onto the stack The 300 pushes a 300 onto the stack The pops the top two values a 14000 and a 300 off the stack divides the second value popped off the stack by the first value popped off the stack and pushes the result 48 onto the stack The 9ed pops the top value 48 off the stack and returns it to the in progress calculation of wL The 48 returned to the in progress calculation of wL is the value of I The value of wL was originally referenced in the determination of the value of the ia
283. ide to Printers and Printing The Optra N printer supports internally generated separator pages This feature is controlled by the E flag of the qprt command ENone EBetween Copies EBetween Jobs EBetween Pages The paper source defaults to tray 1 To change the default the uS attribute must be changed in the virtual printer The valid values for uS are uStrby 1 uSi y 2 uSt y 3 uSehvelope feeder uSrbultipurpose tray Note This function is independent of the B flag of the qprt command The equal sign is the command line option for specifying the output destination Valid values are 0 printer top bin 1 finisher bin 1 2 finisher bin 2 3 finisher bin 3 50printer side bin The printer top bin or 0 is the default value for the output bin Note If the printer side bin is selected and the finisher option is installed the output will go to the active bin The U option controls whether paper is output faceup or facedown for the finisher Note The printer top bin is always facedown A value of or true indicates facedown and is the default A value of or false indicates faceup If faceup is selected the staples y and job offset e are ignored Staples Job Offset The y option controls whether staples are desired or not Only certain paper sizes are supported for each of the values for this flag Also there are several rules about output quantities and destinations Refer to printer doc
284. ified If a DN is specified with the d flag the print bind DN will be ou print cn aixdata DN specified The following are sample etc Idapsvc server print and letc Idapsvc system print files Example of a etc Idapsvc server print file PRINTSERVER server ibm com LDAPPORT 389 PRINTBINDDN ou print cn aixdata where PRINTSERVER is the host name of the system with the IBM Directory server LDAPPORHT is the port number to bind to PRINTBINDN is the ACL Bind DN and also serves as the directory context for print Example of a etc Idapsvc system print file PRINTBINDPASSWD ldap where PRINTBINDPASSWD is the ACL bind password for the print subtree The ACL bind password specified with the w flag during client setup should match the ACL bind password value specified during server configuration The print directory context is the same as the printbindDN The file permissions for the etc Idapsvc server print file are set to 644 and the file is owned by root The file permissions for the etc Idapsvc system print file are set to 640 The file is owned by root and members of the Ip group are allowed read access to this file Guide to Printers and Printing Server Flag Options The following sections provide flag descriptions and examples for configuring directory enabled System V print Server Side Options AdminDN LL NM the IBM Directory LDAP administrator DN node DN Advanced Option This option requires a v
285. ile and a print request is made using the obsolete queue name The qdaemon logs an error message You must determine if the message refers to an old queue If so the problem will exist until you remove the obsolete queue entries from the var spool lpd qdir file e f operator attention messages requested by print commands are not being received make sure the socket is connected and the host name can be ping ed e Operator attention messages from print commands are routed through the writesrv command of the TCP IP subsystem If messages are not being received check to see if the writesrv command is running by entering the command lssrc s writesrv If the writesrv command is not running start it with the following command startsrc s writesrv Finally make sure that writesrv is listed in the output of one of the following commands netstat a pg OR netstat a grep writesrv 5 2 Guide to Printers and Printing Inoperative Printer Checklist If you have inoperative printers check the following items for locally attached printers that have never worked Run the test pattern for the printer with only the power cable attached to the printer Verify that you have the correct cable for the printer Make sure the cable is securely plugged in Verify that you have created a device for the printer with Devices SMIT or at the command line Try the following command immediately after a reboot or when you have not tried to se
286. in Face down ig AWoFimsheBimFacedown The following additional qprt option flags are valid using the PS or PCL queue of the Network Printer 24 only e Specifies staple and collation The e option flag only works if a face down finisher bin is selected See z option flag for more information 0 Default Printer Setting Portrait Staple Landscape Staple Two Portrait Staples Two Landscape Staples Offset Jog at end of Job Offset Jog at end of Set 7 No Stapling or Collating o oa A WO N a Valid queue names located on the IBM Network Printer 12 17 and 24 include TEXT Data that requires line feed and carriage return processing PASS Data that requires no further processing 4 58 Guide to Printers and Printing IBM InfoPrint 20 qia Specifies print quality options The q options for the InfoPrint 20 are 60Gpecifies 600 dpi 12 pecifies 1200dpi This produces prints that appear to have twice the actual printer resolution 1200dpi print quality is recommended for printing data such as images that were created at 1200dpi Sets the paper source The u options for the InfoPrint 20 are 0 Use current input source selected on printer 1 Tray 1 2 Auxiliary tray manual feed for paper 3 Auxiliary tray manual feed for envelopes 4 Auxiliary tray automatic 5 Tray 2 6 Envelope tray 7 Tray 3 9 2000 sheet input drawer Sets type of output paper handling The options for
287. in PostScript filters Therefore install your PostScript printers with a printer type of PS PS b PS r or PS br and a content type of PS The PS printer types serve two functions First they cause the print service to activate the correct fast filter to communicate with the printer PS and PS r are used to communicate with printers connected via a serial port PS b and PS br to communicate with printers connected through a parallel port Second the PS interface creates a PostScript banner page for PS printers The banner page is printed last if the printer type is PS r or PS br and the pages of the document are printed in reverse order The printer type is specified with the T option to the Ipadmin command System V Printer Configuration 6 31 PostScript Page Order Table Printer Connection Type Page Order PS serial normal PS b parallel normal PS r serial reverse PS br parallel reverse The b specification used when you select PS b or PS br represents batch which is typically used for parallel connections but can also be used for serial connections if you do not want PostScript printer status messages The PS and PS r printer types cannot be used for parallel connections By specifying the l option of the Ipadmin command when configuring a PostScript printer you can indicate which content types are handled by the printer without slow filtering For a printer on a server system PS is the correct content type to enter
288. inal Output After you have configured the terminal device enter the following to verify that the terminal is working and send output directly to the terminal screen cat etc qconfig dev ttynn where nn is the appropriate tty device number The contents of the etc qconfig file should appear on the terminal screen Installing the Physical Printer To install the physical printer you must 1 Review all relevant installation planning information and the printer s documentation to ensure that you have the required components and information to install the printer 2 Review the terminal documentation for information on connecting printers to the auxiliary port 3 Verify that the AUX port on the terminal is configured with the same settings as your printer such as baud rate parity data bits stop bits and XON XOFF For information about setting values for the AUX port consult your terminal documentation For information about configuring the printer s serial interface consult your printer documentation 4 Connect the printer to the terminal s AUX port Be sure to use the proper cabling Consult your documentation for cabling instructions Configuring a Virtual Printer and Print Queue Perform the following steps to configure your terminal attached printer into the print spooling subsystem 1 At the system prompt type Devices In the Web based System Manager Devices container use the menus to complete the st
289. indow or the chprtcom commands You can also perform this task with the SMIT fast path smit chgprt Deleting a Printer This procedure removes a printer from the system Deleting a printer does not remove any print queues that send print jobs to that printer See Deleting a Print Queue on page 2 26 if you want to also delete the print queues Prerequisites e A printer must have been added Configuring a Printer without Adding a Queue on page 2 9 e You must have root authority Web based System Manager 1 At the system prompt type wsm then select Devices 2 In the Web based System Manager Devices window select the printer object you want to delete 3 Select Delete from the Selected menu You can also perform this task with the SMIT fast path smit rmprt 2 28 Guide to Printers and Printing Remote Printing Overview Remote printing allows different computers to share printers To use remote printing facilities tne computers must be connected via the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol and must support the required TCP IP applications such as the Ipd daemon A remote print request is queued in the same manner as a local print request e Afront end print command such as qprt Ipr or enq initiates the request to the appropriate queue on the local system e The qdaemon on the local system processes the request as it would any locally queued job with one exception The qdaemon passes the
290. ine If not present it is assumed to be at the end of the main pipeline If the first character of the attribute name is not i that is it is not a main pipeline it is ignored Can be specified only in a prefix filter string that is the first character of the attribute s two character name is f The x variable represents a pipeline identifier character The ix variable specifies that the attribute name for the main pipeline should be ix instead of iy where y is the parameter specified or defaulted for the d flag As a special case 96i specifies that a null string should be used as the main pipeline Command Line Flags These operators are usually used in pipeline definitions where they apply to flags specified by the print job submitter If specified in attribute strings used by a formatter they apply to the flags passed to the formatter Valid flag letters are a through z A through Z and 0 through 9 Cy Fxy or F fxy or 9ef Yvxy or V Ux or U Pushes a value of 1 true onto the stack if flag y was specified on the command line Otherwise pushes a value of 0 false onto the stack Shorthand for Cy t x 96l y96 If the y flag was specified on the command line generates x yarg where yarg is the argument specified for the y flag If is specified for x x will not be generated If yarg contains an unprotected not immediately preceded by an odd number of back slashe
291. ing 5 5 deleting 2 26 device characteristics 2 25 deleting 2 26 listing print queue devices 2 21 print queues 2 21 mounting more space 5 8 removing a job 5 7 setting permissions 5 8 splitting a job 5 7 starting and stopping 2 22 status conditions 2 36 using disk space 5 8 working with files 5 8 print server remote 2 32 5 4 print spooler 1 1 defined 2 3 printer 2 8 adding 2 9 adding an undefined commands 2 20 defined 1 2 2 4 procedure of using colon file 4 48 canceling a job 1 8 characteristics 2 28 colon files 4 20 limits field operators 4 42 commands for the 2 1 configuring printer for an ASCII terminal 2 21 printer port 2 9 configuring nonsupported 2 13 control codes 2 2 control information 2 2 defined listing 2 27 deleting 2 28 formatter filters 2 5 local described 1 1 2 4 moving to another port 2 28 nonsupported configuring of 2 13 physical 3 13 X 2 AIX 5L Version 5 1 Guide to Printers and Printing port configuring 2 8 2 9 moving printer 2 28 qdaemon 1 2 queue 1 2 queue device 1 3 real 1 3 remote described 1 3 2 4 managing 2 31 showing status of job 1 9 specific information 4 50 Canon LASER SHOT 4 65 Dataproducts printers 4 65 Hewlett Packard printers 4 65 IBM printers 4 51 Lexmark 4227 Forms Printer 4 69 Lexmark Optra 4 70 Lexmark Optra C Color 4 86 Lexmark Optra E 4 89 Lexmark Optra N 4 91 Lexmark Optra Plus 4 72 Lexmark Plus Printers
292. ing 4 47 Allows multiple selections to be made from a pop up list and works identical to the R operator The multi select field equals m To allow multiple choices to be made from a pop up menu enter 100 _1 T none full emulator 0 1 2 0 Specifies additional validation for any attribute The V operator does not affect how an ODM stanza is built for an attribute The data specified with the V operator is colon file type code operators The operators do the validation The colon file code resolves to one value The value is either 0 or non zero If the resolved value is 0 then the attribute value is valid If the value is non zero then the attribute value is invalid To verify that the value of lis in the range 0 to 100 enter 100 1 V G 1 100 5 tl1 e G 1 0 tl1 e0 060 Adding a Printer Using the Printer Colon File Prerequisite Tasks or Conditions Procedure 1 The printer must be physically attached to your system Compare the similarities and differences between the printer you want to add and the currently supported printers To see a list of supported printers use the Isdev list devices command or refer to Listing All Supported and Defined Printers on page 2 27 You must understand the printer colon files and their format Printer Colon File Conventions on page 4 20 lists the conventions for printer and attribute names and values in colon files Select the supported printer that the new
293. ing Wu say this e Case 1 If the O flag was not used on the command line then return the colon file default value for u For example if the user did not specify a type of input paper handling then return the input paper source either from the command line or the default from the colon file to the evaluation of lwQ e Case 2 If the O flag was used on the command line but its value was not 1 then return the colon file s default value for u For example if the user specified a type of input paper handling other than manual then return the input paper source either from the command line or the default from the colon file to the evaluation of lwQ e Case 3 If the O flag was used on the command line and its value was 1 and the u flag was not used on the command line then return a 0 For example if the user specified Calculatin Page Width Using Printer Colon File Escape Sequence B 7 B 8 manual paper handling but did not specify an input paper source then return a 0 to the evaluation of lwQ e Case 4 If the O flag was used on the command line and its value was 1 and the u flag was used on the command line and its value was not greater than 2 then return a 0 For example if the user specified manual paper handling and also specified either the primary or alternate input paper source then return a 0 to the evaluation of lwQ e Case 5 If the O flag was used on the command line and its value was 1 and the u flag was used
294. ing of the next line may require special port settings for some printers see Setting Printer Port Characteristics on page 6 41 form feed Moves the carriage to the beginning of the next page carriage return Moves the carriage to the beginning of the same line may fail on some printers The word carriage may be archaic for modern laser printers but these printers perform actions similar to those done by a carriage If a printer can handle several types of files including simple you must include simple explicitly in the content type list If you do not want a printer to accept files of type simple specify a blank content type list 1 on the Ipadmin command line Some printers though can accept and print correctly several different types of files When adding this kind of printer specify the names of the content types that the new printer accepts by adding these names to the list By default the list contains only one type simple If you are adding a remote printer list the content types that have been established for it by the administrator of the system on which it resides The content type list is a list of names separated by commas or spaces If you use spaces to separate the names enclose the entire list except for the l in quotes System V Printer Configuration 6 27 Common Types Content type names might look like printer type names but you are free to choose names that are meaningful to you and the people
295. ings and page numbers on the printer enter pr prog c qprt This command adds page headings to prog c and sends it to the qprt command The heading consists of the date the file was last modified the file name and the page number To specify a title for a file named prog c enter pr h MAIN PROGRAM prog c qprt This prints prog c with the title MAIN PROGRAM in place of the file name The modification date and page number are still printed e To print a file named word 1st in multiple columns enter pr 3 word lst qprt This prints the word 1st file in three vertical columns To print several files side by side on the paper pr m h Members and Visitors member lst visitor lst qprt This prints member lst and visitor lst side by side with the title Members and Visitors e To modify a file named prog c for later use enter pr t e prog c gt prog notab c This command replaces tab characters in prog c with spaces and puts the result in prog notab c Tab positions are at columns 9 17 25 33 and so on The e flag tells the pr command to replace the tab characters the t flag suppresses the page headings e To print a file named myfile in two columns in landscape and in 7 point text enter pr 166 w172 2 myfile qprt zl p7 See the pr command in the A X 5L Version 5 2 Commands Reference for the complete syntax Printers Print Jobs and Queues Overview for Users 1 15 Printing ASCII Files on
296. initialize each printer and set up a selected page size character pitch line pitch and character set Thus it is usually sufficient to have the correct entry in the terminfo database usr lib terminfo terminfo lp to add a new printer to the print service The terminfo database identifies each printer by a short name identical to the kind of name used to set the TERM shell variable For example the name in the terminfo database for the AT amp T model 455 printer is 455 To specify the terminfo type for your printer use the T option of the Ipadmin command By default the terminfo database includes entries for many popular printers Select the terminfo type that corresponds to your printer If terminfo does not include an entry for your printer you might still be able to use the printer with the print service However you will not be able to use automatic selection of page size pitch and character sets and you might have trouble keeping the printer set to the correct modes for each print request or using printer forms with the printer In this case you can either add an entry to terminfo Adding a Printer Entry to the terminfo Database on page 6 13 for your printer or create a customized interface program Creating Printer Interface Scripts on page 6 10 to use with the printer You can define hundreds of items for each terminal or printer in the terminfo database However the print service uses fewer than 50 of these and most pri
297. int Queue on page 2 18 If echoes of keyboard input are mixed with printer output check the following e Adjust the virtual printer attributes specific to terminal attached printers To do this use the SMIT fast path command smit chvirprt e Resubmit the print request and avoid typing while the request is printing e fthe ASCII terminal locks turn the terminal off and on Troubleshooting the Base Operating System Spooler 5 9 Considerations for 8 Bit Printer Attached to 7 Bit Interface Some printers assume an 8 bit 8 bits per byte interface to the host Although an 8 bit printer may print when attached to a 7 bit interface the printed output may not be acceptable To determine if your printer assumes an 8 bit interface consult your printer manual Incorrect printed output can be produced in the following situations e Printer command sequences may contain 8 bit values If an 8 bit printer must be attached to a 7 bit interface follow this procedure to prevent incorrect printed output 1 Enter the smit fast path smit lsvirprt 2 Select the print queue and type j j 3 Press the Enter key to exit This prevents print file initialization strings which may contain 8 bit command sequences from being sent to the printer Note This also bypasses printer initialization So depending on the pitch line spacing and other attributes left by the previous print file the output may not print correctly e Print
298. int data such as PostScript and ASCII enter a print queue name for each print data type Note Before choosing a 7 bit interface see Considerations for 8 Bit Printer Attached to 7 Bit Interface on page 5 10 After the printer and print queues are sucessfully created their names are displayed Be sure to note any error messages before you exit Use the Printer Queues menus to customize the new print queue You can also perform this step with the SMIT fast path smit chpq Configuring a Remote Printer and Adding a Queue Prerequisites The remote host must be configured as a print server Web based Sysytem Manager 1 At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers In the Web based System Manager Printer Queues window use the menus to complete the steps to configure a print queue for a printer attached to a remote host You can also perform this step with the SMIT fast path smit mkpq After the print queues are successfully created their names are displayed Be sure to note any error messages before you exit Use the Printer Queues menus to customize the new print queue You can also perform this step with the SMIT fast path smit chpq Configuring a Network Printer and Adding a Queue Prerequisites Read the documentation for your printer You may need printer specific information to connect and configure the printer Read the documentation for the Hewlett Packard JetDirect card You must ha
299. int save files Files Accessed The following table shows files that are accessed and modified by the mkprtldap command during server and client configuration and descriptions It also shows the contents of the files Fe Beseripion letc slapd32 conf Server setup Contains the IBM Directory LDAP configuration information letc Idapsvc system print Client configuration Contains the ACL bind password for the print subtree on the Directory letc Idapsvc server print Client configuration Contains information about the directory server configured to store System V Print information machine name location of print subtree on the directory and LDAP port Related Information For more information see the cancel command in the A X 5L Version 5 2 Commands Heference Volume 1 For more information see the dslpaccept dslpaccess dslpadmin dslpdisable dslpenable dslpreject and dslpsearch commands in the A X 5L Version 5 2 Commands Reference Volume 2 For more information see the Ip Ipstat mkprtldap and mksecldap commands in the A X 5L Version 5 2 Commands Reference Volume 3 System V Printer Configuration 6 49 6 50 Guide to Printers and Printing Appendix A Calculating Page Length Using Printer Colon File Escape Sequences The printer colon file for an ASCII queue on an IBM 4029 LaserPrinter defines page length in lines with the work attribute wL Obtaining a numeric value for
300. inter Colon File Conventions 0600 e cece eee eee e eee Colon File Format 0 00 cece ete eee nn Attribute Names ccs x sscsitnae cae ta mae ek e BEL Ge ee re ieee e eU RS Attribute Values E E ln LIMITS Field ess Suche oc s Lee boo ESAE Example of Print Formatter 0 0 cece eee eee eee Create the Print Formatter Source File 0 0 0 e cece eee eee eee Compile and Link the Print Formatter 0 0000 c cece eee Understanding the Interaction between qdaemon and the Backend Using the Status File 0 cece eee eens Printing Extra Copies id EGO RelYGseE beat hee Pee ees Updating Job Status Information 0 00 cece cence eee ene ees Charging for the Job 0 ce een eee eae UsingtExit Codes ior ee pb uA Rel y ease bbe eee eee res Returning Error Messages 00 e cee eect eens Setting Queue States 0 etn eee Terminating on Receipt of SIGTERM 200 cece eee eee eee Understanding Backend Routines in libqb 00 cee eee Printer Code Page Translation Tables 0000 cece eect eee e eee eee Stage 1 Translation enana ennnen cette eee Stage 2 Translation 2 eusan eunana Printer Code Page Translation for Multibyte Code Sets uus Printer Code Page Translation Tables for Multibyte Code Sets Using Xwindows Fonts with the gprt Command 02000ee cence ee
301. ironment is still very possible but if the problem lies in the command or method used to actually submit a job to the spooler the application must provide a method for precisely determining the command or method used to submit the job to the spooler Troubleshooting the Base Operating System Spooler 5 1 Local Printer Checklist Check the following items if you are having problems with your local printer e Verify that the qdaemon is running Make sure there are no forked processes running from the qdaemon e Make sure the system date is correct The qdaemon automatically rebuilds the qconfig bin file when the qconfig file changes If the date on the qconfig file is earlier than the date on the qconfig bin file the qconfig file is not digested even if it was just modified e f the dates on the qconfig bin file and the qconfig file are correct and changes to the qconfig file are correct the etc qconfig file is no longer linked to the usr Ipd qconfig file e Check that the tmp directory is not full The tmp directory may be full if you receive a message such as No Virtual Printers Defined e f no other user except root can print check the permissions of the tmp directory Also check the permissions of the print commands being used including enq e Check for obsolete queue names in the var spool Ipd qdir file A problem with the installation of a new etc qconfig file occurs when a queue is removed from the new letc qconfig f
302. is an ATT system Configuring a Remote Host as a Print Server The host to be used as a print server must be configured to accept remote print requests A host must be listed in the etc hosts Ipd file on the print server to have permission to print To add a print queue host name to the etc hosts lpd file using Web based System Manager 1 At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers 2 In the Printer Queues window select a computer object 3 Select Properties from the Selected menu 4 To add the host name to the etc hosts Ipd file open and edit the Host Access list You can also perform this task with the smit mkhostslpd fast path A print request sent from a host not defined in the print server s etc hosts Ipd file will be rejected The system displays an error message indicating that the host does not have line printer access A host acting as a print server must also have its Ipd process running to service print requests The SRC command Issrc s Ipd shows the status of the Ipd daemon If it is not active use Web based System Manager or the startsrc command to start the Ipd daemon Using Remote Printers and Queues No special commands are required to print to a remote host Use any print command that allows you to specify a queue The Ipr qprt and eng commands are examples of print commands Use the appropriate flags and options to tailor the print request including the flag that specifies the queue Use the nam
303. is powered on in PostScript mode unless it has been disabled If automatic emulation mode switching is indicated notify the system as follows 1 As the root user type smit chpq 2 Select the appropriate print queue and select Printer Setup on the Change Show Characteristics menu Specify yes in the AUTOMATIC MODE SWITCHING for PostScript attribute Notes a The Japanese Base System Locale Package must be installed to print Japanese characters Guide to Printers and Printing b Japanese characters cannot be printed with PostScript option c To print multibyte characters specify 16x16 or 32x32 dot font with the F option using the qprt command For example qprt Pkji F RomanKn23 Kanji23 IBM JPN23 file IBM 4037 and IBM 4039 LaserPrinter The system selects the IBM ASCII or PCL emulation data stream without manual intervention The printers can print on paper other than the default 8 1 2 by 11 inch size The paper size can be changed using SMIT This is described in Specifying Paper Size on page 2 25 To change paper size for a single print job specify the Q flag with the qprt command Notes 1 The Japanese Base System Locale Package must be installed to print Japanese characters 2 Japanese characters cannot be printed with PostScript option 3 To print multibyte characters specify 16x16 or 32x32 dot font with the F option using the qprt command For example qprt Pkji F Romankn23 Kanji23 IB
304. is the last one to be pushed onto the stack and the second value to be popped off the stack is the one that was pushed onto the stack first Bitwise Logical Operators 96 amp 96 96 Yr Pushes the result onto the stack 96 amp ANDs the first two values popped off the stack For example 6 3 amp pushes a value of 2 onto the stack ORs the first two values popped off the stack For example 6 3 pushes a value of 7 onto the stack 96 EXCLUSIVE ORs the first two values popped off the stack For example 96 6 96 3 96 pushes a value of 5 onto the stack A ONE S COMPLEMENTS the first value popped off the stack and inverts the value of each bit For example 96 1 96 pushes a value of 0 all bits off onto the stack assumes two s complement notation for 1 Conditional if then else Operators 96 expr t thenpart e elsepart t pops a value off the stack and tests it If the value is TRUE nonzero thenpart is run Otherwise elsepart if present is run else if construct 7 cl t bl e c2 t b2 e c3 t b3 e b4 where c1 c2 c3 denote conditions and b1 b2 b3 b4 denote bodies For example f 1 t 2 e 3 pushes a value of 2 onto the stack and YX 6 V VtV 2 e 3 d outputs a value of 2 if the value of the internal variable x is 6 If value of x is not 6 a value of 3 is output When developing complex logic it is sometimes useful to show it in structured form The preceding
305. it to ASCII The result is 1 to 9 characters long depending on the digit specified before the d If the value does not fill the specified field width it is padded on the left with zeros If the value will not fit in the field excess high order digits are discarded For example with a value of 243 from the stack 4d produces 0243 and 2d produces 43 A stack value of 243 would cause 5d to produce 0243 B inary Output From Stack C Pops an integer value from the stack and discards all but the low order byte h Pops an integer value from the stack and discards all but the two low order bytes a Similar to h except that the two bytes from the stack are in an alternate order low order byte then high order byte Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 13 4 14 Input String 9eIxx 9d Dxx 96 sss XX String Guide to Printers and Printing Includes the string attribute whose name is xx l and can be used recursively that is the included string can also contain a l Note that the included string does not inherit the current stack Instead it is assigned a new stack If multiple contiguous includes are to be done the attribute names can be separated by commas and enclosed with brackets For example the string lcp lcc leW can be specified as Sel cp cc eW Downloads to the printer the contents of the file whose full path name is specified by the xx attribute
306. ity to any job while it is in the print queue The basic format of the qpri command is qpri JobNumber a PriorityLevel For example to change job number 123 to priority number 18 type qpri 123 a 18 For example to prioritize a local print job as it is submitted type qprt PQueueName R PriorityLevel FileName See the qpri command in the A X 5L Version 5 2 Commands Reference for the complete syntax smit Command To change the priority of a print job using SMIT type smit qpri Printers Print Jobs and Queues Overview for Users 1 9 Moving a Print Job to Another Print Queue qnov Command This section discussed how you can move a print job to another print queue Note You cannot move a remote print job to another print queue Prerequisite The printer must be physically attached to your system Web based System Manager To move a print job to another queue using Web based System Manager type wsm then select Printers In the Printer Queues window select the print job then use the menus to move it from one print queue to another qmov Command The qmov command moves a print job to another print queue You can either move a particular print job or you can move all the print jobs on a specified print queue or all the print jobs sent by a specified user To determine the print job number type the qchk command For more information see qchk Command on page 1 12 The basic format of the qmov command is
307. k A and Ipstat commands use the rembak program to request queue status information from the print servers The output of a queue status command shows two entries for each remote queue The first entry is the status of the local queue to which remote jobs are sent The second entry shows the status of the queue on the remote print server where the jobs are printed In the following example the queue name rq was used for both the queue on the local system and the queue on the remote print server Queue Dev Status Job Files User PP Blks Cp Iago Iago RUNNING 284 mileaf ann arctur 15 13 1 1 Pro asc READY bsh bshde READY ps ps READY rq rqd READY rq psl RUNNING 297 deskprint dsktop sarah alde 60 22 1 1 QUEUED 298 deskprint howtol sarah alde 60 1 2 Printers Print Jobs and Queues for Systems Administrators 2 29 As the preceding example shows any print jobs currently running or queued show up in the remote print server entry for the queue The rembak program also sends requests to cancel print jobs to the remote print servers Each print job is assigned a number As shown in the previous example print queue status requests display the job numbers for currently queued or running print requests To cancel a job on a remote queue use the same commands used to cancel local print jobs For example to cancel job 298 from the queue rq you can use Web based System Manager type wsm and then select Printers or one of the fol
308. l attributes defined in the printer colon file that begin with a C combination flag for example Cs and Ca and have their combination value referenced in the pipeline are displayed Rules specific to the admvirprt SMIT dialog are as follows e All attributes defined in the printer colon file beginning with either an _ underscore or a C combination flag are displayed unless D n is specified in their Limits field limits Field Operators Definitions and examples of the 1imits field operators are organized into the following groups e Display Operators e Field Characteristics Operators on page 4 45 e Auxiliary Operations and Validation Operators on page 4 46 Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 43 Display Operators 4 44 Guide to Printers and Printing Defines how multiple flags relate within the SMIT dialog how the options for the flags are displayed and what flags and options are available To support interdependent flags for example flags that affect typestyle and pitch combinations of flags must be used Typically there is a single match between a SMIT dialog field and a command line flag The combination flag operator allows one field in a SMIT dialog to represent more than one command line flag Referenced flags should be marked as non display Dn type for SMIT dialogs so that only the combination flag is displayed instead of the individual flags The C operator syntax is C xx yy T
309. le through Manual and MP Tray only The default for O is 3 or paper The default for Q is 1 or Letter for paper sizes and Monarch for envelope sizes Paper Sizes 0 3 Envelope Sizes 0 4 Q 1 Letter 7 3 4 Monarch Q 2 Legal 9 Com 9 Q3 B5 10 Com 10 Q 4 A4 DL Q 5 A5 C5 Q 6 B4 B5 Envelope Q7 A3 Other Envelope Q 8 11 X 17 Note The printer file lexOptraC1200 pcl for PCL 5 defaults the paper size to letter To change the default size change the values for the s0 s3 attributes in the file respectively for the u paper source attributes For example to make legal the default size for tray 2 change the s2 attribute value to 2 SPECIAL NOTE For PCL queues if the selected size is not in the selected input source a search sequence will be used to find the size requested If the size is found that source will be used For PostScript queues if the selected size is not in the selected input source the printer will prompt the user to load the source with the appropriate size This may result in an unexpected paper source being used or an op panel message that may not make sense at first Please refer to the manual to determine appropriate responses Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 75 4 76 Pitch Guide to Printers and Printing Pitch selection is supported for the PCL emulation by using the p flag for pitch and the s flag for font name or type face
310. ler Subsystem Programming 4 119 Formatter Filter Pass Through Mode After a job is submitted to the spooler it eventually passes to the formatter filter for processing and delivery to the printer device driver The formatter filter always opens the printer device driver in pass through mode Jobs submitted to the spooler as opposed to data streams that are sent directly to the printer device driver are always processed or otherwise modified by a formatter filter and not by the printer device driver Like the printer device driver the formatter filter also has two modes of operation pass through and non pass through Again the mode of operation selected for a given job determines how or even if a data stream is processed The d attribute in a virtual printer definition a digested colon file specifies the input data stream type for the queue associated with that virtual printer The virtual printer definition also specifies the formatter filter for that input data stream type When the formatter filter is invoked to process a job the process that runs the formatter pioformat filter checks the value of the d attributes and decides whether to invoke the formatter filter in pass through mode If pass through mode is selected the formatter filter uses the passthru subroutine to read the input stream and send it unmodified to the printer device driver If pass through mode is not selected the formatter filter uses the lineout subroutine to pr
311. lic p 1 to 100 s gothic p 1 to 100 s gothic bold p 1 to 100 S gothic italic p 1 to 100 s lineprinter p 17 Note To format ASCII for other font styles use the base operating System enscript utility or the qprt command with the da s and p flags to a PostScript queue For postscript queues p stands for point size and the valid list of fonts are located in usr lib ps fontmap Valid point sizes are any integer from 1 to 1008 Note Also only a pitch of 17 is supported for the lineprinter font style The optional duplex feature is supported by the Y flag of the qprt command Ysimplex Yd plex long edge binding Ydaplex short edge binding Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 71 Lexmark Optra Plus LaserPrinter 4 72 Paper Source Paper Size Paper Type Guide to Printers and Printing Paper source selection is supported for both the enhanced PCL R 5 emulation and the PostScript Level 2 emulation by using the u flag of the qprt command There are several optional input sources The input source number is the same for both PCL and PostScript ur anual feed utiay 1 ut ay 2 utfay 3 uf eder or feeder 1 ufbeder 2 By default the banner and trailer pages come from the top tray To change the default change the values for the uH and or uT attributes respectively in the colon file to the value for the desired paper source s
312. ll be used to find the size requested If the size is found that source will be used For PostScript queues if the selected size is not in the selected input source the printer will prompt the user to load the source with the appropriate size This may result in an unexpected paper source being used or an operator panel message that may not make sense at first Refer to the manual to determine appropriate responses The Optra T printers support paper types Plain Paper default Bond Transparency Card Stock Labels Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Envelope default for envelope feeder and Custom Type x where x can be 1 through 6 This colon file does not attempt to set these values and will use whatever the printer is set to for that input source The user should insure that the proper paper type is actually installed in the specified source Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 105 Pitch Duplex Mode Collation 4 106 Guide to Printers and Printing Pitch selection is supported for the PCL emulation by using the p flag for pitch and the s flag for font name or type face with the qprt command Pitch values between 1 and 100 characters per inch cpi in whole integers are supported The condensed print flag K is not supported Font Name Pitch s courier p 1 to 100 s courier bold p 1 to 100 s courier italic p 1 to 100 s courier bolditalic p 1 to 100
313. llation planning information and the terminal s documentation to ensure that you have the components required for installation 2 Review your system s configuration and select the serial port 3 Ensure that the communications port is not in use 4 Connect the terminal to the serial communications port Be sure to use proper cabling Consult your documentation for cabling instructions Printers Print Jobs and Queues for Systems Administrators 2 17 5 Configure the terminal according to the documentation provided with it Be sure to record the settings you choose for baud rate stop bits bits per character and flow control You will need this information to configure the base operating system tty device driver Configuring the Terminal Device Driver tty To configure the tty you must 1 Log on as the root user 2 At the system prompt type Devices In the Web based System Manager Devices container use the menus to complete the steps to configure the terminal device driver 3 Select the Add a TTY option and the tty type 4 Provide additional information as prompted such as the configuration settings you made on your terminal at installation If you are not sure of the port number IDs press the F4 key to display a list of available Ds Be sure to enter the correct TERMINAL type When you have entered all configuration information press Enter You can also perform this task with the SMIT fastpath smit tty Verifying Term
314. local queue stanza It specifies the dev file printer device that should be printed to and the backend that should be used Following is a sample listing 1p0 file dev 1p0 header never trailer never access both backend usr lpd piobe In the previous example 1p0 is the device name and the rest of the lines define how the device is used Adding a printer through Web based System Manager type wsm then select Devices creates a standard queue device entry to an existing queue Notes 1 There can be more than one queue device associated with a single queue 2 There will not be a file entry in the etc qconfig file when you are using a remote printer The queue directs the file to the server Real Printer A real printer is the printer hardware attached to a serial or parallel port at a unique hardware device address The printer device driver in the kernel communicates with the printer hardware and provides an interface between the printer hardware and a virtual printer Remote Printer A remote print system allows nodes that are not directly linked to a printer to have printer access To use remote printing facilities the individual nodes must be connected to a network using the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP and must support the required TCP IP applications Virtual Printers A virtual printer usually called a virtual printer definition is a file containing a set of attribute values
315. lowing commands qcan Prq x298 OR lprm Prq 298 Ipd daemon Although local and remote print jobs are submitted with the same commands they are processed differently Once a print job has been transmitted to a remote host it is no longer managed by the local print spooling subsystem The Ipd daemon is part of the TCP IP system group Any host on a TCP IP network can run the Ipd daemon and any host can send print requests to any other host on the network if the host is currently running Ipd As a security measure the Ipd daemon forks a child process that checks each remote print request against two database files the etc hosts equiv file and the etc hosts Ipd file If the name of the host submitting the print request is not in the etc hosts Ipd file the print request is rejected Note The etc hosts equiv file defines which computers on a network are allowed to execute certain commands on a local host without supplying a password The etc hosts Ipd file defines which computers on a network are allowed to execute print commands on a local host without supplying a password The Ipd daemon on the remote print server monitors port 515 for print requests When the Ipd daemon receives a print request from a valid host it places the request in the specified queue The Ipd daemon places files specified in print requests in the directory var spool Ipd The print request is then managed by the qdaemon and the appropriate backend usuall
316. lter on a per job basis The argument to the f flag is the second letter of the two letters that name the filter attribute in the virtual printer definition For instance to select the pr filter for a job on an ASCII queue named asc on an IBM 4029 LaserPrinter you could issue this command qprt Pasc fp etc motd The filter attribute that selects the pr filter is named fp so the argument to the f flag is just p the second letter To permanently select the pr filter use the Isvirprt command to edit the virtual printer definition and set the value of the f attribute to p The f attribute selects a filter that will be used to pre process any job submitted to the queue associated with this virtual printer definition Since Ip Ipr and qprt are all just front ends to the enq command the true entry point to the spooler you would suppose that enq must support the f flag If you issue the enq command with the f flag however you will receive an error message enq does not support the f flag This is a situation where the previously described technique Spooler Data Flow eng Command on page 3 6 of mounting bin echo over bin enq proves useful The root user can issue these commands from a shell prompt 1 mount bin echo bin enq 2 qprt Pasc fp etc motd 3 umount bin enq After the second command is issued the following appears in the display element defined by your TERM environment variable P asc o f o
317. ltiplied by 10 to account for the possibility of a 17 pitch being specified A 17 pitch is actually 17 1 so multiplying both the numerator and the denominator by 10 causes the 1 to be accounted for in the final calculation of page width The value 128 is returned to the evaluation of ia That s basically where the 128 in the PIPELINE OF FILTERS came from Calculatin Page Width Using Printer Colon File Escape Sequence B 9 B 10 Guide to Printers and Printing Index Symbols etc qconfig file structure 3 12 Numbers 5080 Attachment Adapter 2 10 A ASCII files printing on PostScript printer 1 16 ASCII terminal configuring a printer for 2 21 attachment files 4 38 printer 1 2 2 4 processing 3 7 routines libqb 4 32 C Canon LASER SHOT printer 4 65 chmod command 5 8 code sets multibyte 4 36 colon files 4 3 4 20 limits field operators 4 42 to add a printer 4 48 commands chmod 5 8 crontab 5 8 df 5 5 du 5 8 enq 5 7 grep 5 5 lpq 5 7 lprm 5 7 Ipstat 5 5 mkprtldap 6 43 mount 5 8 pr 1 14 ps 5 4 5 5 pwd 5 5 qcan 1 8 5 7 qchk 1 12 ghid 1 11 qmov 1 10 qpri 1 9 qprt 1 4 rm 5 5 smit 1 7 split 5 7 startsrc 5 4 commands list 1 9 1 12 crontab command 5 8 D Dataproducts printers 4 65 df command 5 5 du command 5 8 E eng command 5 7 escape sequences arithmetic operators 4 16 ASCII output 4 13 binary output 4 13 bitwise logic
318. luates the e else clause Wu a 1 is again pushed onto the stack The 1 pushes another 1 onto the stack The again pops the top two values two 1 s off the stack and checking them for equality succeeds a 1 is pushed onto the stack The next t finds the 1 and so evaluates the Gs1 The s1 attribute is a number representing the paper size for paper tray 1 the upper paper tray and its default value in this virtual printer definition is 1 This 1 is pushed onto the stack All but the very last of the remaining printer colon escape sequences in the evaluation of wQ are skipped The 9ed pops the top value a 1 off the stack and returns it in ASCII format to the in progress calculation of wJ The 1 returned to the in progress caclulation of wJ is the value of _Q and is pushed onto the stack It is immediately popped back off the stack and stored in the internal variable q Wu already determined to be 1 is again pushed onto the stack 3 pushes a 3 onto the stack then the lt pops the top two values off the stack and checks to see if the second value popped is less than the first value popped 1 is less than 3 so a 1 is pushed onto the stack The t finds the 1 and so enters the if then else then else then else sequence looking for an integer to pair with the paper size value calculated for Q Calculating Page Lenght Using Printer Colon File Escape Sequence A 5 A 6 The gq fetches the stored value of _Q from the internal var
319. lues will be applied in the left to right order given by the user The replacement part of a template shows how the value of a template is given to the filter program It is typically a literal option sometimes with the place holder asterisk included to show where the value goes The pattern and replacement can also use the regular expression syntax of the ed command for more complex conversion of user input options into filter options All of the regular expression syntax of the ed command is supported including the X and n constructions which can be used to extract portions of the pattern for copying into the replacement and the amp which can be used to copy the entire pattern into the replacement Note Ifa comma or an equal sign is included in a pattern or a replacement escape its special meaning by preceding it with a backslash Note that some regular expressions include commas that will have to be escaped this way A backslash in front of any of these characters is removed when the pattern or replacement is used The following examples show how this works Example col Filter Suppose you already added a filter called col with the following definition 6 24 Guide to Printers and Printing Input types N37 Nlp simple Output types simple Command usr bin col Options TERM 450 b MODES expand x Options INPUT simple p f Note If you provide more than one definition that is more than
320. m that you load into your printer An application typically generates a file that when printed on the blank form fills out the form The print service includes facilities to create and administer forms To specify the format of forms create a form description file For example create a file called tmp check desc and include all or any subset of the following information Page length 66 Page width 80 Number of pages 2 Line pitch 10 Character pitch 16 Character set choice any Ribbon color blue Comment Check form Alignment pattern XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX The print service uses the alignment pattern to line up the forms before printing begins and prompts you to perform an alignment before printing Depending on your printer specify page length in lines inches i or centimeters c Specify page width in columns inches i or centimeters c In the example above page length is specified as 66 lines If the printer recognizes inches specify the page length as 11i Adding a Form to the Print Service After you have created a form you must add it to the service Choose a name that describes the form because you use this name when you mount the form The following command adds the form previously described lpforms f check F tmp check desc This command places the form in the usr spool Ip admins Ip forms file Removing a Form The print service imposes no fixed
321. m the form that it is printed on If the user does not require a form he or she can specify the page size and print spacing to use If the user gives neither a form to use nor the page size and print spacing defaults are used Note The preceding information does not apply to PostScript printers By setting defaults for each printer you can make it easier to submit print requests For example you can designate different printers as having different default page sizes or print spacing You can dedicate one printer to printing wide 132 column output another to printing normal 80 columns 66 lines output and yet another to printing letters in monospaced fonts 12 characters per inch 8 lines per inch Users simply route their file to the appropriate printer to get the style of output they want You can specify the following default settings e Page width e Page length e Character pitch e Line pitch Specify the first two in columns and lines respectively or in inches Specify character pitch and line pitch in characters per inch cpi and lines per inch lpi respectively In addition specify the character pitch as pica for 10 cpi elite for 12 cpi or compressed for the maximum cpi the printer can provide up to a limit of 30 cpi To specify the default settings use the following commands 6 6 Guide to Printers and Printing usr sbin lpadmin p printer name o width scaled number usr sbin lpadmin p
322. m the printer supports A print queue can be defined for PostScript Printers Print Jobs and Queues for Systems Administrators 2 3 Proprinter HP LaserJet and Diablo 630 emulations All four print queues output to the same real printer the 4216 Model 031 Local and Remote Printers A local printer is the printer attached to a node or host A remote printer allows nodes that are not directly linked to a printer to have printer access To use remote printing facilities the individual nodes must be connected to a network using the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP and must support the required TCP IP applications The Ipd daemon controls the remote print server and any host on a network can be designated as a print server Before a remote server can accept a print request the etc hosts lpd or etc hosts equiv file must be configured to accept print requests from other nodes or hosts Use Web based System Manager type wsm then select Printers or SMIT Manage Print Server option to configure a print server Printer Backends 2 4 The printer backend is a collection of programs started by the spooler s qdaemon command to manage a print job that is queued for printing The printer backend performs the following functions e Receives from the qdaemon command a list of one or more files to be printed e Uses printer and formatting attribute values from the database overridden by any flags specified e Initializ
323. mat You want to print six pages of this file pages 4 through 9 with two logical pages on each physical page Because one of the printers on your system psprinter is a PostScript printer you can do this by entering the following command lp d psprinter T simple P 4 9 y group 2 myfile The filter that groups these logical pages will try to position the pages on the physical page to maximize space utilization Thus when you specify groupz2 the pages will be printed side by side so that the physical page will be landscape orientation Landscape mode which controls the orientation of the logical page rather than the physical page would cause the logical pages to be positioned one on top of the other when combined with the groupz2 option Supporting PostScript Printers Support of PostScript printers is similar to support of other printers in that the printers must be defined to the system with the Ipadmin command and the appropriate software must be installed to manage them PostScript printers may require some additional effort in supporting fonts and establishing where s ow filtering occurs Installing and Maintaining PostScript Printers PostScript printers like other printers are installed with the Ipadmin command These printers must use the PS interface program requested by specifying m PS on the Ipadmin command line Note The printer type and content type of a PostScript printer must be consistent with the printer type used
324. mine the controller code level and amount of memory on your IBM Network Color Printer print a configuration page from the printer operator panel See the configuration page under GENERAL INFO Memory is the second item and the third item is version of the controller code The predefined files on AIX 4 2 1 or later only supports the IBM Network Color Printer 2 0 or higher controller code level Guide to Printers and Printing IBM Network Printer 12 17 and 24 IBM Network Printers can print on paper other than the default 8 1 2 by 11 inch size The paper size can be changed using SMIT as described in Specifying Paper Size on page 2 25 and see IBM Network Color Printer on page 4 55 To change paper size for a single print job specify the Q flag with the qprt command To print more lines per page than the line space allows 6 or 8 lines per inch specify the number of lines per page The line spacing is compressed to allow the larger number of lines to fit on a page For example if the line spacing is 6 lines per inch entering the command qprt 1 66 FileName causes the file FileName to print at 66 lines per page instead of the default 60 lines per page The IBM Network Printer 12 17 and 24 support the following fonts and pitches courier 10 12 or 17 pitch courier bold 10 12 or 17 pitch courier italic bold 10 12 or 17 pitch lettergothic 10 12 or 17 pitch lettergothic bold 10 12 or 17 pitch lettergothic italic 10 12 or 17
325. mission to use forms on a remote printer it is not necessary for the deny lists in both the local and remote print services to include that user By being included in only one of these deny lists a user can be denied access to remote forms As a courtesy to your users however make sure that any local users who are included in a deny list on a remote system are included in the corresponding deny list on your local system This ensures that whenever a user on your system requests a form without authorization the user is immediately informed that permission to use the form is being denied If the local print service does not know that a user is denied permission to use a particular remote form there will be a delay before the user receives a permission denied message from the remote system Defining the Forms Access List To add names to the allow list and remove them from the deny list run the following lpforms f form name u allow user list To add names to the deny list and remove them from the allow list run the following lpforms f form name u deny user list The user list is a comma or space separated list of names of users If you use spaces to separate the names enclose the entire list including the allow or deny but not the u in quotes Each item in the list can include a system name Specifying allow all allows all users Specifying deny all denies all users If you do not add user names to the allow or deny lists the
326. mmand in the A X 5L Version 5 2 Commands Reference for the complete syntax For example to display the default print queue type qchk q For example to display the long status of all queues until empty while updating the screen every 5 seconds type qchk A L w 5 For example to display the status for print queue 150 type qchk P 1p0 For example to display the status for job number 123 type qchk 123 For example to check the status of all jobs in all queues type qchk A Note The base operating system also supports the BSD UNIX check print queue command Ipq and the System V UNIX check print queue command Ipstat See the Ipq and Ipstat commands in the A X 5L Version 5 2 Commands Reference for the complete syntax smit Command To check a print job s status using SMIT type smit qchk 1 12 Guide to Printers and Printing Printer Status Conditions Some of the status conditions that a print queue can have are DEV BUSY DEV WAIT DOWN HELD QUEUED READY RUNNING Indicates that e More than one queue is defined to a printer device IpO and another queue is currently using the printer device e qdaemon attempted to use the printer port device IpO but another application is currently using that printer device To recover from a DEV BUSY wait until the queue or application has released the printer device or cancel the job or process that is using the printer port Indicates tha
327. n S any A mail W 5 To stop receiving alert messages to mount a form or font cartridge type one of the following lpforms f form name A quiet lpadmin S font cartridge nam A quiet Guide to Printers and Printing To remove alerting when a form or font cartridge needs to be mounted type one of the following lpforms f form name A none lpadmin S font cartridge nam A non If you do not define an alert method for a form or font cartridge you do not receive an alert for it If you define a method but do not define the number of minutes between alerts with the W option you receive one alert for each occasion Setting Printer Port Characteristics Printer port characteristics are attributes defined with the o sttyz stty option list option of the Ipadmin command Printers connected directly to computers and those connected over some networks require that the printer port characteristics be set by the interface program These characteristics define the low level communications with the printer Included are the baud rate use of XON XOFF flow control 7 8 or other bits per byte type of parity and output postprocessing The standard interface program uses the stty command to initialize the printer port minimally setting the baud rate and a few other default characteristics Default Port Characteristics The default characteristics applied by the standard interface program are listed in the following table Default
328. n be accessed using the z flag of the qprt command The following table shows the possible values and the corresponding output bin destination LaserJet 5Si fase CSCS value C Pmerepas dombn a p G C G C Ge G C G e go G e CENE NAR Printer left face up bin when HCO not installed LaserJet 5Si Mopier destination output bin Printer top face down bin HCO face down bin 1 HCO face down bin 2 HCO face down bin 3 HCO face down bin 4 HCO face down bin 5 HCO face up Printer left face up bin when HCO not installed Stapler bin Number of Copies LaserJet 5Si Mopier The LaserJet 5Si Mopier supports printing copies internal with the W flag This differs from the N flag supported by the spooler With the N flag copies are processed on the base operating system machine and then sent to the printer one at a time However the W option on the LaserJet 5Si Mopier sends only one copy of the print job to the printer and the copies are then produced by the printer The basic format is W 4 66 Guide to Printers and Printing Hewlett Packard LaserJet 8000 and 8500 Color Printers Output Bins The base LaserJet 8500 Color and LaserJet 8000 printers have two possible destinations Top output bin that prints face down e Left side output bin that prints face up in reverse order If an optional High Capacity Output HCO device is installed the additional trays are available as well The out
329. n page 1 17 Printer Terminology The following list defines terms commonly used with printing Local Printer When you attach a printer to a node or host the printer is referred to as a local printer Print Job A print job is a unit of work to be run on a printer A print job can consist of printing one or more files depending on how the print job is requested The System assigns a unique job number to each job it runs Print Spooler The spooler used for printing provides a generic spooling function that can be used for queuing various types of jobs including print jobs queued to a printer The spooler does not normally know what type of job it is queuing When the system administrator defines a spooler queue the purpose of the queue is defined by the spooler backend program that is specified for the queue For example if the spooler backend program is the piobe command the printer I O backend the queue is a print queue Likewise if the spooler backend program is a compiler the queue is for compile jobs When the spooler s qdaemon command selects a job from a spooler queue it runs Printers Print Jobs and Queues Overview for Users 1 1 the job by invoking the backend program specified by the system administrator when the queue was defined The main spooler command is the enq command Although you can invoke this command directly to queue a print job three front end commands are defined for submitting a print job the Ip Ipr a
330. nager Printer Queues window use the menus to complete the steps to list print queue devices You can also perform this task with the 1sallqdev q QueueName command or with the SMIT fast path smit lsallqdev Showing Status of Print Queues Use the Web based System Manager to perform this task Web based System Manager 1 At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers 2 In the Web based System Manager Printers window choose the Queue Status icon From the Selected menu choose Properties then select the General tab within the Printer Properties dialog Information pertaining to status of print queues will appear in the Print Queue Properties dialog You can also perform this task with the enq e 8 command or with the SMIT fast path smit qstatus Starting and Stopping a Print Queue Prerequisites To perform these tasks you must have root authority Starting a Queue 1 At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers 2 In the Web based System Manager Printer Queues window select the queue or device that you want to start 3 Select Start all Devices for Queue to start a queue Select Start a Specific Device to start a device You can also perform this task with the following commands smit qstart OR qadm U QueueName Stopping a Queue 1 At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers 2 In the Web based System Manager Printer Queues window select the queue or device that you want to stop
331. name of user who made the request title Optional title specified by the user copies Number of copies requested by the user options List of blank separated options specified by the user using Ip o or by the print service from default values specified by the administrator with the Ipadmin command See the Ip command for the list of options recognized by the standard interface file Full path name of a file to be printed When the interface script is invoked Standard input comes from dev null Standard output is directed to the printer port Standard error output is directed to a file that will be displayed to the user who submitted the print request The print service passes additional printer configuration information to the interface script as the following shell variables TERM printer type Specifies the printer type The value is used as a key for obtaining printer capability information from the extended terminfo database FILTERz pipeline Specifies the filter to use to send the request content to the printer the filter is given control of the printer CHARSET character set Specifies the character set to use when printing the content of a print request The standard interface script extracts the control sequences needed to select the character set from the terminfo database Creating Printer Interface Scripts If you have a printer that is not supported by adding an entry to the terminfo database or if yo
332. nce The third part is the formatted printer colon file escape sequences aligned on the left margin of the vi session These escape sequences also have a horizontal formatting component indentations are used to clarify the flow of if then else statements nested or otherwise The first and second parts can be edited but the editing changes have no effect and should therefore not be performed Any changes made to the initial definition of the attribute or to the annotations will be ignored by piodigest if you write the file It is the third part the formatted attribute definition that can be edited If this part is edited and written piodigest will issue an error message if any syntax errors are found As with normal programming languages you can make logic errors but not syntax errors For practical examples of modifying printer colon files see Modifying the mi mp and d Attributes on a PostScript Queue on page 4 126 Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 125 Modifying the mi mp and d Attributes on a PostScript Queue Input data stream attributes store the pipelines for different input data stream types For more information see Input Data Stream Attributes on page 4 6 The definition for a generic PostScript printer has four input data stream pipelines ia extended ASCII in troff ip passthru and is PostScript The d attribute in the colon file controls which of the four input data stream processing pipeli
333. nd anything to the printer since a reboot cho Does the printer work dev lpn where 1pn is the name of the printer device you are testing If the message prints at the printer set up the virtual printer definition for the printer If the statement hangs or returns an error message the problem is not the operating system or the queueing system It is one or more of the following The cable The setup such as baud rate handshaking and port number The printer and the computer must have the same settings A bad port on the computer A broken printer If you have trouble getting a serial printer to work on an 8 port 16 port or 64 port adapter or on a modem try to get the printer working on S1 or S2 directly on the computer Once the printer works on S1 or S2 move the printer to the desired port If S1 and S2 are unavailable try moving the printer to any other port Remote Printer Checklist Check the following items for the host acting as the remote print server Make sure that all client machines foreign hosts are listed in the etc hosts lpd file Make sure that the TCP IP subsystem is running Check for the existence of the usr spool Ipd directory Make sure that the etc locks Ipd directory does not exist if the Ipd daemon is not running Make sure that both the Ipd daemon and the qdaemon are running Check the Local Printer Checklist on page 5 2 Check the following items for hosts printi
334. nd of this pipeline the filtered file is passed to the pioout device driver interface program The pioout command is invoked in a pipeline by the piobe command For locally attached printers the pioout command sends the print file to the appro priate printer device driver for example dev Ip1 However for terminal attached printers the print files are sent to the printer via the tty device driver for example dev ttyO after being modified by data 2 20 Guide to Printers and Printing gathered from the terminf o and virtual printer databases The terminfo database is queried for the mc5 and mc4 terminal control attributes The virtual printer database is queried for the asynchronous controller specific attributes Terminal Attached Printing Limitations 1 Only ASCII data should be sent to the printer Binary data may inadvertently lock the terminal or cause printing to cease prematurely 2 Printer status messages such as out of paper and printer offline are not supported Configuring a Printer for an ASCII Display Terminal Prerequisites e You must have connected a serial printer to the AUX or PRINT port on your ASCII terminal Refer to the terminal documentation for cabling instructions e The tty device for the ASCII terminal must be defined See Adding or changing a TTY from the command line in AlX 5L Version 5 2 System Management Guide Communications and Networks for more information e The printer must be online
335. nd qprt commands A print request issued by one of these commands is first passed to the enq program which then places the information about the file in the queue for the qdaemon to process Printer Backend The printer backend is a collection of programs called by the spooler s qdaemon command to manage a print job that is queued for printing The printer backend performs the following functions Receives from the qdaemon command a list of one or more files to be printed Uses printer and formatting attribute values from the database overridden by flags entered on the command line Initializes the printer before printing a file Runs filters as necessary to convert the print data stream to a format supported by the printer Provides filters for simple formatting of ASCII documents Provides support for printing national language characters Passes the filtered print data stream to the printer device driver Generates header and trailer pages Generates multiple copies Reports paper out intervention required and printer error conditions Reports problems detected by the filters Cleans up after a print job is canceled Provides a print environment that a system administrator can customize to address specific printing needs Printer Plotter Device A special file in the dev directory for the device This file can be used by redirection for example cat FileName gt dev lp0O Settings for the device driver can be displayed and cha
336. ndle you can support more applications in the print service The print service provides a few filters for converting various types of files into PostScript For each filter you add to the System you must specify one or more types of input it can accept and the type of output it can produce usually only one When a user specifies by executing Ip T a file content type that no printer can handle the print service tries to find a filter that can convert the file into an acceptable type If the file to be printed is passed through a filter the print service then matches the output type of that filter with a printer type or the input type of another filter The print service continues to Guide to Printers and Printing match output types to input types in this way thus passing a file through a series of filters until the file reaches a printer that accepts it Example HP DeskJet 500 In this example the user Chris has run a spreadsheet program and has generated a file containing a copy of a spreadsheet Chris now wants to print this file using the print service You have only HP DeskJet 500 printers on your system Fortunately the spreadsheet application understands how to generate output for several printers and Chris knows it is necessary to request output that can be handled by the HP DeskJet 500 When Chris submits the file for printing the print service queues it for one of the printers no filter is needed Example Tektronix 4
337. ne used when By Driver I F mp Strings separated by commas That Identify Print File Data Types see mi mq Queue Name Initialized By piodigest PostScript pioattrl cat IBM 4029 Laser Printer 029 3 NO ps Idf piofpt s l lp1 Ide pioout v ABCDFINOPRS 1 N3200PS ps1 These same attributes are stored in the colon file in the following format 058 AMISS 330 mA PostScript 332 mD pioattrl cat 287 mE 331 mL IBM 4029 LaserPrinter 295 mN 4029 516 mY 3 301 mc NO 302 md ps 303 mf Idf piofpt 304 mi s 1 305 mm 306 mn 1pl 307 mo Ide pioout v ABCDFINOPRS 308 mp N3200PS 309 mq psl 4 10 Guide to Printers and Printing Work Variable Attributes Work variable attributes values change while formatting begin with the letter w and are listed under the WKV group header attribute Some typical work variable attributes for a supported PostScript printer are _WKV WORK VARIABLES w7 Font Name for Header LIne of Text Converted to S_s Courie Postscript r tCourier Bold e S s Ti mes Roman Times Bold e S s Helvetica tHelvetica Bold e S s Ti mes Italic tTimes BoldIta lic e S s Hel vetica Oblique S StHelvetica BoldOblique e Iw8 wl Smallest legal sheetfeeder drawer number 0 wu Largest legal sheetfeeder drawer number 3 The colon file stores these same values as 062
338. needed only if the diskette device is not dev fd0 the standard 3 5 inch diskette drive Note If Greek or Turkish fonts have been installed you must enter the following to download the fonts whenever the printer is turned off and on Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 53 Splp F xxx where xxx is the device name of the printer such as IpO This instructs the system to download the Greek or Turkish font to the printer IBM 4208 502 IBM 5572 B02 IBM 5573 H02 and IBM 5579 H02 K02 The Japanese and Proprinter data streams are supported To print Japanese characters specify 24x24 dot font with the F option on the qprt command as follows qprt Pkji F usr lib X11 fonts JP IBM JPN17 pcf Z file IBM 4216 Personal Page Printer Model 031 The switches on the back of the printer must be set for automatic emulation switching as specified in Appendix B of the Personal Page Printer II Model 031 Guide to Operations manual The system selects the PostScript Proprinter XL emulation PCL emulation or Diablo 630 emulation without manual intervention ASCII files can also be printed using the PostScript data stream If you attach the printer to a serial port you may need to send a special PostScript file to the printer to establish the baud rate parity and protocol for the printer The Personal Page Printer II Model 031 Guide to Operations manual contains a sample file Print queues for the Proprinter XL P
339. nes will by default be used The default value for d on a generic PostScript queue is s PostScript so the pipeline defined by is will be used Submitting a non PostScript ASCII job to a PostScript queue with a generic PostScript virtual printer definition will result in the loss of the job The root user can modify the mi mp and d attributes in the virtual printer definition so that the queue backend can determine the file type PostScript or non PostScript ASCII and set the print environment accordingly The mi attribute uses single comma separated characters to name input data stream types The mp attribute uses comma separated strings to identify input data stream types There is a one to one pairing between the characters of mi and the strings of mp The default value of mi for a generic PostScript virtual printer is s The default value for mp is 9696 the first two characters of a PostScript file are Recall that printer colon file escape sequences all begin with a 96 so to use a literal in an attribute definition it must be escaped with another 96 The virtual printer will interpret all files beginning with 9e as being of data stream type s and use the is pipeline Since non PostScript ASCII file do not begin with a they will not be printed by this queue To enable ASCII printing on this queue the root user can use the Isvirprt command to modify the referenced attributes as follows e mi a s e mp e dz omi
340. ng to a remote print server Verify that the queue name and server name for the remote print server are correct in the letc qconfig file Make sure that the TCP IP subsystem is running Make sure that the qdaemon daemon is running Troubleshooting the Base Operating System Spooler 5 3 Adapter Considerations The 16 port RS 232 adapter does not support clear to send CTS A printer connected to this adapter will not finish printing a job if the printer is powered off while the job is printing You must restart the job or delete it manually Resource Considerations Printing generates processes Printing a job might take up anywhere from one to five processes in most instances As with any other activity it is possible to exhaust the number of processes on the system This can happen by submitting a single print job on a very actively used system or by submitting large numbers of jobs on a system with little other activity Running out of processes can cause erratic behavior on your system If you experience erratic behavior on your system check your resources to determine if you are running out of processes Printing Problems When the var File System is Full Printing problems occur when the var file system is full This usually happens when print jobs sent to the print queue begin to back up for some reason causing the spooling directory within the file system to grow too large The spooling directories usually affected are v
341. nged using Web based System Manager type wsm then select Devices or the Isdev and chdev commands Before printer commands can access a printer device a print queue must be created for the device or the printer must be configured in the printer backend in etc qconfig qdaemon The qdaemon is a process that runs in the background controling the queues It is generally started by the startsrc command when the system is turned on startsrc is a command to the srcmstr daemon that is started from etc inittab The qdaemon keeps track of the print requests in the var spool Ipd qdir directory and ensures that the jobs are sent to the proper printer at the proper time It also keeps track of the status of the printers and stores printer usage data for system accounting purposes for example Ipstat and enq A commands This information is held in the var spool Ipd stat directory If the qdaemon is stopped it will be restarted by the srcmstr Note Do not stop the srcmstr process it controls other daemons running on your system 1 2 Guide to Printers and Printing Queue The queue is where you direct a print job It is a stanza in the etc qconfig file whose name is the name of the queue It points to the associated queue device The following is a sample listing Msal device 1p0 Usually queues are created through Web based System Manager Queue Device The queue device is the stanza in the etc qconfig file that usually follows the
342. nght Using Printer Colon File Escape Sequence A 9 outer if then else statement and the Q value of 1 will select a page length of 2400 pels A u value of 3 will direct the process into the else piece of the outer if then else statement and the Q value of 3 will select an envelope page length of 1087 pels Case 2 Same as case 1 Case 3 The user specified manual paper handling on the command line but did not specify a paper source so Wu is assigned the value 0 and that value is returned to the evaluation of wQ The 0 will cause wQ to be assigned the value of sO the paper size for manual paper feed a 1 When the evaluation of wJ is resumed the u value of 0 will direct the process into the if piece of the outer if then else statement and the Q value of 1 sO will select a page length of 2400 pels Case 4 The user specified manual paper handling on the command line and also used the u flag to specify either the primary or alternate paper source but definitely not envelopes As with case 3 a page length of 2400 pels will be chosen Case 5 The user specified manual paper handling on the command line and also used the u flag to specify an envelope paper source so Wu is assigned the value 4 and that value is returned to the evaluation of wQ The 4 will cause wQ to be assigned the value of s4 the envelope size for manual envelope size a 3 When the evaluation of wJ is resumed the u value of 4 will direct the process into the else piece of
343. nition must be unique Attribute names can contain the characters a through z A through Z 0 through 9 and _ underscore Attribute names must not begin with a numeral All attribute names must be two characters long except for group header attribute names which can be five characters long Attribute names for group headers begin with _ _ two underscores and must not be longer than five characters A group header attribute marks the beginning of a group of related attributes The following is a list of groups of virtual printer attributes addressed in this section e Default Flag Value Attributes on page 4 4 e System Administration Attributes on page 4 5 e Input Data Stream Attributes on page 4 6 e Prohibited Flags Attributes on page 4 7 e Filter Flag Attributes on page 4 8 e Directory Attributes on page 4 9 e Miscellaneous Attributes on page 4 10 e Work Variable Attributes on page 4 11 e Command Aggregate Attributes on page 4 11 e ASCII Control Code Attributes on page 4 12 e Escape Sequences Attributes on page 4 12 Examples show some of the typical attributes for a supported PostScript laser printer 4029 LaserPrinter Each example shows how the Isvirprt and smit Isvirprt commands display virtual printer attributes with a descriptor for each attribute and how those same attributes are stored in the printer colon file Default Flag Value Attributes 4 4 Default flag value attributes are grouped under the FLG group header a
344. not the S in quotes These are the only font cartridges considered installable on the printer To remove the font cartridge list from the printer type usr sbin lpadmin p printer nam S non After you specify the list of font cartridges installable on the printer you can install them See Changing a Font Cartridge on a Printer on page 6 38 Changing a Font Cartridge on a Printer Before the print service prints a file that requires a font cartridge you must install and mount the font cartridge on the printer If you have set up alerting for the font cartridge the print service alerts you when enough print jobs are queued for the font cartridge to be installed and mounted See Alerting to Mount Forms and Font Cartridges on page 6 40 Changing a font cartridge involves first removing the current font cartridge from the printer Then install the new font cartridge on the printer and inform the print service that the new font cartridge is ready to use by mounting it Because it is difficult to do this on a printer that is currently printing and because the print service continues to print files that do not require the font cartridge on the printer disable the printer first To install or change a font cartridge do the following 1 Disable the printer 2 Remove the current font cartridge from the printer if applicable 3 Install the new font cartridge on the printer 4 Mount the new font cartridge by typing usr sbin
345. nown is that the dimensions have been flipped what the dimensions actually are is still unknown The evaluation of wK begins by fetching the value if any of a command line usage of the Q flag which is a printer dependent value requesting a specific paper size If the Q flag was used on the command line then that value will be used to select the paper width in pels otherwise a value for Q will be determined by evaluating Wu which is a value for the paper source based on the attributes _O type of input paper handling and u input paper source Note that Q is defined as lwQ whose definition begins with lWu Since Q was not used on the command line the evaluation of Wu determines that the O flag wasn t used either and so executes the else clause in the outer if then else statement in the definition of Wu returning the default colon file value of u 1 to the evaluation of wQ Since this is as deep as the nesting of escape sequences goes for the evaluation of w it is worth taking a closer look at the logic defining Wu Keep in mind the definitions and legal values for O u and Q which are e O type of input paper handling 1 manual 2 continuous forms 3 sheet feed default is sheet feed e u input paper source 1 primary 2 alternate 3 envelope default is primary e Q paper size for input paper source values are printer dependent defined by combination of O and u The escape sequences defin
346. nq Pasc etc motd If the qdaemon is not active a variant of the following message will be displayed enq WARNING Cannot awaken qdaemon request accepted anyway enq errno 2 No such file or directory enq WARNING Cannot awaken qdaemon request accepted anyway enq errno 2 No such file or directory Use the command ps ef grep qdaemon to verify that the qdaemon is not active If the qdaemon is not active you should see at the most a line of output representing the grep itself It should look something like this root 2992 18792 0 12 46 39 pts 2 0 00 grep qdaemon If the qdaemon is active which it almost certainly will not be you will see a variant of the following line root 2980 3652 0 12 41325 0 00 usr sbin qdaemon If the qdaemon is not active issue the command startsrc s qdaemon to restart the qdaemon If the qdaemon died it should have been restarted automatically by the srcmstr 5 12 Guide to Printers and Printing process but it doesn t always work so restart it manually You should see a variant of this message 0513 059 The qdaemon Subsystem has been started Subsystem PID is 3000 Wait a minute or so and re issue the command ps ef grep qdaemon Is the qdaemon still active or did it start and then quit The qdaemon may no longer be active despite the fact that you just restarted it and received a message stating the qdaemon s process id PID Check for the existence of the
347. ns 00 60 cece cee eee teens Resource Considerations 00 ccc eee eens Printing Problems When the var File System is Full 022000005 Reactivating the Queue Daemon 0 eee eens Clearing a Print Queue Backlog 00 cece eens Reallocating Printer Resources 0 c cece eens Deleting Unnecessary Directory Files 00 00 cee eee eee ee eee Terminal Attached Printer Checklist 0000 c cece cee e eee e nee Considerations for 8 Bit Printer Attached to 7 Bit Interface qdaemon Checklist Queuing System Problems isere atrae cece eee e Testing the qdaemon Testing a Spooler Que e s lue aid cae iste Sa eked aie TRAE Copying Spooled JODS 1 ended dete Bee coge b Ve ea eee Cleaning Up and Starting Over 0 cece eee eee Related Information Guide to Printers and Printing 4 111 4 112 4 112 4 112 4 112 4 113 4 113 4 118 4 118 4 120 4 121 4 126 4 127 4 129 4 129 4 130 4 133 4 133 4 135 4 136 4 138 4 138 4 138 5 1 5 3 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 5 5 7 5 8 5 10 5 10 5 12 5 12 5 14 5 14 5 14 5 15 Chapter 6 System V Printer Configuration lulleeeeeeeeeeeee Understanding the Print Service 0 cece cece eee ees Overview of Print Request Processing 660ce cece cece eee eae Print Request Log 0c eee ee eee enn Print Service Command Line
348. ns amp cpsize sizeof long write ftrans amp rsvl sizeof long write ftrans amp rsv2 sizeof long write ftrans table sizeof table return 0 Printer Attachment Files Attachment files provide a simple interface for developers of printer attachments to create System Management Interface Tool SMIT screens that support new printer attachments To learn more about attachment files see e Using the SMIT Interface for Printer Attachment Files on page 4 38 e Attachment File Naming Conventions on page 4 39 e Structure of Attachment Files on page 4 39 e Attachment File Field Definitions on page 4 40 Each new attachment type is defined in an attachment file The attachment file contains the name of SMIT object IDs used to perform various printing tasks The name of an attachment type is limited to 10 characters Using the SMIT Interface for Printer Attachment Files Attachment files direct the branching from SMIT menus to SMIT object IDs Every attachment file controls the branching from some or all of these SMIT menu options e Start a Print Job e Adda Print Queue e Add an Additional Printer to an Existing Queue e Change Show Print Queue Characteristics 4 38 Guide to Printers and Printing e Change Show Printer Connection Characteristics e Remove a Print Queue e Pre Processing Filters For example when the Add a Print Queue menu option is selected from a SMIT dialog screen the first informati
349. nt job and jim at node server02 should receive intervention messages The first character for a system administration attribute is s Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 5 Some typical _ SYS attributes for a supported PostScript laser printer are _SYS OTHER VALUES OF INTEREST TO THE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR sh Pipeline for Header Pag Ide pioburst SF H Idb H p s Ide piofo rmat G Idd I mm Idf piof pt amp j si Users Separated by Commas to Get Intervention Messages Null String Is Job Submitter sp Command Line Flags Prohibited For All d values Ignored cmnrBDMPRT st Pipeline for Trailer Page SIde pioburst SF H Idb T p s Ide piofo rmat G Idd I mm Idf piof pt amp j Sw Width of Attribute Value Area On Header Pag 78 0 means ignore width These same attribute values would be stored in the printer colon file as 060 OYos 321 sh Ide pioburst F H Idb H ps Ide pioformat G8 Idd Imm I Idf piofpt f j 2322 Sig 323 spi 324 st Ide pioburst F H Idb T ps Ide pioformat Idd Imm I Idf piofpt f j 325 sw i 78 Input Data Stream Attributes 4 6 The _ IDS group header attribute heads the list of attributes that store pipelines for different input data streams Some of the attributes in this group are the ia attribute that stores the extended ASCII input data stream pipeline and the is attribute that stores the PostScript
350. nter XL24E IBM 4208 Model 502 Proprinter XL24EK IBM 4212 Proprinter 24P IBM 4216 Model 510 IBM 4216 510 IBM 5327 011 IBM 4224 Printer Models 301 302 3C2 3E3 IBM 4226 Printer IBM 4234 Dot Band printer Model 013 IBM 5202 Quietwriter III IBM 5204Quickwriter IBM 4216 510 IBM 5327 011 IBM 5572 Model B02 IBM 5573 Model H02 IBM 5575 Model B02 F02 H02 IBM 5577 Model B02 F02 FU2 G02 H02 J02 K02 IBM B02 F02 H02 IBM B02 F02 FU2 G02 H02 J02 K02 IBM 5579 Model H02 K02 IBM 5584 Model G02 H01 IBM 5585 Model H01 IBM 5587 Model G02 H01 IBM 5589 Model H01 IBM Network Printer 12 IBM Network Printer 17 IBM Network Printer 24 IBM 5584 G02 H02 IBM 5585 H01 IBM 5587 G01 H01 IBM 5589 H01 IBM 6180 Color Plotter Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 115 e IBM 6182 Auto Feed Color Plotter e IBM 6184 Color Plotter e IBM 6185 1 Color Plotter e IBM 6185 2 Color Plotter e IBM 6186 Color Plotter e IBM 6252 Impactwriter e IBM 6252 Printer e IBM 7372 Color Plotter e Network Color Printer e IBM InfoPrint 20 e BM InfoPrint 40 Printer e Lexmark Opira Laser Printer e Lexmark Optra Plus Laser Printer e Lexmark Optra Plus Laser Printer e Lexmark Optra C Color Laser Printer e Lexmark Optra E Laser Printer e Lexmark Optra E310 Laser Printer e Lexmark Optra M410 Laser Printer e Lexmark Optra N Laser Printer e Lexmark Optra Se Laser Printer e Lexmark Optra T Laser Printer Family e Lexmark
351. nters need even less than that You can check items defined for a specific terminfo entry by typing the following command infocmp terminfo name Adding a Printer Entry to the terminfo Database To create a terminfo entry for your printer do the following 1 Identify an entry in the usr lib terminfo terminfo Ip file that uses the same commands as the printer you are adding and copy that information to filename where filename is the file containing the terminfo entry you created for the printer 2 Use the information in the manual for your printer the terminfo Entry Definitions for Printers on page 6 13 and terminfo to modify the entry in filename 3 After you create the new entry compile it into the database as follows tic filename After adding or deleting terminfo entries or changing values that govern pitch settings page width and length or character sets stop and restart the print service terminfo Entry Definitions for Printers Following are the print service terminfo entries and their definitions terminfo entry Description Booleans daisy Printer needs operator to change character set Numbers bufsz Number of bytes buffered before printing cols Number of columns in a line it Tabs initially every spaces lines Number of lines on a page orc Horizontal resolution in units per character orhi Horizontal resolution in units per inch System V Printer Configuration 6 13 6 14 orl orvi cps Strings
352. nting of header and trailer pages are separate processes from the spooler print jobs they accompany even though they are not shown in the output of queue status queries Header and Trailer Page Pipelines Below is the sh attribute used to define the pipeline for header page generation and printing for an extended ASCII queue on an IBM 4029 LaserPrinter The attribute is shown as formatted by the Isvirprt command See Viewing Formatting or Modifying Virtual Printer Definitions on page 4 121 for a further explanation Pipeline for Header Pag sh Ide pioburst F H Idb H ascii Ide pioformat Q 1dd SImm 1df piof52 02 L J ISsH u IuH Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 129 SIde INCLUDE Directory Containing Miscellaneous Modules pioburst F H If H Argument on Command Line Argument gt OUTPUT SIdb INCLUDE Directory Containing Header and Trailer Text Files H ascii Ide INCLUDE Directory Containing Miscellaneous Modules pioformat Q Idd INCLUDE Directory Containing Digested Data Base Files yt Imm INCLUDE File Name Of Digested Data Base Init By piodigest mt md mn mq mv s Idf INCLUDE Directory Containing Loadable Formatter Routines piof5202 L J SIsH INCLUDE FORMATTING FLAGS for header page u SIuH INCLUDE Input PAPER TRAY for header page During spooler job processing the
353. number To turn this into a specific example suppose that you have an IBM 4029 LaserPrinter that you want to attach to port 11 on the terminal server and that the terminal server s IP address is 9 19 129 101 Your goal is have a queue on a print server to which users can submit ASCII jobs and have them printed on the 4029 on the terminal server Though you can use ts print from the command line you would prefer to make use of the formatter filter s ability to perform extensive manipulation of both the printer s mode and the input data stream Providing true serial access to the printer is also a goal There is more than one way to accomplish this goal The easiest way involves making a local ASCII queue on a normal file instead of on a character special file in the dev directory After you create the queue and the associated virtual printer you can modify the virtual printer to use ts print To begin the queue creation process type the SMIT fast path smit mkquedev A menu similar to the following displays Add a Print Queue Move cursor to desired item and press Enter Use arrow keys to scroll ATTACHMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION local Printer Attached to Local Host remote Printer Attached to Remote Host ascii Printer Attached to ASCII Terminal hpJetDirect Network Printer HP JetDirect file File in dev directory other User Defined Backend Choose the file option then choose a printer type After you choose the IB
354. number of copies to skip the print service default handling of multiple copies Task 3 Detecting Printer Faults Just as converting a file and handling special printing modes is a printer specific role so is detecting printer faults The print service attempts to detect faults in general and for most printers it can do so correctly The range of faults that the print service can detect by itself however is limited It can check for hang ups loss of carrier the signal that indicates the printer is online and excessive delays in printing receipt of an XOFF flow control character to shut off the data flow with no matching XON to turn the flow back on However the print service cannot determine the cause of a fault so it cannot inform you what to look for A well designed filter can provide better fault coverage Some printers are able to send a message to the host describing the reason for a fault Others indicate a fault by using System V Printer Configuration 6 19 signals other than the dropping of a carrier or the shutting off of data flow A filter can serve you by detecting more faults and providing more information about them than you would otherwise receive A filter can wait for a printer fault to clear and then resume printing This service allows for more efficient printing when a fault occurs because the print request that was interrupted does not have to be reprinted in its entirety Only a real filter which has knowledge
355. ny types of jobs It is the responsibility of the system administrator to ensure that the backend for a given queue is capable of processing any job submitted to that queue Printer job types include e ASCII e Postscript e PCL e HPGL e GL e Diablo 630 e ditroff Generic Base Operating System Spooler The base operating system spooler is not specifically a print job spooler but a generic spooling system that can be used for queuing various types of jobs including print jobs queued to a printer queue The spooler does not know what type of job it is queuing When a queue is created the function of the queue is defined by the spooler backend for that queue For example if a queue is created and the queue backend is set up to be piobe the default printer I O backend for local printer queues the queue is a print queue Likewise if the queue backend is set up to be cc or any other compiler the queue is for compiler jobs When the spooler s qdaemon component selects a job from a queue it processes the job by invoking the queue s backend This section views the spooler as a generic spooling system with an entry point an exit point and points in between Jobs submitted to the spooler enter the system job submission travel along a predictable path from point to point job processing and then exit the system job delivery and cleanup Understanding the flow of the job through the system is crucial to both configuring queues to
356. o complete the steps for adding a remote host use the menus or provide additional information as prompted For detailed information or assistance see the online help You can also perform this task with the following command ruser a p HostName OR you can use the following SMIT fastpath smit mkhostslpd Deleting a Remote Host 1 At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers 2 In the Web based System Manager Printer Queues window select the host you want to delete 3 To complete the steps for deleting a remote host use the menus or provide additional information as prompted Printers Print Jobs and Queues for Systems Administrators 2 33 For detailed information or assistance see the online help You can also perform this task with the following command ruser d p HostName OR you can use the following SMIT fast path smit rmhostslpd Using the Ipd Remote Subsystem Prerequisites e Your system must be configured to communicate with a remote print server See Using Remote Host Access for Printing on page 2 33 e To start or stop the Ipd remote subsystem you must have root authority Starting the Ipd Remote Subsystem 1 With root authority at the system prompt type wsm then select Printers 2 In the Printer Queues window select Overview amp Tasks 3 From the Printer menu select Start Remote Print Server Ipd For detailed information or assistance see the online help You can also perform t
357. ob specify the Q flag with the qprt command If you need support for Greek or Turkish characters complete the following steps 1 You must have a Language Group 3 font diskette installed in the printer Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 51 2 As the root user type smit chpq 3 Select the appropriate print queue and select Printer Setup on the Change Show Characteristics menu For the font diskette specify CP851 to print Greek characters CP853 to print Turkish characters IBM 3816 Page Printer The system assumes that a font diskette Feature 7652 is in the printer s diskette drive Fonts are loaded into printer memory from a font diskette inside the printer The system maintains a record of which fonts have been loaded and whether the fonts in memory may have been corrupted by a print job and therefore need reloading from diskette If the printer is turned off and then turned back on run the splp command with the F flag and the device name This notifies the system that the fonts need to be loaded into the printer s memory The 3816 Page Printer can print on paper other than the default 8 1 2 by 11 inch size The paper size can be changed using SMIT This is described in Specifying Paper Size on page 2 25 To change paper size for a single print job specify the Q flag with the qprt command IBM 4019 LaserPrinter and 4029 LaserPrinter 4 52 The system selects the IBM ASCII or P
358. obe Uses Printer Colon Files The piobe command is a spooler backend program called by the qdaemon program to process a print job It has the ability to generate diagnostic output A specific example of this diagnostic output is used in the following discussion to examine these points e How piobe uses printer colon files e How printer colon file escape sequences are evaluated to resolve path names e How printer colon file escape sequences are evaluated to resolve page length e How printer colon file escape sequences are evaluated to resolve page width This discussion is intended for readers who need to understand printer colon file escape sequences at a low level perhaps because they want to write their own colon file for a unique and unsupported printer Before reading this discussion you should be familiar with these topics e Printer Colon File Escape Sequences on page 4 13 e Viewing Formatting or Modifying Virtual Printer Definitions on page 4 121 The following command uses the a1 flag argument to request diagnostic data from the piobe backend The remainder of the command specifies that the job be processed by the queue named asc that three copies of the file named etc motd be printed in a 12 point Courier font rotated 90 degrees that the job be pre processed by the pr filter and that any messages generated by the job should be mailed to the user that submitted the job qprt al Pasc fp zl p12 scourier C N3 etc mo
359. ocal Printer Checklist on page 5 2 Inoperative Printer Checklist on page 5 3 Remote Printer Checklist on page 5 3 Adapter Considerations on page 5 4 Printing Problems When the var File System is Full on page 5 4 Terminal Attached Printer Checklist on page 5 9 Considerations for 8 Bit Printer Attached to 7 Bit Interface on page 5 10 qdaemon Checklist on page 5 10 Queuing System Problems on page 5 12 Testing the qdaemon on page 5 12 Testing a Spooler Queue on page 5 14 Copying Spooled Jobs on page 5 14 Cleaning Up and Starting Over on page 5 14 Troubleshooting the base operating system spooler can be done by tracking a spooler job through the spooler A job submitted to the base operating system spooler moves from one spooler component to another in a predictable fashion The movement is entirely dependent upon the spooler queue configuration especially the spooler queue backend Note To perform serious spooler troubleshooting root authority is required Users running without root authority are limited to Submitting jobs to the spooler Sending data directly to the device driver entry point in the dev directory Querying the status of spooler queues Changing the status including cancelling of spooler jobs owned by the user Note This troubleshooting information assumes that you have access to a shell prompt There are a number of front ends to the base operating system spooler itself on the market troubleshooting in this env
360. ocess the input data stream line by line In either case the printer device driver was opened for writing in pass through mode and performs no processing on the output data stream Note that input data streams such as PostScript are pass through by definition the processing is performed by the Postscript interpreter hardware on the printer Most of the printer device driver parameters that one can display or modify using the splp command also exist in the formatter filter These parameters are stored in the digested version of the colon file for a given virtual printer For example the mapping between the printer device driver parameters and the corresponding parameters in the colon files for an ASCII queue on an IBM 4029 LaserPrinter is as follows Een p ER Id end carriage eturns DUE rtn after inefeed suppress tab expansion The values of the parameters in the righthand column can be permanently set in the virtual printer definition They can also be overridden at the time a job is submitted by using certain flags on either the qprt or enq commands 4 120 Guide to Printers and Printing Viewing Formatting or Modifying Virtual Printer Definitions An IBM 4029 LaserPrinter supports four distinct data streams The root user can use the mkvirprt command to create both a queue and a virtual printer definition for each of the four data stream types The root user can further use the Isvirprt command to view and modif
361. of the control sequences used by a printer can know where a file breaks into pages Thus only such a filter can find the place in the file where printing should resume The print service has an interface that allows a filter to send you fault information and to restart printing if it can The alerting mechanism see Setting Up Printer Fault Alerts on page 6 38 is handled by the print service the interface program that manages the filter takes all error messages from the filter and places them in an alert message that can be sent to you If you have set the printer configuration so that printing should automatically resume after a fault is cleared the interface program keeps the filter active so that printing can pick up where it left off What Programs Make Good Filters It is tempting to use a program such as troff nroff or a similar word processing program as a filter However the troff and nroff programs have a feature that allows references to be made in a source file to other files known as include files The print service does not recognize include files it will not enqueue any that are referenced by a source file when that file is in a queue to be printed As a result the troff or nroff program unable to access the include files may fail Other programs may have similar features that limit their use as filters Here are a few guidelines for evaluating a program for use as a filter e Only programs capable of reading data from st
362. ommand The full path of the filter program If there are any fixed options that the program always needs include them here e Inputtypes The list of file content types that the filter can process The print service does not impose a limit on the number of input types that can be accepted by a filter but most filters can take only one Several file types may be similar enough so that the filter can handle them You can use any name having a maximum of 14 alphanumeric characters and dashes not underscores Because the print service uses these names to match a filter with a file type follow a consistent naming convention For example if more than one filter can accept the same input type use the same name for that input type when you specify it for each filter Advise your users of the names so they know how to identify the type of a file when submitting that file for printing e Outputtypes The list of file types that the filter can produce as output For each input type the filter produces a single output type The output type may vary however from job to job The names of the output types are restricted to 14 alphanumeric characters and dashes These names should either match the types of printers you have on your system or match the input types handled by other filters The print service groups filters together in a shell pipeline if it finds that several passes by different filters are needed to convert a System V Printer Configura
363. on is desired The default is or not The main advantages of using the W and S options are to conserve printer subsystem usage and allow the printer to handle multiple copies instead of sending copies to the printer Using the S options with W also allows copies of each page in a row if that is desired Note that using N and W simultaneously is allowed This would result in N print jobs with W copies of each page in each job The E flag controls separator pages The valid values are 0 1 2 and 3 which represent NONE BETWEENCOPIES BETWEENJOBS and BETWEENPAGES respectively The paper source for separator pages is set via the colon file attribute uS and defaults to TRAY 1 The valid values for uS are the same as uH and uT except manual feed is not a valid source for separator pages To change the default the uS attribute must be changed in the virtual printer to one of the valid values see the Paper Source information for this printer Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 77 Lexmark Optra Color 40 Printer 4 78 Paper Source Paper Size Guide to Printers and Printing Paper source selection is supported for both the PCL 5 emulation and the PostScript Language by using the u flag of the qprt command ur anual feed utiay 1 Paper size selection is supported by using the qprt command flags O and Q The O flag controls paper versus envelope A O value of 3 indicat
364. on of available queues and devices Both the enq command and the qdaemon command refer to the configuration file This configuration file is considered as conceptually important as the other three spooler parts due to its critical value to the correct operation of the base operating System spooler as a whole Spooler Data Flow Commands and Backend Four commands can be used to submit a job to the base operating system spooler These are Ip Ipr qprt and enq Each of these commands has a specific UNIX origin Ip originated with AT amp T System V Ipr originated with BSD and both qprt and enq originated with the base operating system While a user can use any one of these four commands to submit a job to the spooler the true entry point to the spooler is the enq command All of Ip Ipr and qprt are front ends to enq Ip Ipr and qprt all parse their arguments and compose a call to enq The front ends differ from one another in the way each one behaves and in the number and types of flags each one accepts When a job is submitted to the spooler enq processes the job request If the job request is valid which basically means that the command syntax was correct the job is placed upon a queue enq creates a job description file JDF and notifies the qdaemon of the existence of the new JDF The qdaemon reads each new JDF and reads the job parameters specified by the JDF into an internal data structure that it maintains to track job requests T
365. on required from the user is which attachment type is being used The user selects the desired attachment type and SMIT searches the attachment type file to discover which SMIT object ID file to branch to SMIT selectors and dialogs for new printer attachments must create dialogs that add change and remove a print queue for the new attachment type The names of the new SMIT dialogs are placed in the attachment file The dialog names in the file are automatically branched to when creating changing or removing queues for the new attachment type Attachment File Naming Conventions Attachment files must be named according to the following naming convention Attachment type attach The Attachment type string must contain a unique string that identifies the attachment All attachment files must be located in the usr lib Ipd pio etc directory The following attachment files are supplied local attach Contains the local system attached printers file ascii attach Contains ASCII terminal attached printers file file attach Contains the output to file attachment file remote attach Contains the remote print queues attachment file Structure of Attachment Files Attachment files are ASCII files Each line in an attachment file defines a field using the following format FieldName Valu The following field names have special meanings in the attachment file e description seg num supported unsupported The following fiel
366. on the command line and its value was greater than 2 then return a 4 For example if the user specified manual paper handling and also specified an input paper source of envelope then return a 4 to the evaluation of lwQ The definition of wQ is an if then else then else then else then else statement that repeatedly compares the value of Wu to the integers 0 1 2 and 3 looking for a match The match selects the value of one of the attriubes s0 s1 s2 s3 or s4 respectively s4 is selected when there is no other match The items these attributes define are as follows e SO paper size for manual paper feed e S1 paper size for tray 1 upper e S2 paper size for tray 2 lower e S3 envelope size for envelope feeder e s4 envelope size for manual envelope size In the virtual printer definition for an ASCII queue on an IBM 4029 LaserPrinter there are only two unique values for these five attributes sO s1 and s2 are all 1 while s3 and s4 are both 3 Looking back up the nested escape sequences you can see that the definition of wK is composed of an outer if then else statement Both the if and the else pieces of this statement contain a chain of if then else then else statements The value of Wu which is a value for paper source based on O and u determines whether the if or the else piece of the outer statement executes if Wu is 1 or 2 less than 3 then the if piece executes otherwise the else piece executes It is
367. one line for any filter characteristic other than Options only the last definition will be used by the print service After you have registered this definition with the print service by entering it as input with the Ipfilter command users print requests will be handled as follows e If auser enters the command lp y expand report dec10 the filter command will run with the following arguments usr bin col x p f e lfauser enters the command lp T N37 y expand report decl10 the filter command will run with the following arguments usr bin col x Qualifier The default printer is not of type 450 e fauser enters the command lp y expand T 450 report dec10 the filter command will be run with the following arguments usr bin col b x Example dpost Filter The filter program is called usr lib Ip postscript dpost It takes one input type troff produces an output type called postscript and works with any printer of type PS for PostScript You have decided that your users need give just the abbreviations port and land when they ask for the paper orientation to be portrait mode and landscape mode respectively Because these options are not intrinsic to the print service users must specify them using the y option to the Ip command The filter definition would look like this Input types troff Output types postscript Printer types PS Filter type slow Command usr lib lp postscript dpost Options LENGTH 1
368. one of the following commands usr sbin lpadmin p printer name A mail W minutes usr sbin lpadmin p printer nam A writ W minutes usr sbin lpadmin p printer name A command W minutes The first two commands direct the print service to send you a mail message or write the message directly to your terminal respectively for each alert The third command directs the print service to run the command for each alert The shell environment currently in effect when you enter the third command is saved and restored for the execution of command The environment includes environment variables user and group IDs and current directory The minutes argument is the number of minutes between repeated alerts If you do not want the print service to issue an alert when a fault occurs type the following usr sbin lpadmin p printer nam A non If you want mail sent or a message written to another user when a printer fault occurs use the third command with the option A mail ogin ID or A write login ID If you do not specify a login ID the mail or message will be sent to your current login name This may not be your login if you have used the su command to change it After a fault occurs and you start receiving repeated alerts you can direct the print service to stop sending you alerts for the current fault only by running the following command usr sbin lpadmin p printer nam A quiet Note Use the alert type of qui
369. ore some or all of the default set of filters to their original form after having changed them type this command usr sbin lpfilter f filter name i Replace filter name with the name of the filter to restore or the word all to restore all the default filters Printer Types The printer type attribute is defined with the T printer type option of the Ipadmin command A printer type is the generic name for a printer Typically it is derived from the manufacturer name For example the ACME Computer 356 Dot Matrix Printer might have 6 26 Guide to Printers and Printing the type 356 Assigning a type for each printer is important because the print software extracts information about printers from the terminfo database on the basis of type This information includes a list of the printer capabilities that checks the configuration information you supply to the print service By checking the information you provide against the known capabilities of the type of printer you are configuring the print service can catch inappropriate information you may have supplied The terminfo database also specifies the control data needed to initialize a particular printer before printing a file While you are not required to specify a printer type it is good practice to do so You enhance your system s ability to serve your users by classifying on the basis of type the printers available through the print service If you give a list of printer ty
370. ot You must tell the system about the font cartridge in any of the following instances e Plug in a font cartridge that includes a font in Code Page 850 e Print using the font 4 54 Guide to Printers and Printing e Print characters unique to Code Page 850 European characters To tell the system about the font cartridge 1 Type the SMIT fast path smit chpq 2 Select the appropriate print queue and select Printer Setup on the Change Show Characteristics menu 3 Specify yes for the CODE PAGE 850 attribute IBM 5204 Quickwriter If a font cartridge is installed to support Greek or Turkish 1 Type smit chpq as the root user 2 Select the appropriate print queue and select Printer Setup on the Change Show Characteristics menu 3 Specify font cartridge part number for the Font Cartridge attribute Supported values are 1301598 Greek and 1301614 Turkish IBM 5575 B02 F02 H02 and IBM 5577 B02 F02 FU2 G02 H02 J02 K 02 To print Japanese characters specify 24x24 dot font with the F option on the qprt command as follows qprt Pkji F usr lib X11 fonts JP IBM JPN17 pcf Z file IBM 5584 G02 H02 IBM 5585 H01 IBM 5587 G01 H01 and IBM 5589 H01 To print Japanese characters specify 24x24 dot font with the F option on the qprt command as follows qprt Pkji F usr lib X11 fonts JP IBM JPN17 pcf Z file IBM 6252 Impactwriter and IBM 6252 Printer If the active code page for the installed print band is not
371. ote host adding 2 33 removing 2 33 remote print server 5 4 remote printer checklist 5 3 managing 2 31 remote printers 1 3 remote printing overview 2 29 remote host access 2 33 rm command 5 5 RS 232 adapter printer considerations 5 4 S SMIT printer paper size specifying for F0 2 25 specifying for Hewlett Packard printers 5 printing control of 1 4 SMIT System Management Interface Tool interface to printer attachment files 4 38 sm cmd obj object class used with printer files 4 42 smit command 1 7 smit mount command 5 8 split command 5 7 spooler 2 3 3 1 configuration file etc qconfig file structure 3 12 data flow 3 5 parts 3 4 queues 3 13 terminology 3 1 spooling directory mounting more space 5 8 setting permissions 5 8 working with files 5 8 startsrc command 5 4 T terminal attached printer checklist 5 9 terminal attached printing 2 15 2 17 2 21 hardware supported 2 15 nonsupported terminals 2 19 using a modem 2 19 terminfo database 2 19 TI printers 4 112 translation tables example 4 38 multibyte code sets 4 36 troubleshooting printer 5 1 V virtual printers 3 10 attributes described 4 3 W Web based System Manager 1 11 2 1 2 2 Index X 3 X 4 AIX 5L Version 5 1 Guide to Printers and Printing Vos remarques sur ce document Technical publication remark form Titre Title Bull AIX 5L Guide to Printers and Printing N Ref renc
372. outine 03 An integer value indicating how the printer is attached O Neither parallel nor serial 1 parallel 2 serial 94 The full path name of the pio directory whose subdirectories burst etc fmtrs fonts predef trans1 and trans2 contain STATIC data files and utility programs used to configure virtual printers and process print jobs The directory must be a subdirectory of the directory containing the piobe command invoked by the qdaemon The value for 4 is normally the usr lib Ipd pio directory 95 The full path name of the pio directory whose subdirectories custom ddi dev and flags contain DYNAMIC data files used to configure virtual printers and process print jobs The value for 5 is normally the var spool Ipd pio directory The following attribute names are used for communicating from the piobe command the print job manager to the pioout command the device driver interface program The attribute values are referenced by flag arguments passed to the device driver interface program as specified in the pipelines Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 21 A Number of bytes already printed B Total number of bytes to print C Number of times to send the cancel string D to the printer at print job cancel D String to send to the printer if the print job is canceled l User to which to send intervention required messages O Name of file to be generated by the pioout command in which to
373. p etc motd Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 135 These are the arguments qprt tried to pass to enq You see them because qprt found echo instead of enq The following command is equivalent to the command shown in step 2 above enq P asc o f o p etc motd The o option specifies that flags specific to the backend should be passed to the backend The o option can be thought of as a free pass through the syntax checking that occurs before the enq command builds a job description file and notifies the qdaemon of the existence of a new job Suppose that you want to set up a queue that will print a range of lines from an ASCII file For instance suppose you read usr Ipp bos README and find 35 lines that you want to print so you can fax them to someone or tack them to your wall for reference You could edit etc qconfig and add the following lines partial device partial partial file FALSE backend usr bin partial The file usr bin partial could be a shell script with ownership of root printq and with permissions of 755 Its contents could be as follows bin ksh BEGIN 1 END 2 let DIFF END BEGIN 1 FILE 3 usr bin head S END FILE tail DIFF usr bin qprt Pasc If you wanted to print lines 189 through 223 of usr Ipp bos README you could use the partial queue as follows qprt Ppartial o 189 o 223 usr lpp bos README When the backend e
374. p table on your system your users will be able to have a Palatino Bold font used in their print jobs When they submit for printing a file containing a request for this font the print service will prefix a copy of the file System V Printer Configuration 6 35 usr share lib hostfontdir to that file before sending it to the printer as long as it is not defined in the residentfonts file 3 If you will be using troff you must create new width tables for this font in the standard troff font directory Downloading Host Resident Fonts When the PostScript document contains a request for fonts not loaded on the printer the download filter manages this request This filter is invoked as a fast filter it downloads fonts automatically if the fonts reside on the same system as the printer The download filter may also send fonts to a remote printer To do this you can create a new filter table entry that calls the download filter as a slow filter through the y option Alternatively you may force selection of this filter by changing the input type The download filter does the following e It searches the PostScript document to determine which fonts have been requested These requests are documented with the following PostScript structuring comments DocumentFonts fonti font2 in the header comments e tsearches the list of fonts resident on that printer in letc Ip printers printer name residentfonts to see if the requested font m
375. parator is the ASCII TAB character Indents each line by the number of character positions specified by the Offset variable The total number of character positions per line is the sum of the width and offset The default value of Offset is 0 Separates columns by the single character specified by the Character variable instead of by the appropriate number of spaces The default value for Character is an ASCII TAB character Does not display the five line identifying header and the five line footer Stops after the last line of each file without spacing to the end of the page Sets the number of column positions per line to the value specified by the Width variable The default value is 72 for equal width multicolumn output There is no limit otherwise If the w flag is not specified and the s flag is specified the default width is 512 column positions Sets the number of columns to the value specified by the Column variable The default value is 1 This option should not be used with the m flag The e and i flags are assumed for multicolumn output A text column should never exceed the length of the page see the 1 flag When this flag is used with the t flag use the minimum number of lines to write the output Begins the display with the page number specified by the Page variable The default value is 1 The following is a list of examples of how pr command flags can be used To print a file named prog c with head
376. pes separate the names with commas If you do not define a printer type the default unknown is used You can assign several types to a printer if your printer is capable of emulating more than one kind of printer For example if your printer can emulate an IBM Proprinter XL an Epson FX86e and an HP LaserJet Il the terminfo database names these types 593ibm 593eps and 593hp respectively If you specify more than one printer type the print service uses one of them as appropriate for each print request The following example shows how to use the Ipadmin command to associate the type 593ibm with the printer named laser usr sbin lpadmin p laser T 593ibm Note If you specify more than one printer type you must specify simple as the content type Content Types The content type attribute is defined with the I content type list option of the Ipadmin command Most printers can print files of two types the same type as the printer type if the printer type is defined and the type simple meaning an ASCII file which is the default content type for all printers Files of content type simple are assumed to contain only two types of characters printable ASCII characters and the following control characters backspace Moves the carriage back one space except at the beginning of a line tab Moves the carriage to the next tab stop by default stops are spaced every 8 columns on most printers linefeed Moves the carriage to the beginn
377. pport the features of the nonsupported printer and the print spooling subsystem 1 You must identify the printer data stream that best matches your printer to customize a nonsupported printer The operating system supports the following data streams through predefined virtual printers asc Extended ASCII pel Hewlett Packard LaserJet gl Plotter ps PostScript 630 Diablo 630 855 Texas Instruments 855 dot matrix printer in dp mode 2 Once you have identified the data stream used by your printer choose either a supported printer that uses the same data stream or one of the generic printers and customize the definition for your printer Printers Print Jobs and Queues for Systems Administrators 2 13 Wiring Nonsupported Printers You may need to adapt your nonsupported printer so that it functions properly with the base operating system serial printer device driver 1 The following chart details what the RS 232 signals mean to the serial printer device driver RS 232 Signal FG TxD RxD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR LP lt EM Serial Printer Device Driver Use Frame ground Often used as shield Used to transmit data to printer Used to Receive data from printer Held high after printer port opened Provides host status to printer Not used for data pacing Must be high for printer port to be opened Used to detect that the printer is turned on Not used Usually tied to DCD Reference voltage for sign
378. print service Ipshut Stops the print service Ipsystem Registers remote systems with the print service Sets or changes the default priority and priority limits that the users of the print service can request The accept reject cancel enable disable and Ipadmin commands can also be run from the Web based System Manager interface To run these commands start Web based System Manager then select the Printers plug in from the Contents Area System V Printer Configuration 6 5 Customizing Printer Configuration Although the print service is flexible enough to handle most printers and printing needs you might require features that the standard print service does not accommodate You can customize the print service by e Setting Default Printer Page Size and Spacing on page 6 6 e Configuring Banners on page 6 7 e Administering the etc Ip Systems File on page 6 7 e Printer Models File on page 6 8 e Creating Printer Interface Scripts on page 6 10 e Using the terminfo Database on page 6 13 e Creating a Printer Form on page 6 15 e Adding a Form to the Print Service on page 6 15 e Removing a Form on page 6 15 e Restricting User Access to Forms on page 6 15 e Mounting a Form on page 6 16 e Unmounting a Form on page 6 17 e Examining a Form on page 6 17 Setting Default Printer Page Size and Spacing When a user submits a request to print a file the page size character pitch and line pitch spacing are normally determined fro
379. print service assumes that all users may use the form Mounting a Form 6 16 Before the print service starts printing files that need a preprinted form you must mount the form on a printer If alerting has been set on the form you will be alerted when enough print requests are queued waiting for the form to be mounted see Alerting to Mount Forms and Font Cartridges on page 6 40 for information on alerting Mounting a form involves loading it onto the printer and then informing the print service that it is mounted It is sound practice to disable the printer first Until you have mounted a form on a printer only print requests that do not require the form will be sent to the printer Use the following procedure to inform the print service that the form is mounted 1 Disable the printer 2 Load the new form onto the printer 3 Run the following command to mount a form usr sbin lpadmin p printer nam M f form nam a o filebreak 4 Re enable the printer If an alignment pattern has been registered with the form you can ask that this be repeatedly printed after you have mounted the form until you have adjusted the printer so that the alignment pattern looks correct Guide to Printers and Printing The o filebreak option tells the print service to add a form feed after each copy of the alignment pattern if there is one You must press the return key before each copy of the alignment pattern is printed The actual
380. printer resident fonts to a printer s font list do the following 1 Navigate to the printer administration directory in which the font lists are kept For a particular printer this font list is contained in the file etc lp printers printer nam residentfonts where printer name is the name of the printer With the p option download checks this file to see what Type 1 fonts are ROM resident and disk resident some PostScript printers have directly attached fonts disks in the printer so that it does not download such fonts 2 This file is not automatically created when a PostScript printer is first set up on your system using the Ipadmin command You may need to create this file yourself Font list files must be edited manually that is with the help of a text editor such as vi When fonts are permanently downloaded to the printer add the font names to this file This will prevent fonts from being downloaded when they are already on the printer a time consuming procedure Note If the printer is attached to a remote system this list should include fonts which reside on that system and are available for downloading to the printer This prevents fonts from being transmitted unnecessarily across a network Installing and Maintaining Host Resident Fonts Some fonts will be resident on the host and transmitted to the printer as needed for particular print requests As the administrator it is your job to make PostScript fonts a
381. printer nam o length scaled number usr sbin lpadmin p printer nam o cpi scaled number usr sbin lpadmin p printer_nam o lpi scaled number Note The Ipadmin command uses the printer type to determine whether the settings are possible for the printer Therefore you must first set the printer type before you can specify these defaults For example to specify a page width of 11 inches a page length of 14 inches character pitch to compressed and line pitch of 3 lines per inch for the printer barney type usr sbin lpadmin p barney o width 11i usr sbin lpadmin p barney o length 14i usr sbin lpadmin p barney o cpi compressed usr sbin lpadmin p barney o lpi 3 If you do not provide defaults the page size and print spacing are set to those available when the printer is initialized You can determine what the defaults are by first defining the printer configuration without providing your own defaults then using the Ipstat command to display the printer configuration To display the default page size and print spacing type lpstat p printer name Information similar to the following displays Default pitch compressed CPI 3 LPI Default page size Default page size 111 wide 141 long If you do not set the defaults the Ipstat command reports defaults from the terminfo database entry for the printer Configuring Banners A banner is a page describing the print request for example printer name user
382. printer types For example to exclude the ibm6252 ibm6262 and ibm4029 printers from the list of supported printers enter unsupported ibm6252 ibm6262 ibm4029 To show the hp1 4 3 hp1j 3 si and hp1j 2 printers on the list of available printer types type supported hplj 3 hplj 3 si hplj 2 Specifies the name of the SMIT selector ID to branch to in order to start a print job If this field is missing the enq dialog value is used For example to branch to the term ser start job selector from the Start a Print Job menu option if the queue selected is of the term serv attachment type type submit job term serv start job Specifies the name of the SMIT selector ID to branch to in order to add a print queue For example to branch to the term serv add selector ID from the Add a Print Queue menu option type add queue term serv add Specifies the name of the SMIT selector ID to branch to in order to add a printer to an existing queue Functionally this adds an additional queue device to an existing queue To branch to the term serv printer selector ID from the SMIT Existing Print Queue menu option type add printer term serv printer Specifies the name of the SMIT selector ID to branch to in order to remove a print queue The Remove dialog screen removes any other queues queue devices virtual printers and printer devices that were created at the time the print queue was created To branch from the Remove a P
383. printing If the same content type is printable by several different types of printers use the same content type names when you add those printers This makes it easier for the people using the printers because they can use the same name to identify the type of file they want printed regardless of the printing destination Most manufacturers produce printers that accept simple ASCII files While these printers are different types and thus have different initialization control sequences they may all be capable of handling the same type of file which we call simple Several manufacturers may produce printers that accept ANSI X3 64 defined escape sequences However the printers may not support all the ANSI capabilities they may support different sets of capabilities You may want to differentiate them by assigning different content type names for these printers Guide to Printers and Printing Default Content Type While it may be desirable to list content types for each printer it is not always necessary If you do not the printer type is used as the name of the content type the printer can handle If you have not specified a printer type the print service assumes the printer can print only files of content type simple This may be sufficient if you require users to specify the correct printer explicitly and if files are correctly prepared for the printer before being submitted for printing PostScript Printers PostScript is a general purpo
384. prt command The O flag controls paper versus envelope A O value of 3 indicates a paper size and 4 an envelope size Paper Sizes 0 3 Envelope Sizes 0 4 Q 1 Letter 7 3 4 Monarch Q 2 Legal 9 Com 9 Q3 B5 10 Com 10 Q 4 A4 DL Q 5 Executive C5 Q 6 A5 B5 Envelope Q7 Other Envelope MPT only To change the defaults change the s1 s3 attribute values in the lexOptraE310 pcl colon file The default for paper size is 1 or letter and the default for envelopes is 3 or Com 10 The letter value is the else part e1 of the s1 and s3 attributes and the envelope is the then part t3 The Optra E310 printer supports paper types ROUGH NORMAL default TRANSPARENCY LABELS and CARDSTOCK via the y parameter to the qprt command or the y attribute in the colon file The values to the y option are 1 through 5 respectively for the above types y Bond y Plain y Pransparency y labels y Gardstock Note These values do not apply to envelopes Guide to Printers and Printing Pitch Number of Copies for Each Page Pitch selection is supported for the PCL emulation by using the p flag for pitch and the s flag for font name or type face with the qprt command Pitch values between 1 and 100 characters per inch cpi in whole integers are supported The condensed print flag K is not supported Font Name Pitch S courier p 1 to 100 Ss courier bold p 1 to
385. put bins can be accessed using the z flag of the qprt command The following table shows the possible values and the corresponding output bin destination LaserJet 8500 Color value HCO face down bin 3 HCO face down bin 4 HCO face down bin 5 HCO face down bin 6 HCO face down bin 7 HCO face down bin 8 HCO face up Printer left face up bin when HCO not installed LaserJet 8000 Evalue d Printer left face up bin when HCO not installed Stapler bin Number of Copies The LaserJet 8000 and 8500 Color printers support printing copies internal With the W flag only one copy of the print job is sent to the printer and the copies are then produced by the printer The basic format is W Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 67 4 68 Paper Size Specifies paper size for the print job Q 1 Q 2 Q 4 Q5 Q 8 Guide to Printers and Printing Letter Legal A4 Exec A3 Lexmark 4227 Forms Printer Paper Source Pitch Font and Quality Page Width Paper source selection is supported by using the u flag of the qprt command u 1 tractor 1 u2 tractor 2 The banner and trailer pages use the same source as the print job It is suggested that the printer be attended when switching between tractors Pitch selection is supported by using the p flag for the pitch the s flag for font name and q flag of the qprt command for print quality The
386. r 1025 e Bull Compuprint PageMaster 1625 Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 113 e Bull PR 88 e Bull PR 88 VFU Handling e Bull PR 90 e Canon LASER SHOT LBP B404PS Lite e Canon LASER SHOT LBP B406S D E G A404 E A304E e Dataproducts LZR 2665 Laser Printer e Dataproducts BP2000 Line Printer e HP 2500C Color Printer e HP LaserJet Il e HP LaserJet III e HP LaserJet IIIS e HP LaserJet 4 4M e HP LaserJet 4Si 4Plus 4V 4000 e HP LaserJet 5Si 5Si MX e HP LaserJet 5Si Mopier e HP LaserJet Color e HP LaserJet 5000 D640 Printer e HP LaserJet 8000 Printer e HP LaserJet 8100 Printer e HP Color LaserJet 4500 Printer e HP Color LaserJet 8500 Printer e IBM 2380 Personal Printer II e IBM 2380 Plus Model 2 e IBM 2381 Personal Printer II e IBM 2381 Plus Model 2 e IBM 2390 Personal Printer II e IBM 2390 Plus Model 2 e IBM 2391 Personal Printer II e IBM 23891 Plus Model 2 e IBM 3112 Page Printer e IBM 3116 Page Printer e IBM 3812 Model 2 Page Printer e IBM 3816 Page Printer e IBM 4019 LaserPrinter e IBM 4029 LaserPrinter e IBM 4037 5E Printer e IBM 4039 LaserPrinter e BM 4070 InkJet Printer e IBM 4072 ExecJet 4 114 Guide to Printers and Printing IBM 4076 InkJet Printer IBM 4079 Color JetPrinter IBM 4201 Model 2 Proprinter II IBM 4201 Model 3 Proprinter III IBM 4202 Model 2 Proprinter Il XL IBM 4202 Model 3 Proprinter Ill XL IBM 4207 Model 2 Proprinter X24E IBM 4208 Model 2 Propri
387. r attribute requiring translation from a lookup table should always appear in a colon file after the referenced integer attribute For example from the string red to an equivalent integer value of 2 Integer values are created from a colon file in the same order they are defined in the colon file Listing the attribute value first ensures that when the integer attribute is referenced it has been converted before it is referenced by the G escape sequence Run all the shell commands using ksh instead of bsh The limits field in the colon file contains two types of information SMIT dialog information and validation information SMIT Dialog Information Information used in building SMIT objects represent colon file attributes in the object data manager ODM These objects will be used in the Print a File Printer Setup and Default Job Characteristics dialogs The limits field gives you some control over the type of sm cmd opt ODM object that is built for every object You can control whether or not an attribute is always displayed never displayed or displayed only if it is referenced in a pipeline You can modify the following fields id seq num entry type cmd to list mode required op type multi select Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 23 e disp values e aix values e values msg file e values msg set e values msg id e help msg id e help msg loc Validation Information Validation information validat
388. r it for printer print queue and system information Printer definitions are stored under the ou printer object Print Queue definitions are stored under the ou print queue object while System information can be found under the ou system object The entire print tree is ACL protected below the ou print object The ACL Bind password used to ACL protect the tree is specified during the server configuration with the mkprtldap command using the w option cnzaixdata AIX Information Tree top level container ou other AIX ou print ACL protected ou other AIX subsystem subsystem ou printqueues ou printers ou systems Print queue Printer system definitions definitions definitions After you have successfully configured IBM Directory to store System V print information the next step in the setup is to configure clients to use the LDAP directory server System V Printer Configuration 6 45 Because this AIX print subtree is ACL protected you may not be able to view the System V print information in the directory information tree DIT under the AIX information tree using DMT Directory Management Tool A client must bind with Print Bind DN default is ou print cn aixdata and the ACL bind password or with the administrator DN to be able to access the AIX print subtree Configuring a Client to Use the IBM Directory Server for System V Print Information 6 46 To configure a client use the IBM Directory LDAP for System V Print information do
389. r the JDF for this job The last line of the JDF is the full path name to the spooled copy of the input data stream Copy that file to some temporary file such as tmp myfile When you copy the file you lose all of the flags that were associated with the job all you are copying is the input data stream itself Enable the asc queue enable asc and allow the job to be processed If it vanishes submit the copy you made eng Pasc tmp myfile lfthis job also vanishes then you need to examine the input datastream for errors as the printer for some reason does not print it If the copy prints then you probably have a problem with flags associated with the original job Cleaning Up and Starting Over This procedure completely clears and restarts the spooler system All jobs currently queued for processing are deleted and must be resubmitted Use it when you cannot troubleshoot an inoperative spooler You must be the root user to perform this task 1 Stop the qdaemon and associated processes stopsrc s qdaemon ps ef grep qd 2 kill 9 PIDNumbers where PIDNumbers are PIDs resulting from the ps command You may find qdfork ps ef grep pio kill 9 PIDNumbers where PIDNumbers are PIDs resulting from the ps command You may find pioformat or pioout 5 14 Guide to Printers and Printing 3 Clean out the queue and device status directory rm var spool lpd stat dev rm var spool lpd stat s The file var spool Ipd stat numfile
390. rdware again such as a certain printer In the base operating system spooler s formatter filter it is the device dependent formatter that contains code designed to handle all of the properties of a particular physical printer or class of printers including supported data stream escape sequences and control codes unique to that printer or printer class The device independent pioformat is called a formatter driver because that is precisely what it does When pioformat is set into execution it expects several arguments One of these arguments is the full path name to a device dependent formatter At run time pioformat dynamically loads links and drives the device dependent formatter The following figure depicts this relationship 3 10 Guide to Printers and Printing Figure 3 The Formatter Filter Furmaiter fym nr po pedi me Form acer Orie Farm acies Devit bsdegan dani Garita Dagendsaet Lzad livk the Farmaitter ener fl IHauaatenping inlilgliga flaicialire Pris 1ari gauarh wl dPasa Through OR GA Eris xart l Pleo bp Li raatarai inaniter Printer fDuiat rcs Wai plogerewis zT Firg Peogansingr piegetesHl Cemeund Dutput ploom dell det Dabar frag plogenim uc iManangs Dip plomagaut Fara ibh Eevee Exit Pers Eee Farm atter Fiber The pioformat command expects to be able to call if necessary five subroutines pioformat by itself does not contain these subroutines The subroutines exist in the d
391. re no carriage returns in this file and the only blank line occurs immediately before this one In the first example all of the device driver settings are honored In particular the mapping of a linefeed to a linefeed and a carriage return is turned on When the device drivers are writing characters to the physical printer it sends a carriage return after each linefeed It also honors the settings for page width In the second example the device driver is limited to simply writing each single byte character of etc motd to the physical printer without any mapping or other modification of the data stream occurring When the first sentence of etc motd ends the linefeed drops the printhead straight down one line there is no carriage return to move the printhead back to the left margin The first four letters of the word printer prin are printed At that point the printer itself not the device driver determines that the right margin has been reached and so prints a carriage return returning the printhead to the left margin Printing continues with the next character in the data stream In the second example the job does not even print until the reset button on the printer is pressed This is because the printer has not received enough date characters to automatically eject a page and no formfeeds were sent to the printer to cause it to eject the page the f parameter on the device driver is ignored Printer Plotter and Spoo
392. ress determination of ia the input data stream pipeline for ASCII jobs Why the Stack Language Describing Page Length Works A 8 The IBM LaserPrinter 4029 Series Technical Reference contains a figure and a table that together describe the printable and unprintable areas on a page and the paper and envelope dimensions in pels for standard paper and envelope sizes For instance the printable area on an 8 5 x 11 width by length inch page is 2400 x 3200 pels width by length Note that if the page is rotated either 90 or 270 degrees for landscape printing the dimensions are swapped and become 3200 x 2400 pels width by length The evaluation of 9elwL begins by checking to see if the I flag was used on the command line if it was then there are no calculations to perform The requested value will be used That is not a promise that it will work just that it will be used If the I flag was not used on the command line then piobe has to figure out how long the page is under the current job environment as determined by other command line flags and by colon file defaults The first item checked in the evaluation of page length is page orientation _z As noted above rotating the page by odd multiples of 90 degrees flips the page dimensions Looking at the if then else statement that is the beginning of the definition of wY it can be seen that the value of z is a switch that controls which of wJ and wK will be used for page length If
393. riction is applied The qdaemon will not be able to acquire a lock on the specified file or device if the qdaemon has already acquired the lock for another instance of piobe A queue that cannot process a job because of this restriction will show a queue status of DEV BUSY The status will change to RUNNING as soon as the qdaemon can acquire a lock on the file specified by the file parameter Datastream Flow for Common Print Jobs 3 8 After a job has been submitted to the spooler for processing and after the qdaemon has accepted the job and determined that its turn to be processed has arrived the backend for the queue is invoked The following figure illustrates the process of how piobe uses a shell to construct and manage a pipeline of filters to process the job The flow of a job through this pipeline of filters is 1 backend piobe receives arguments through the argc and argv subroutines from qdaemon shell optional filter pioformat device dependent code pioout D DOW x vom device driver Figure 2 Datastream Flow for Common Print Jobs ACERS onunmenis Tate Tho crpc Do ongv SLOTS from qooemonj ihe Qoono cr BOLI devog Coosnden code poou gavoo cre Hoo Sails aeuo T an td hn a 50 6 o 6 o When the device upon which the job is queued becomes available the qdaemon invokes the backend for the queue In the base operating system world the backend is commonly Guide to Printers and Printing piobe T
394. rint Queue menu option to the texm serv remove selector ID type remove queue term serv remov Specifies the name of the SMIT selector ID to branch to in order to change the printer connection characteristics of a print queue The port communication characteristics would typically be baud rate parity stop bits and so on To branch to the term serv printer conn selector ID from the SMIT Printer Port Communication Characteristics menu option type printer conn term serv printer conn Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 41 change queue Specifies the name of the SMIT selector ID to branch to in order to change the characteristics of a printer queue To branch to the term serv change selector ID from the SMIT Change Show Print Queue Characteristics menu option type change queue term serv change change filters Specifies the name of the SMIT selector ID to branch to in order to change the pre processing filters defined for a print queue To branch to the term serv change filters selector ID from the SMIT Change Show Pre Processing Filters menu option enter change filters term serv change filters Operators for Limits Field in the Printer Colon File 4 42 The limits field in the colon file contains two types of information e SMIT dialog information e Validation information The SMIT dialog information is used to build SMIT objects to represent colon file attributes in the Object D
395. rint a paragraph in bold type insert codes that start and stop the printer control information at the correct places Some application programs such as word processors allow you to insert specific printer controls in the file However if the printer cannot be configured from the application program you must use a system editor to insert printer control codes Printer control codes are available with the printer from the dealer where the printer was purchased or from the printer manufacturer e Supply command flags with the qprt command The qprt command or the SMIT Start a Print Job option recognize a number of flags that control printer operations such as Specifying condensed emphasized double wide and double strike printing Printing in specified colors Setting the margins Setting the number of lines per vertical inch Maintaining the horizontal position on the print line for a line feed or vertical tab control You can specify particular print characteristics for a single print job For example the qprt command flag for setting pitch is p Number where Number is the number of characters per inch If the standard qprt command setting is 10 characters per inch but you need 12 characters per inch for the printtest file enter the command qprt p 12 printtest The flag on the command line overrides the standard qprt command setting for this job The standard qprt command pitch setting remains 10 e Chang
396. rint queues are successfully created their names are displayed Be sure to note any error messages before you exit 3 Use the Printer Queues menus to customize the new print queue To use the SMIT fast path type smit chpq Configuring a Printer Port The following procedure describes how to configure a printer attached to the local host without adding a print queue Use this procedure if you want to add a printer or plotter but you do not want to spool print jobs Note If you also want to add print queues when you configure your printer refer to Initial Printer Configuration on page 2 6 Prerequisites The printer or plotter must be physically attached to your system before configuring the printer port Web based Sysytem Manager 1 At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers In the Web based System Manager Printer Queues window use the menus to complete the steps to configure a printer attached to the local host You can also perform this step with the SMIT fast path smit pdp 2 The system displays the printer device name 2 8 Guide to Printers and Printing Configuring a Printer without Adding a Queue Use the following procedure if you want to add a printer or plotter but you do not want to spool print jobs Note If you also want to add print queues when you configure your printer refer to Initial Printer Configuration on page 2 6 Prerequisites The printer or plotter must be physically attached to your sys
397. rint supervisor closes the pipe and proceeds to other cleanup work Message Format 4 30 Each message sent by the printer backend consists of a message header frame zero or more parameter header frames a fully expanded message and text consisting of zero or more parameters The message header specifies the message type message catalog information length of expanded message text and the number of variable message parameters The variable message parameters are used to build the expanded message text from the basic message text that is extracted from the message catalog The structure formats for the message header and the message parameter header frames are defined in the usr include piostruct h file When extracting messages from the pipe the print supervisor reads the message header frame then reads the message parameter header frames 0 9 as specified by the number of parameters specified in the message header frame The print supervisor reads the expanded message text the length of which is specified in the message header frame followed by the parameters if any The type and length of any parameters are specified in the individual message parameter header frames The type of message is specified in the message header frame The message types are as follows e ID VAL EVENT ABORTED BY SERVER e ID VAL EVENT WARNING RESOURCE NEEDS ATTENTION The actual message text is in expanded format The parameters are placed in the messag
398. rinted Sets the pitch to Number characters per inch Typical values for Number are 10 and 12 The actual pitch of the characters printed is also affected by the values for the K condensed flag and the W double wide flag Specifies the print queue name and the optional queue device name If this flag is not specified the default printer is assumed Specifies paper size for the print job The Value for paper size is printer dependent Typical values are 1 for letter size paper 2 for legal and so on Consult your printer manual for the values assigned to specific paper sizes Specifies the top margin The top margin is the number of blank lines to be left at the top of each page Sets the page width to the number of characters specified by the Number variable The page width must include the number of indention spaces specified with the i flag Specifies whether double wide print is wanted Indicates double wide print is wanted Indicates double wide print is not wanted Rotates page printer output the number of quarter turns clockwise as specified by the Value variable The length I and width w values are automatically adjusted accordingly 0 Portrait Landscape right 2 Portrait upside down 3 Landscape left Specifies a special function j Displays the job number for the specified print job h Queues the print job but puts it in the HELD state until it is released again Validates the spe
399. rinter e For more information about certain printers listed above see the following IBM InfoPrint 40 Printer on page 4 63 Lexmark Optra E310 Laser Printer on page 4 95 Lexmark Optra M410 Laser Printer on page 4 98 Lexmark Optra Se Laser Printer on page 4 101 Lexmark Optra T Laser Printer Family on page 4 104 Lexmark Optra W810 Laser Printer on page 4 107 e Asynchronous Communications Adapters Native serial port controller 8 port controller 16 port controller 64 port controller 128 port controller Third party controller Note Third party asynchronous controllers are also supported When the base operating system detects that an ASCII terminal was configured with a third party controller the terminal attached printer will be configured as thoug h it was connected to the native port controller See Native 8 Port 16 Port and Third party Controllers on page 2 20 for more information Installing a Terminal Attached Printer To install a new terminal attached printer and configure it into the print spooling subsystem you must e Install the physical ASCII terminal tty device and connect it to the system e Configure a tty device driver for the ASCII terminal e Connect the serial printer to the AUX or PRINT port of your ASCII terminal e Configure a virtual printer and print queue Installing the Physical ASCII Terminal To install a the physical ASCII terminal you must 1 Review all relevant insta
400. rinter Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 19 Printer Colon File Conventions Printer and printer data stream attributes reside in colon files Colon files reside in the usr lib Ipd pio predef and var spool Ipd pio local custom directories The lusr lib Ipd pio predef directory contains the predefined database and the var spool Ipd pio local custom directory contains the customized database The following sections describe the conventions for printer and attribute names and values in colon files e Colon File Format on page 4 20 e Attribute Names on page 4 21 e Attribute Values on page 4 23 Colon File Format 4 20 Colon files in both the predefined and customized databases have five fields separated by colons for each attribute They are Message catalog ID Identifies the message catalog where the attribute description is stored The message catalog ID can take any of three forms e Null string The string value for the mD attribute is assumed to be the file name of the message catalog for example mydescriptors cat e One character An abbreviation for pioattr x cat where x is the one character catalog ID This form of the catalog ID is normally used only by the operating system e Catalog file name The file name of the message catalog for example mydescriptors cat Either the one character form or the catalog file name form of the catalog overrides the catalog file name specified with the
401. rinting 1 Create a translation table in the usr lib Ipd pio transJP directory The naming convention for the new file is NewCodeSetName _IBM 943 2 Define the translation table in the trans dir file The format to define a new code set named NewCodeSet is newcodeset IBM 943 newcodeset IBM 943 3 Define the alias name in the trans alias file if needed 4 Append the code set name as input code in a colon file for example Ti NewCodeSetName IBM 943 Using Xwindows Fonts with the qprt Command MBCS printer backends use Xwindows fonts defined in the usr lib X11 fonts directory to print characters that are not stored in the ROM of the printer The F and 1 uppercase i flags for the qprt command designate Xwindow fonts for the printer The default value of these qprt command options are specified in the colon files as the value of the F and 1 attributes The qprt F flag specifies a font The full path name font alias or the Xwindow Logical Function Description XLFD of an Xwindow font can be used with the F flag The l flag follows a font path to find the Xwindow fonts and creates the I attribute entry The colon file format for the I attribute is I usr lib X11 fonts JP usr lib X11 fonts If the user specifies another font path with the qprt I command the printer backend looks in the specified font path not in the default paths listed in the _I colon file If the I option has a null value the
402. rmines that the device upon which the job is queued is available the qdaemon invokes the backend for the queue passing it arguments specified by the JDF The backend processes the job Overview of Backend Processing The backend for a queue is begun by qdaemon the qdaemon determines that a job s turn to be processed has arrived sets up an execution environment for the queue backend constructs an argument vector for the backend and via fork and exec causes the backend to begin execution The number of simultaneous instances of the backend is controlled by the presence or absence of the file parameter in the stanza for this queue in the etc qconfig configuration file If the file parameter is present then only one instance of the backend can exist for this queue This is because the qdaemon will only attempt to set the execution environment for the backend when it has determined that the job can be processed Part of setting the backend s execution environment involves opening stdout of the backend onto the file or device specified by the file parameter If the qdaemon has already performed this action for a previous job and that job is still executing then the qdaemon cannot get a lock on the file or device specified by the file parameter and hence cannot open stdout of the backend onto that file or device Thus the qdaemon holds the job in the queue and waits for the previous job to complete execution and release the file or device This is
403. rom the command line by using commands such as qprt Pasc f1 filename enq Pasc o f o 1 filename If the d attribute was not set to p the dp flag and argument would have to be added to the commands qprt Pasc dp f1 filename enq Pasc o d o p o f o 1 filename The cr mapper program reads characters from stdin and writes them to stdout Whenever it reads and writes a linefeed a hex A or decimal 10 it writes out a carriage return a hex D Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 137 Editing the etc qconfig File The etc qconfig configuration file can be edited with your text editor of choice There are unenforced rules concerning when you can and cannot edit the etc qconfig file without halting or otherwise corrupting the operation of the spooler Modifying the etc qconfig File while Jobs are Processing The etc qconfig file should never be edited when jobs are processing This is especially true when your system has a large number greater than 25 of printers that are generally pretty busy When the qdaemon receives notification from enq that a new Job Description File JDF exists the qdaemon examines the dates on both etc qconfig and letc qconfig bin the binary version of etc qconfig If etc qconfig is younger than letc qconfig bin the qdaemon does not accept any new jobs including the one that caused it to examine the aforementioned files until all currently running jobs have finished proce
404. rough a serial port this command would return output similar to the following device for prlocal dev tty01 This output shows the printer to be attached on device dev ttyO1 2 As root user run these commands cd usr lib lp postscript postio L tmp postio o l dev tty01 t romfonts ps For our sample prlocal printer this will produce output in the file tmp postio o that looks similar to the following printer startup status waiting source serial 25 status endofjob status idle sending file romfonts ps waiting for end of job status busy source serial 25 AGaramond Bold AGaramond BoldItalic AGaramond Italic AGaramond Regular AvantGarde Book AvantGarde BookOblique AvantGarde Demi AvantGarde DemiOblique more PostScript font oe oe oe names ZapfChancery MediumItalic ZapfDingbats status endofjob job complete This example lists the printer resident fonts for prlocal 6 34 Guide to Printers and Printing Adding Printer Resident Fonts to a Printer s Font List When a printer is installed the list of printer resident fonts should be added to the font list for that printer This font list file can be edited to contain only the font names in the printer s memory AGaramond Bold through ZapfDingbats in the previous example and placed into the file etc Ip printers prlocal residentfonts to prevent downloading of these fonts from the host computer To add
405. run on the computer where the print request was issued The print service cannot pass values for modes to server machines It can however match a file content type specified after the T option of the Ip command to a content type on a server machine Therefore to activate special modes on a server machine you must specify content types that will allow the print service to match input types and output types Options Options specify how different types of information is transformed into command line arguments to the filter command This information may include specifications from a user with the print request the printer definition and the specifications implemented by any filters used to process the request There are 13 sources of information each of which is represented by a keyword Each option is defined in a template which is a statement in the following format keyword pattern replacement This type of statement is interpreted by the print service to mean When the information referred to by keyword has the value matched by pattern take the replacement string Guide to Printers and Printing replace any asterisks it contains with the pattern specified or expand any regular expressions it contains and append the result to the command line The options specified in a filter definition may include none all or any subset of these 13 keywords In addition a single keyword may be defined more than once if multiple
406. s PIOSTAGEIXLATEOO 16 write fildes amp fmt type sizeof fmt type write fildes table sizeof table return 0 The cP at code point 252 means that the code point should be copied with no change The SC at code point 253 means the character is not defined in the intermediate code page and So a substitute character should be printed instead The 126 at code point 254 means that code point 254 should be translated to code point 126 Guide to Printers and Printing The X flag in the qprt command specifies the print file s code page name When this value is 123 the formatter reads the table from the usr lib Ipd pio trans1 123 file and uses it for stage translation Stage 2 Translation In the second stage of code point translation one or more stage 2 translation tables convert code points from the intermediate code page to those appropriate for the printer The t0 t9 attributes in the database colon file specify the full path names of stage 2 translation tables Each of the t0 t9 attributes can specify multiple stage 2 translation tables by separating the names with commas The print formatter reads in the stage 2 translation tables and chains them into a ring Beginning with the table for the current printer code page the formatter processes each character in the input print file The first determination is whether the character is defined in that printer code page In other words the code
407. s see your manual to determine which are installed These numbers apply no matter which ones are present If one is not present choosing one of those will simply default as per the user s manual The input source number is the same for both PCL and PostScript urdanual feed utfay 1 ut a3y 2 ur amp ultipurpose tray By default the banner and trailer pages come from tray 1 To change the default change the values for the uH and or uT attributes respectively in the virtual printer to the value for the desired paper source The valid values are the same as for the u flag Do this by editing the the chvirprt command Paper Size Paper size selection is supported by using either one or both of the qprt command flags O and Q The O flag controls paper versus envelope A O value of 3 indicates a paper size and 4 an envelope size The values 1 and 2 were skipped for backward compatibility Envelopes are only valid for manual feed envelope feeder or the multipurpose tray The default for Q is 1 or Letter for paper sizes and 3 or Com 10 for envelope sizes To change the defaults change the s0 s7 attributes respectively for each of the valid input sources Since manual feed and the multipurpose tray support both paper and envelopes the default for paper is the e se part e1 and the default for envelopes is the then part t3 of sO and s7 Paper Sizes O 3 Envelope Sizes O 4 Q 1 Letter 7 3 4 Monarch
408. s single or double quote an error message will be issued and the print job terminated If multiple flags are to be specified using Fxy and each flag s x and y values are identical a list of flag letters can be specified in brackets For example Faa Fbb Fcc can be specified as F abc The values referenced by yor have attribute names whose first character is _ underscore and whose second character is y or a character in the string Similar to Fxy and F except that no space is placed between the flag name and the argument unless the argument is a null string Similar to fxy and 9ef J but used only in the command string for the pioout command the Device Driver Interface Program to generate flags and arguments for override values specified by the piobe command the Print Job Manager Flags are not generated when their arguments are equal to predefined default values With v the values referenced by y or have attribute names whose first character is at sign and whose second character is y or a character in the string Indicates to the piobe command that the x flag or each flag in the string is actually referenced even though it is not referenced by a pipeline for example the x flag may be referenced by a printer command instead of by a filter in a pipeline This prevents the piobe command from rejecting the flag when specified on the command line P
409. s use the base operating system enscript utility or the da flag to a PostScript queue with the qprt command Only a pitch of 17 is supported for the lineprinter font style Normally the CN command line option is used to specify the number of copies desired This method will cause that many copies of the entire print job to be submitted or queued to the print system Since the Optra 410 supports collation internally options were added to support it and the number of copies of each page internally This functionality is limited by the amount of memory installed in your printer and the size of the job The W option determines how many copies of each page is desired where is the number of copies The S option controls whether collation is desired The default is or not The main advantages of using the W and S options are to conserve printer subsystem usage and allow the printer to handle multiple copies instead of sending copies to the printer Using the S options with the W also allows copies of each page in a row if that is desired Note that using N and W simultaneously is allowed This would result in N print jobs with W copies of each page in each job The E flag controls separator pages The valid values are 0 1 2 and 3 which represent NONE BETWEENCOPIES BETWEENJOBS and BETWEENPAGES respectively The separator page source defaults to TRAY 1 and is specified via the uS attribute The valid value
410. s courier bold p 1 to 100 S courier italic p 1 to 100 s courier bold italic p 1 to 100 S gothic p 1 to 100 s gothic bold p 1 to 100 S gothic italic p 1 to 100 s lineprinter p 17 Note To format ASCII for other font styles use the base operating system enscript utility or the qprt command with the da s and p flags to a PostScript queue For PostScript queues p stands for point size and the valid list of fonts are located in usr lib ps fontmap Valid point sizes are any integer from 1 to 1008 Also only a pitch of 17 is supported for the lineprinter font style The optional duplex feature is supported by the Y flag of the qprt command Ysimplex Yduplex long edge binding Yd uplex short edge binding The Optra N printer supports collation of multiple copies of a print job internally This feature is controlled by the W and S flags of the qprt command Scollation off Soellation on Wutnber of copies Notes 1 This function is independent of the N flag of the qprt command The N flag causes the printer to send the job to the printer times The W sends the print job once and copies of the job are printed 2 The function is limited by the amount of memory installed in the printer and the size of the print job Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 93 4 94 Separator Pages Output Bin Faceup or Facedown Gu
411. s for uS are the same as for header and trailer pages uH and uT respectively except that the Manual Feeder is not supported To change the default the uS attribute must be changed in the virtual printer to one of the valid values see the chvirprt command Lexmark Optra Se Laser Printer Page Rotation Paper Source Page rotation selection is supported for the PCL 5e emulation by using the z flag of the qprt command z Bortrait z landscape Paper source selection is supported for both the enhanced PCL R 5e emulation and the PostScript Level 2 emulation by using the u flag of the qprt command There are several optional input sources see your manual to determine which are installed These numbers apply no matter which ones are present If one is not present choosing one of those will simply default as per the user s manual The input source number is the same for both PCL and PostScript ur anual feed utay 1 ut a3y 2 ut amp y 3 utmay 4 utay 5 udnvelope feeder urfultipurpose tray By default the banner and trailer pages come from tray 1 To change the default change the values for the uH and or uT attributes respectively in the virtual printer to the value for the desired paper source The valid values are the same as for the u flag Do this by editing the the chvirprt command Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 101 Paper Size Paper Type 4 102 Guide to Printers an
412. s is a two stage process During the first stage of code set translation the input code set of the print file is translated to a process code set The process code set must be one of the MBCS code sets supported by the iconv subroutine and locale database DB examples include the IBM 943 IBM eucTW and IBM eucKR code sets During the second stage the process code set is translated to an appropriate output code set for the printer The iconv subroutine translates the code set if the iconv converter for the translation exists When the input or output code set and process code are the same no code set translation is performed The Ti and To attributes in the printer dependent colon files define the possible flow of the translating code set The Ti attribute specifies the combination of the input and process code sets Input code set Process code set The To attribute specifies the combination of the process and output code Process code set Output code set0 Output code setl Output code set2 Output code set3 For example the To attribute for a Japanese printer is defined as TO IBM 943 IBM 932 IBM 932 IBM 932 ibm eucJP IBM 932 IBM 932 IBM 932 1BM 932 All characters of the character set ID CSID are printed using ROM fonts when an output code set is specified for each CSID Otherwise bitmap images from the Xwindows font are used The type of Xwindows font files including the font image of each CSID is s
413. s it in ASCII format to the in progress calculation of wJ 24 Pq Pops the 1 off the stack and stores it in the internal variable q 25 GWu This value is already known so a 1 is again pushed onto the stack 26 3 Pushes a 3 onto the stack 27 lt Pops the 3 and the 1 off the stack and since 1 is less than 3 pushes a 1 onto the stack 28 t Pops the 1 off the stack and since it is a TRUE non zero values calls for the evaluation of gq 29 gq Pushes the value of the internal variable q a 1 onto the stack 30 1 Pushes a 1 onto the stack 31 96z Pops the two 1 s off the stack compares them for equality and pushes the resultant 1 onto the stack 32 96t Pops the 1 off the stack and since it is a TRUE non zero values calls for the evaluation of 2400 33 2400 Pushes a 2400 onto the stack Calculating Page Lenght Using Printer Colon File Escape Sequence A 7 34 d Pops the 2400 off the stack and returns it in ASCII format to the in porgress calculation of I 35 96G v Pushes a 6 onto the stack 36 96 Pops the 6 and the 2400 off the stack multiplies them together and pushes the resultant 14400 onto the stack 37 300 Pushes a 300 onto the stack 38 96 Pops the 300 and the 14400 off the stack divides 14400 by 300 and pushes the resultant 48 onto the stack 39 d Pops the 48 off the stack and returns it in ASCII format to the in prog
414. s that the job is held and will not be put on the queue until it is released using the qhld or enq commands Specifies that the backend program is waiting for the operator to perform a task such as loading paper This is usually software related Normal Recovery To recover from an OPR WAIT state respond appropriately to the request that is made by the queuing system Specifies that a print file is queued and is waiting in line to be printed Specifies that everything involved with the queue is ready to queue and print a job Specifies that a print file is printing Specifies that a user created a queue on a device file that another queue is using and that its status is DEV WAIT The queue cannot get a status from the printer device lp0 when it is on hold DEV WAIT Normal recovery To correct this bring down the other queue or fix the problem with the printer Bring the new queue down and back up so the queue registers as READY The following status conditions apply to remote queues Printers Print Jobs and Queues for Systems Administrators 2 37 CONNECT GET HOST INITING SENDING 2 38 Guide to Printers and Printing Specifies that the backend is trying to connect to the remote host Specifies that the backend is getting the host to which the print job will be sent Specifies that the backend is in the process of establishing a connection to the network Specifies that the backend is sending the print job to t
415. scape sequences are not to be confused with printer escape sequences The first character of each escape sequence is always the 96 percent sign character which indicates the beginning of an escape sequence The second character and sometimes subsequent characters define the operation to be performed The remainder of the characters if any in the escape sequence are operands used to perform the specified operation Calculations performed by the escape sequences can use a stack to hold integers or pointers to strings to be operated on and can use internal variables a through z to save integer values for later use Since the 96 character is used to define the beginning of an escape sequence a 96 character that is part of the data must be represented in the database as two adjoining 96 characters 9696 Only one 96 character appears in the constructed string The escape sequences that can be specified in an attribute string are listed and described in the following table They are based on the terminfo file escape sequences for terminals which have been modified and extended for printers Esc Seq Description 9696 Generates a 96 percent sign character ASCII Output from Stack d Pops an integer value from the stack and converts it to ASCII without leading zeros Produces a field width large enough to hold the ASCII numeric digits Similar to d with the printf subroutine 1 9 d Pops an integer value from the stack and converts
416. se names are for your convenience and the convenience of the users on your system Because different printers might have similar font cartridges or character sets use common font names on all printers This allows a user to submit a file for printing and request a particular font style without requiring that the user know which printer is used or whether a font cartridge or selectable character set is used If the printer has mountable font cartridges you need to list only their names If the printer has selectable character sets you must list their names and map each set to a name or number that uniquely identifies the set in the terminfo database Guide to Printers and Printing Specifying Character Sets For printers that allow selectable character sets determine the names of the character sets and then map each set to a name or number in the terminfo database e To determine the names of the character sets listed in the terminfo database enter tput T printer type csnm 0 The printer type is the name of the printer type in question This command should display the name of the Oth character set the character set obtained by default after the printer is initialized To display the names of the other character sets repeat the command above replacing 0 with 1 2 3 and so on In general the terminfo names should closely match the names used in the user documentation for the printer However because not all manufacturers use the
417. se programming language that allows you to specify the appearance of both text and graphics on a page A PostScript printer is equipped with a computer that runs an interpreter for processing PostScript language files When a PostScript printer receives a file it runs that file through the interpreter and then prints it Unless special provisions have been made by the manufacturer files submitted to a PostScript printer must be written in the PostScript language In addition to providing excellent facilities for managing text and graphics and combining them most major applications that support printed output support PostScript Graphics operators facilitate the construction of geometric figures that can then be positioned and scaled with any orientation The text capabilities allow you to specify a number of different fonts that can be placed on a page in any position size or orientation Because text is treated as graphics text and graphics are readily combined Moreover the language is resolution and device independent so that draft copies can be proofed on a low resolution device and the final version printed in higher resolution on a different device Applications that support PostScript including word processing and publishing software create documents in the PostScript language without intervention by the user Thus it is not necessary to know the details of the language to take advantage of its features However standard files that
418. sed The option ring operator can control the disp_values aix_values values_msg_file values_msg_set and value_smg_id fields The no message ID just a message ID message set and ID or message set catalog and ID are valid in a ring option list Validity checking is done if direct entry by the user is prohibited with the entry type value set to n The ring has hardcoded values that are either stand alone or are mapped to the base operating system values An example of stand alone values would include a list of possible baud rates 1200 2400 9600 19200 where the rate values themselves are used as the flag arguments An example of mapped values would be an attribute to designate which paper drawer on the printer is to be used In this example the three possible display values are lower drawer upper drawer and envelope feed These possibilities are mapped to the base operating system flag operands 0 1 2 The base operating system values are passed to the executed command Validity checking verifies that the attribute value is within the set of hardcoded values The following examples illustrate several types of option ring lists 100 _1 R 0 1 2 0 100 _1 R none full emulator 0 1 2 0 100 _1 R none full emulator 0 1 2 0 100 _1 R 21 none full emulator 0 1 2 0 100 _1 R 1 21 none full emulator 0 1 2 0 100 _1 R pioattr9 cat 1 21 none full emulator 0 1 2 0 Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programm
419. selects F4 The pop up list allows users to select only one option from a given list of options The pop up list is constructed from the cmd to list field values The op type field value for a pop up menu is 1 lowercase L Validity checking is done only when typed user input is prohibited The entry type for a field that does not allow direct user input is n The cmd to list field returns a newline separated list The values from that list are compared with the attribute value The possible values for the L operator are the shell command strings for the cmd to list field The list generated from the command is a list of output values separated by newline characters For example 100 l L print 50 n55 n60 n65 60 Specifies a multi select list which allows users to select more than one value from a given list of options The M operator works exactly like the L operator list except that the multi select field must be settoanm value An example of a multi select list operator entry is 100 _1 M print 50 n55 n60 n65 60 Specifies an option ring type of list The op_type field is set to r A ring list differs from a regular list in that the user can continue to display list options by pressing either the tab forward or backtab reverse keys When a ring list reaches the bottom of the options it recycles to the top of the list The ring list recycles in forward or reverse A ring list becomes a regular list when the F4 key is pres
420. ses Pitch Pitch selection is supported for the PCL emulation by using the p flag for pitch and the s flag for font name or type face Pitch values between 1 and 100 characters per inch cpi in whole integers are supported The condensed print flag K is not supported Font Name Pitch S courier p 1 to 100 S courier bold p 1 to 100 S courier italic p 1 to 100 s courier bold italic p 1 to 100 s gothic p 1 to 100 s gothic bold p 1 to 100 S gothic italic p 1 to 100 s lineprinter p 17 Note To format ASCII files for other font styles use the base operating system enscript utility or the qprt command with the da s and p flags to a Postscript queue For Postscript queues p stands for point size and the valid list of fonts can be found in usr lib ps fontmap Valid point sizes are any integer from 1 to 1008 Only a pitch of 17 is supported for the lineprinter font style Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 79 4 80 Collation Separator Pages Guide to Printers and Printing Normally the N command line option is used to specify the number of copies desired This method will cause that many copies of the entire print job to be submitted or queued to the print system Since the Optra Color 40 supports collation internally options were added to support it and the number of copies of each page internally This fun
421. ssing When the jobs have finished processing the qdaemon creates a new version of etc qconfig bin If you cause the qdaemon to go into this state while jobs are processing it is possible for the spooler to hang If you modify etc qconfig under these conditions and if any printers are still generating output your best option is to leave the system alone and see if it comes back to life after all the jobs have finished processing If zero printers are producing output or the spooler appears to be hung see Cleaning Up and Starting Over on page 5 14 Attention Do not cause a change to etc qconfig while jobs are processing Aside from editing etc qconfig and writing a new version of the file to disk with a text editor you can cause the same effect by using smit to change a queue property or a parameter value Creating Queue with an Editor The root user can edit etc qconfig and define queues with a text editor One situation where this should not be done is when the backend for the spooler queue is piobe Queues that use piobe as backend must have an associated virtual printer definition In this situation the root user should use smit to create the queue Using smit will run several programs that create the virtual printer definition 4 138 Guide to Printers and Printing Chapter 5 Troubleshooting the Base Operating System Spooler This chapter contains information on the following topics that help resolve printing problems L
422. stack since the w flag was not used on the command line l_w Calls for the evaluation of _w 96G z Pushes a 1 onto the stack 9e 1 Pushes a 1 onto the stack 1 2 3 4 5 amp Pops the top two values two 1 s off the stack performs a bitwise AND on the two values and pushes the resultant 1 onto the stack 6 9et Pops the 1 off the stack and since it is a TRUE non zero value calls for the evaluation of GwkK 7 GwkK Calls for the evaluation of wK 8 96G Q Calls for the evaluation of _Q 9 96GwQ Calls for the evaluation of wQ 10 GWu Calls for the evaluation of Wu 11 96CO Pushes a 0 onto the stack since the O flag was not used on the command line 12 t Pops the 0 off the stack and since it is a FALSE zero value calls for the evaluation of G_u The stack labeled Wu is now empty 13 G_u Pushes a 1 onto the stack 14 d Pops the 1 off the stack and returns it in ASCII format to the in progress calculation of wQ 15 0 Pushes a 0 onto the stack 16 9ez Pops the 0 and 1 off the stack compares them for equality and pushes the resultant 0 onto the stack 17 t Pops the 0 off the stack and since it is a FALSE zero value calls for the evaluation of GWu Calculatin Page Width Using Printer Colon File Escape Sequence B 5 B 6 18 GWu This value is already known so a 1 is pushed onto the stack 19 1 Pushes a 1 onto the stack
423. standing the Interaction between qdaemon and the Backend on page 4 27 Printer Code Page Translation Tables on page 4 34 Printer Attachment Files on page 4 38 Operators for Limits Field in the Printer Colon File on page 4 42 Adding a Printer Using the Printer Colon File on page 4 48 Printer Specific Information on page 4 50 Printer Support on page 4 113 Pass Through Mode on page 4 118 Viewing Formatting or Modifying Virtual Printer Definitions on page 4 121 Modifying the mi mp and _d Attributes on a PostScript Queue on page 4 126 How piobe Uses Printer Colon Files on page 4 127 Spooler Job Header and Trailer Pages on page 4 129 Modifying the mo Virtual Printer Attribute on page 4 133 Filters on page 4 135 Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 1 Printer Backend Overview for Programming The base operating system printer backend receives and processes print requests from a spooler usually the qdaemon command The printer backend is a standard feature of the base operating system It is implemented by the piobe command The printer backend supports all of the printers installed in the Object Data Manager ODM Predefined database You can customize the printer backend to assist in the administration of the printing subsystem For more information see Printers Print Jobs and Queues for System Administrators on page 2 1 You can also modify the printer backend to add unsupported printers and National Language Support
424. t Print Requests 0 00 c eee eee eee Additional PostScript Capabilities Provided by Filters 05 Supporting PostScript Printers ocs sses otre resne teton cece teen eee Font Cartridges and Character Sets 0000s cece cece eee e eens Setting Up Printer Fault Alerts 0 0 0 cece cece tees Specifying a Printer Fault Recovery Mechanism 0000ce eee eens Alerting to Mount Forms and Font Cartridges 0000 cece eee eee Setting Printer Port Characteristics 0 0 ccc cece eee eee Setting Up a Printer With Multiple Names 000 cece eee eee Configuring Directory Enabled LDAP System V Print on AIX Prerequisites Planning to Set Up the Print Subsystem 00 cece eee eee eee Server Flag Optiofis rese Ripe pEPeIeMex dad be D NERO RR eaten mantels Related Information Preface 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 4 6 6 6 6 6 7 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 13 6 15 6 15 6 15 6 15 6 16 6 17 6 17 6 18 6 18 6 19 6 19 6 20 6 26 6 26 6 26 6 26 6 26 6 27 6 29 6 29 6 29 6 30 6 31 6 36 6 38 6 39 6 40 6 41 6 42 6 43 6 43 6 43 6 47 6 49 xi xii Appendix A Calculating Page Length Using Printer Colon File Escape Sequences 2 lel uu dunes eei iade eee ees Why the Stack Language Describing Page Length Works Appendix B Calculating Page Width Using Printer Colon File Escape Sequences eeee
425. t job etc motd and send its output to pioformat the device independent formatter driver This is a good place to examine how piobe uses the virtual printer definition associated with the spooler queue named asc The colon file which contains the virtual printer definition for this queue uses the attribute ia to specify the input data stream pipeline the PIPELINE OF FILTERS section above for ASCII jobs The value of ia for this queue is Ide pioformat G8 Idd 1Imm Idf piof5202 1 IwL w IwW f begijpqstuvxyzEGIJLOOWXZ Uh The Isvirprt command can be used to format ia so it reads as follows Id INCLUDE Directory Containing Miscellaneous Modules pioformat SIdd INCLUDE Directory Containing Digested Data Base Files E id Imm INCLUDE File Name Of Digested Data Base Init By piodigest mt md mn mq mv rows Idf INCLUDE Directory Containing Loadable Formatter Routines piof5202 1 SIwL INCLUDE Page Length In Chars Using Length From Data Base used in pipelines r w SIww INCLUDE Page Width In Characters Using Width From Data Base used in pipelines r r f begijpqstuvxyzEGIJLOOWXZ For Each Flag x on Command Line xArgument gt OUTPUT Uh Indicate to piobe Pass the Following Attributes to subsequent printer commands The ld resolves to usr 1ib lpd pio etc the directory that contains miscellaneous modules The pioformat
426. t system Many applications allow you to specify only the name of the printer so virtual printers are the only solution Other applications might allow complete control over the commands that submit the print job In this case you might use the shell script in the preceding example Configuring Directory Enabled LDAP System V Print on AIX Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP is a distributed hierarchical directory service access protocol that is used to access repositories of user information and other network related entities The IBM Directory is an LDAP directory server The AIX System V print subsystem s use of IBM Directory allows for centralized storage of print information This functionality can be used to keep printers print queues and system information common in a client server environment The mkprtldap command configures IBM Directory as a server containing System V print information and one or more clients that use the IBM Directory LDAP for print information Beginning with AIX 5 2 the System V print subsystem is directory enabled allowing the System V print subsystem to be managed using the information stored in the LDAP directory The System V print subsystem is one of the many AIX subsystems that provide an option to store information in the directory The information stored in the directory will be used by the subsystems to manage the AIX system Other subsystems that use the LDAP directory include Security and Net
427. t that the Manual Feeder is not supported To change the default the uS attribute must be changed in the virtual printer to one of the valid values see the chvirprt command The equal sign is the command line option for specifying the output destination Valid values are 0 standard bin 1 bin 1 2 bin2 3 bin 3 50active bin The default value for the output destination is the standard bin 0 Note that if the active bin is selected the printer will select the bin based on the state of output bin capacity sensing and the operator panel setting for Configure Bins under the PAPER MENU Please refer to your printer manual to determine exactly how the printer will respond Lexmark Optra T Laser Printer Family Page Rotation Paper Source 4 104 Guide to Printers and Printing Page rotation selection is supported for the PCL 5e emulation by using the z flag of the qprt command z Bortrait z landscape Paper source selection is supported for both the enhanced PCL R 5e emulation and the PostScript Level 2 emulation by using the u flag of the qprt command There are several optional input sources see your manual to determine which are installed These numbers apply no matter which ones are present If one is not present choosing one of those will simply default as per the user s manual The input source number is the same for both PCL and PostScript ur anual feed utffay 1 ut 3y 2 ut amp y 3
428. t the queue is waiting on the printer because the printer is offline out of paper jammed or the cable is loose bad or wired incorrectly To recover from a DEV WAIT correct the problem that caused it to wait It may be easier for diagnostic testing to use the enq command to move all queued jobs from the DEV WAIT queue to another queue that is either printing or is DOWN After the problem is corrected you can move any unprinted job back to the original queue A queue will usually go into a DOWN state after it has been in the DEV WAIT state This situation occurs when the printer device driver cannot tell if the printer is there due to absence of correct signalling However some printers may not have the capability to signal the queuing system that it is offline and instead signals that it is off If the printer device signals or appears to be off the queue will go into the DOWN state To recover from a DOWN state correct the problem that has brought the queue down and have the system administrator bring the queue back up The queue must be manually brought up before it can be used again Specifies that a print job is held The print job will not be processed by the spooler until it is released Specifies that a print file is queued and is waiting in line to be printed Specifies that everything involved with the queue is ready to queue and print a job Specifies that a print file is printing Printers Print Jobs and Queues O
429. tabase file defining the virtual printer associated with this queue asc The is a second flag to pioformat specifying the full path name of the device dependent formatter to be loaded linked and driven at runtime by the formatter driver pioformat It is here that you can see how and where the runtime connection between these two modules occurs The value of the flag is specified by the concatenation of the remainder of the printer colon file escape sequences shown in the formatted form of the ia attribute beginning with 9eldf and piof5202 l The value of 9eldf in defined in the colon file as l 4 fmtrs The 4 is an automatic variable whose value is usr lib lpd pio so 9eldf resolves to usr lib lpd pio fmtrs The piof5202 I without the single quotes is appended to this string so the value of the flag to this point becomes usr lib lpd pio fmtrs piof5202 1 The lis a flag to piof5202 the device dependent formatter for an ASCII data stream on an IBM 4029 LaserPrinter that specifies page width in characters The calculation of the argument to the I flag IwL is described in Appendix A Calculating Page Length Using Printer Colon File Escape Sequences on page A 1 Spooler Job Header and Trailer Pages The pipelines for generating header and trailer pages are defined by the system administation attributes System Administration Attributes on page 4 5 sh header pages and st trailer pages The pri
430. tatus qchk Command 00 0 cece eee eee eee 1 12 Prerequisites soit sse Matted takes eee E LUM ae a EE 1 12 Web based System Manager 0 cece e eee eee eee eae 1 12 dehik Command sescenti etes bet e Medea ER pe ER ENS 1 12 smit command 2er eM uvDueEUawR E PH te lee ake aed 1 12 Printer Status Conditions 0 00 ccc teens 1 13 Formatting Files for Printing pr Command 0060 e eee eee eee 1 14 Printing ASCII Files on a PostScript Printer 000 e eee eee 1 16 Prerequisites ce uk IY DE aig tears Stel ithe Baa Wiha Whe aie wie ea 1 16 Command Summary for Printers Print Jobs and Queues 0000 1 17 Preface V vi Chapter 2 Printers Print Jobs and Queues for System Administrators Printivig PrOCeSSOS eser ete gaa hatte Rate PR HL eg e teen decay Controlling the Printing Process 0 cece eect teeta Print SpOOl6r vien Redde k acelin peed ade ete Real and Virtual Printers 0 0 eee eens Local and Remote Printers 0 00 c cece eee eee nn Printer BackendS 0000s cece eee eee nn Formatter Filters euseda Eaa nE a LEE ey n E ee edt ok Initial Printer Configuration 0 c cece ete Changing the Configuration File 0 00 cece eects Configuring a Local Printer and Adding a Queue 0 cece eee Configuring a Remote Printer and Adding a Queue ss Configuring a Network Printer
431. td Issuing this command results in mail similar to the following being sent to the user that issued the command Message from qdaemon gt MESSAGE FROM PRINT JOB 31 etc motd lt 0782 034 Below is the preview information requested with the al flag No files will be printed PRINTER devices cat 71 66 IBM 4029 LaserPrinter ASCII FLAG VALUES a 1 b 0 d a f p g 1 h i 0 j 1 1 48 p 12 q s cou rier t 0 u 1 v 6 w 128 x 2 y z 1 A 1 B nn C E G H I J L N 3 O 3 P ascx lxx Q 1 W X ISO8859 1 Z PIPELINE OF FILTERS usr bin pr 148 w128 etc motd usr lib lpd pio etc pioformat Q var spool lpd pio G8l1ocal ddi ibm4029 asc lpl asc lpl usr lib lpd pio fmtrs piof5202 148 w128 p12 scourier z1 Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 127 The mail specifies several items e The physical printer that would have been used e The values of the flags that pertain to this spooler queue e The pipeline of filters that would have been executed The flags values used on the command line a1 Pasc fp z1 p12 scourier C and N3 can be seen in the section of the mail labeled FLAG VALUES Of more interest is the section of the mail labeled PIPELINE OF FILTERS Here the pipeline of filters determined by piobe and constructed by the shell can be seen The pr filter will pre process the prin
432. tem before configuring the printer port See Configuring a Printer Port on page 2 8 smit Command 1 At the system prompt type smit pdp 2 Select Add a Printer Plotter 3 Provide additional information as prompted qprt Command The following describes how to queue a print job using the qprt command the enq command the Ip command or the lpr command The syntax is the same for all three queuing commands except that the d flag instead of the P flag should be specified with the Ip command Command PQueueName FileNam where QueueName Name of the print queue FileName Name of the file to be printed The following example demonstrates how to use the qprt command qprt Pfastest myfile Refer to the individual queuing commands for additional flags that can be specified Printers Print Jobs and Queues for Systems Administrators 2 9 Additional Queue Operations This section describes the following procedures e Adding a Print Queue Device on page 2 10 e Adding Plotter Support with 5080 on page 2 10 e Creating a Plotter Setup File on page 2 11 e Adding a Local Printer to an Existing Queue on page 2 11 e Adding an ASCII Terminal Printer to an Existing Queue on page 2 12 e Adding an HP JetDirect Printer to an Existing Queue on page 2 12 e Adding a File to an Existing Queue on page 2 12 Adding a Print Queue Device Prerequisites To perform this task you must have root authority Web based System Manager 1 At the s
433. tent Type Type of Print Request simple int an ASC Gimpl text fie daisy Print files intended for a Diablo 630 daisy wheel printer Print the contents of a bit mapped display from a terminal tek4014 Print files formatted for a Tektronix 4014 device Filters are provided with the print service to translate print requests with these formats to the PostScript language For example to convert a file containing ASCII text to PostScript code the filter takes that text and writes a program around it specifying printing parameters such as fonts and the layout of the text on a page After the PostScript filters are installed they are invoked automatically by the print service when a user specifies a content type for a print request with the T option For example if a user enters the command lp d psprinter T simple report2 the ASCII file report2 a file with an ASCII or simple format is converted to PostScript automatically as long as the destination printer psprinter is defined to the system as a PostScript printer Additional PostScript Capabilities Provided by Filters The filters described in Providing Filters on page 6 18 also take advantage of PostScript capabilities to provide additional printing flexibility Most of these features can be accessed through the mode option invoked by the y option to the Ip command These filters allow you to use several unusual options for your print jobs The following list describes thes
434. tern content type content To protect potentially sensitive content the alignment pattern is not shown if the Ipstat command is used See Creating a Printer Form on page 6 15 for descriptions of these characteristics System V Printer Configuration 6 17 Providing Filters A filter is a program that you can use for the following purposes e To convert a user file from one data format to another so that it can be printed correctly on a given printer e To handle the special modes of printing that users may request with the y option to the Ip command such as two sided printing landscape printing draft or letter quality printing e To detect printer faults and notify the print service of them so that the print service can alert you Not every filter can perform all three tasks Given the printer specific nature of these roles the print service has been designed so that these roles can be implemented separately This separation allows you or a printer manufacturer or another source to provide filters without having to change the print service A default filter is provided with the print service to provide simple printer fault detection It does not convert files or handle any of the special modes It may however be adequate for your needs You can use the print service to manage the use of filters as described in the following topics e Defining a Filter on page 6 20 e Adding a Filter to the Print Service on page 6 26
435. that describe a particular data stream for a particular printer Before a print job can be placed in a queue a virtual printer definition must exist for both the print queue and the queue device See the mkvirprt command for more information Printers Print Jobs and Queues Overview for Users 1 3 Starting a Print Job qprt Command Use the qprt or smit commands to request a print job and specify the following Name of the file to print Print queue name Number of copies to print Whether to make a copy of the file on the remote host Whether to erase the file after printing Whether to send notification of the job status Whether to send notification of the job status by the system mail Burst status User name for Delivery To label Console acknowledgment message for remote print File acknowledgment message for remote print Priority level Prerequisites For local print jobs the printer must be physically attached to your system or in the case of a network printer attached and configured on the network For remote print jobs your system must be configured to communicate with the remote print server Before you can print a file you must have read access to it To remove a file after it has printed you must have write access to the directory that contains the file qprt Command The qprt command creates and queues a print job to print the file you specify If you specify more than one file all the files together make up on
436. the following 1 Install the IBM Directory Client software on the system that will be set up as a client 2 Run the mkprtidap command with the client option to configure the client The syntax is as follows mkprtldap c h DirectoryServerHostname w ACLBindPasswd d PrintBindDN I U During the client configuration the mkprtldap command does the following e Saves the IBM Directory LDAP server host name in the etc Idapsvc server print file e Saves the AIX Print Bind DN in the etc Idapsvc server print file e Saves the ACL Bind Password for the AIX Print Bind DN in the letc Idapsvc system print file The value of the ACL Bind password must be the same as the one specified during the configuration of the Directory server e Undoes a previous client configuration if the U flag is specified This option replaces the letc Idapsvc system print and etc Idapsvc server print files with the previous saved copies of the etc Idapsvc server print save and etc Idapsvc system print save files The client side configuration files etc Idapsvc server print and etc Idapsvc system print are created to store information about the IBM Directory server and ACL information that is the IBM Directory server name ACL information printbindDN and printbindPasswora LDAP port and the directory context for print required by the System V print subsystem The default printbindDN is ou print cn aixdata and is used when the d flag is not spec
437. the following SRC commands 2 30 Guide to Printers and Printing startsrc Starts a subsystem group of subsystems or a subserver stopsrc Stops a subsystem group of subsystems or a subserver Issrc Gets the status of a subsystem group of subsystems or a subserver refresh Causes the subsystem or group of subsystems to reread the appropriate configuration file traceson Enables tracing of a subsystem group of subsystems or a subserver tracesoff Disables tracing of a subsystem group of subsystems or a subserver Managing and Using Remote Printers and Queues In order to print to a remote system you must set up a remote queue on the local system This process involves tasks such as naming a queue and a queue device on the local host and indicating the name of the remote host and the queue on the remote host to which print jobs are sent You can set up a remote queue with Web based System Manager type wsm then select Printers You can also use the smit mkrque command For more information see Adding a Print Queue Device on page 2 10 Note The queue on the remote host designated to receive remote print requests must be an active queue To start the remote queue type wsm select Printers then select the name of the queue and queue device you configured for remote printing You can also use smit qstart to perform this task Remote Printing and the qconfig File The qconfig file contains stanzas that define queu
438. ther print queue Printers Print Jobs and Queues Overview for Users 1 17 qpri Prioritizes a job in the print queue qprt Starts a print job 1 18 Guide to Printers and Printing Chapter 2 Printers Print Jobs and Queues for System Administrators The printer subsystem includes a spooler real printers virtual printers backends and queues A print job can be sent to a printer attached directly to a local system or it can be sent over a network to a remote system and printed on a printer attached to the remote system The system management information associated with printers include e Printing Processes on page 2 1 e Print Spooler on page 2 2 e Real and Virtual Printers on page 2 3 e Local and Remote Printers on page 2 4 e Printer Backends on page 2 4 e Formatter Filters on page 2 5 e Initial Printer Configuration on page 2 6 Other chapters to review include e Spooler Overview on page 3 1 e Troubleshooting the Base Operating System Spooler on page 5 1 Printing Processes When you print a file the system sends codes to the printer Some codes print specific characters such as a to z or 0 to 9 Other codes print characters or files such as underscoring certain characteristics or by adjusting the page length Edit the file if you want to send different character codes to the printer such as to change the word that to this You do not have to understand the underlying codes To alter the way a printer works
439. these types see Ipfilter and Defining a Filter on page 6 20 A prerequisite of communication between any system and a PostScript printer is the presence of the postio or the Ip cat filter on the system Those programs are the only mandatory PostScript filters that communicate directly with the PostScript printer The following filters allow other types of documents to be translated to PostScript and to be printed on a PostScript printer 6 32 Guide to Printers and Printing PostScript Filters File Content Type Filter simple postprint troff dpost daisy postdaisy dmd postdmd tek4014 posttek plot postplot The following filters perform special functions Special Purpose Filters Function Filter Communicate with printer postio Ip cat Download fonts download Reverse or select pages postreverse Matrix gray scales postmd Installing and Maintaining PostScript Fonts One of the advantages of PostScript is its ability to manage fonts Fonts are stored in outline form in the Type 1 format either on the printer or on a computer that communicates with a printer When a document is printed the PostScript interpreter generates each character as needed in the appropriate size from the outline description of it If a font required for a document is not stored on the printer being used it must be transmitted to that printer before the document can be printed This transmission process is called downloading fonts Fonts are stored and accessed in se
440. ting the printer so it is ready to print the requests For instance if the terminfo database does not show a printer capable of setting a page length requested by a user the spooling daemon rejects the request However if it does show it to be capable then the interface program uses the same information to initialize the printer 3 Standard Interface Program If you have a particularly complicated printer or if you want to use features not provided by the print service you can change the interface script This script is responsible for managing the printer it prints the banner page initializes the printer and invokes a filter to send copies of the user s files to the printer 4 Optional filters To provide a link between the applications used on your system and the printers you can add slow and fast filters Each type of filter can convert a file into another form for example mapping one set of escape sequences into another and can Guide to Printers and Printing provide a special setup by interpreting print modes requested by a user Slow filters are run separately by the spooling daemon to avoid tying up a printer Fast filters are run so their output goes directly to the printer thus they can exert control over the printer Print Request Log Each time a user sends a job to the printer the print service creates two files that describe the job request and places one each in the usr spool Ip temp and usr spool Ip requests
441. tion 6 21 6 22 file Try to find a set of filters that take as input types all the different files your users may want printed and converts those files directly into types your printers can handle Printer types A list of printer types into which the filter can convert files For most filters this list is identical to the list of output types For example you may have a printer that is given a single type for purposes of initialization see Printer Types on page 6 26 but which can recognize several different types of files In essence this printer has an internal filter that converts the various types into one that it can handle Thus a filter may produce one of several output types that match the file types that the printer can handle Label the filter as working with that printer type As another example you may have two different models of printers that are listed as accepting the same types of files However due to slight differences in manufacture one printer deviates in the results it produces You label the printers as being of different printer types say A and B where B is the one that deviates You create a filter that adjusts files to account for the deviation produced by printers of type B Because this filter is needed only for those printer types you list it as working only on type B printers For most printers and filters you can leave this part of the filter definition blank Printers You may have some printers t
442. to cancel job number 123 on whichever printer the job is on type qcan x 123 For example to cancel all jobs queued on printer 1 0 type qcan X Plp0 Note The base operating system also supports the BSD UNIX cancel print command Iprm and the System V UNIX cancel print command cancel See the Iprm and cancel commands in the A X 5L Version 5 2 Commands Reference for more information and the complete syntax smit Command To cancel a print job using SMIT type smit qcan 1 8 Guide to Printers and Printing Prioritizing a Print Job qpri Command This section discusses how to change the priority of a print job You can only assign job priority on local queues Higher values indicate a higher priority for the print job The default priority is 15 The maximum priority is 20 for most users and 30 for users with root user privilege and members of the printq group group 9 Note You cannot assign priority to a remote print job Prerequisite The printer must be physically attached to your system Web based System Manager To change the priority of a queued print job using Web based System Manager type wsm then select Printers In the Printer Queues window select the print job then use the menus to set the priority for that job in a local print queue qpri Command The qpri command reassigns the priority of a print job that you submitted If you have root user authority or belong to the printq group you can assign prior
443. to demonstrate what happens when a printer device driver such as dev 1p0 is placed into or taken out of passthru mode Printers will print either exactly what they are sent if you set the job conditions up correctly or on the most current printers you may be able to direct the printer to perform certain mappings for you There are no carriage returns in this file and the only blank line occurs immediately before this one Notice that the r parameter dictates the mapping of each linefeed to a linefeed and carriage return if the value of p is This is necessary as most UNIX based operating systems only use linefeeds unlike DOS or OS 2 or other operating systems in UNIX based operating systems a linefeed implies a carriage return While this works well with text editors and in other similar situations it does not work with printers Printers print only the data which they are sent For example issuing the two commands splp p 1p0 cat etc motd gt dev 1p0 results in output similar to the following appearing on the printer This is a test version of etc motd used to demonstrate what happens when a prin ter device driver such as dev lp0 is placed into or taken out of passthru mode Printers will print either exactly what they are sent if you set the job conditions up correctly or on the most current printers you may be able to direct the printer to perform certain mappings for you There a
444. tor can be a string with a maximum length of 16 characters For example the following S operator entry places the item in position 100 100 1 5 100 60 Field Characteristics Operators E Controls the entry type field of the sm cmd opt object The possible values for the E option are Indicates that numerical entry is allowed Indicates that a file entry is allowed A valid file name must be specified Indicates no entry is allowed The field cannot accept typed input Indicates an alphanumeric entry is allowed Indicates that text entry is allowed Indicates that a hexacimal entry is allowed To allow numerical entry into the SMIT dialog field enter 100 L E4 60 Q Controls the value of the required filed of the sm cmd opt object The required field determines if the field value should be sent to the cmd to exec command for this dialog A single character specifies the value type The default value is n which means that the flag and value for the sm cmd opt object is passed only if the field value is changed Possible values for the required field are n Represents no Do not send flag unless user changes the initially displayed value The n value is the default Represents yes Always sends the prefix field and value of the entry field even if it is null Send the prefix field and value The value must contain 1 non blank character Always send the prefix field and values except when the value is null To ens
445. ttribute If a flag corresponding to the attribute is used with a print command values for these attributes are overridden from the command line For example the I attribute in a virtual printer definition contains a value for the number of lines to print on a page Assume that the default value stored in the attribute is 66 The following print request does not specify a number of lines per page with the 1 flag qprt P Pro myfile The printer subsystem uses the default _I value of 66 to process the print request The following print request uses the 1 flag to specify 50 lines of text per page qprt 1 50 P Pro myfile The 1 flag value overrides the default value in the I attribute of the virtual printer definition forthe Pro printer The first character for a default flag value attribute is always the _ underscore The second character corresponds to the command flag for which the default value is stored The following example shows some of the attribute values under the _ _FLG group header These values are typical for a supported PostScript laser printer Guide to Printers and Printing Name Description Value _ FLG VALUES THAT MAY BE OVERRIDDEN WITH FLAGS ON THE COMMAND LINE 1 Page Headings Wanted For Text Converted l to PostScript no yes r2 Use Two Columns for Text Converted to PostScript no yes Sic Gaudy Mode Wanted for Text Converted to PostScript no
446. uing System Problems When the queuing system shows one or more queues in DEV WAIT and you have verified that the queue is not waiting on the printer because the printer is offline out of paper jammed or the cable is loose bad or wired incorrectly and it has not changed to DOWN within the TIMEOUT period use the following method to clear and restart the queuing system This method stops the qdaemon removes all queued jobs and restarts the qdaemon You must have root authority stopsrc s qdaemon ps e fgrep ad kill 9 PIDNumbers where Pi DNumbers are any PIDs resulting from the ps command ps e fgrep pio kill 9 PIDNumbers rm var spool lpd stat dev DEVICE where DEVICE is the device that is showing DEV WAIT rm var spool lpd stat s QUEUE DEVICE where QUEUE is the queue and DEVICE that is showing DEV WAIT mkdir tmp QDIR mv var spool lpd qdir NNUSER QUEUE tmp QDIR where NN is a number USER is the user who queued the job and QUEUE is the queue that is showing DEV WAIT startsrc s qdaemon After the queueing system has been cleared and appears to be functioning properly you will need to stop the qdaemon copy the jdf files from tmp QDIR to var spool Ipd qdir and then restart the qdaemon Testing the qdaemon Submitting jobs to the spooler causes no discernible spooler activity Assume a local ASCII print queue named asc Is the qdaemon running Issue the command e
447. uler assign print requests to filters on the basis of the following criteria e f the type of OUTPUT to be produced by the filter is impress then pass the l option to the filter e lf the type of OUTPUT to be produced by the filter is postscript then pass the P option to the filter To specify these criteria provide the following templates as options to the Ipfilter command Options OUTPUT impress I OUTPUT postscript P If the Options line becomes too long put each template on a separate line as follows Options OUTPUT impress I Options OUTPUT postscript P In both templates the keyword is OUTPUT In the first template the value of pattern is impress and the value of the replacement is l In the second template the value of pattern is postscript and the value of the replacement is P Keyword Definitions and Examples The following keywords are available for defining Options in a filter definition Characteristic Possible pattern s C Pumps System V Printer Configuration 6 23 Page length LENGTH scaled decimal 66 Page width WIDTH scaled decimal 80 Pages to print PAGES page list 1 5 13 20 To find out which values to supply for each type of template that is for the pattern and replacement arguments for each keyword consider the following e The values for the INPUT and OUTPUT templates come from the file type that needs to be converted by the filter and the output type that has to be
448. umentation for details on all the possibilities The valid values are 0 no staples default 1 one staple top left 2 two staples left side The e flag controls whether offsetting the first page of each job in the finisher bin is desired The first page is offset toward the front of the finisher by 1 7 inches The offset function is ignored if staples are not off Separator sheets may be selected independently of offset The valid values are job offset ON job offset OFF default Lexmark Optra E310 Laser Printer Page Rotation Paper Source Page rotation selection is supported for the PCL 5 emulation by using the z flag of the qprt command z Bortrait z landscape Paper source selection is supported for both the enhanced PCL 5 emulation and the PostScript Level 2 emulation by using the u flag of the qprt command The input source number is the same for both PCL and PostScript urdanual feed utay 1 By default the banner and trailer pages come from the top tray To change the default change the values for the uH and or uT attributes respectively in the colon file to the value for the desired paper source The valid values are the same as for the u flag Do this by editing the virtual printer colon file by using the chvirprt command Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 95 4 96 Paper Size Paper Type Paper size selection is supported by using O and Q flags of the q
449. ur printing needs are not supported by the standard or other interface scripts provided in the etc Ip model file you can create your own printer interface script 6 10 To create a customized interface script do the following 1 Modify the standard interface script or one of the other scripts in etc Ip model For example cd etc lp model cp standard okidatanew Make sure that the custom interface script sets the proper stty modes terminal characteristics such as baud rate or output options Look for the section that begins with this line Initialize the printer port Modify the code in the standard interface script It sets both the default modes and the adjusted modes given by the print service or the user with a line similar to the following stty mode options 0 amp 1 This command line takes the standard input for the stty command from the printer port For example the following stty command example sets the baud rate to 1200bps and sets some of the option modes Guide to Printers and Printing stty parenb parodd 1200 cs8 cread clocal ixon 0 lt amp 1 3 Set the hardware flow control printer port characteristic The standard interface script does not set hardware flow control it is set according to your computer hardware The code for the standard interface script suggests where to set this and other printer port characteristics Look for the section that begins with this line Here you may want to
450. ure that the prefix field and the value of the entry field is always sent to cmd to exec enter 100 _L Qy 60 Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 45 Auxiliary Operations and Validation Operators Auxiliary operations for the SMIT dialog definitions determine the type of list and input required from the user The types of lists available in the dialogs are list multi select list range list option ring or multi select option ring The 1imits field operators that specify the type of auxiliary operation used by an attribute are L M G and R 4 46 Only one type of auxiliary operation is supported at a time The default is op type n The n value means that no auxiliary operation is permitted for the field F Guide to Printers and Printing Allows control of the cmd to list mode field of the sm cmd opt object The cmd to list mode field specifies how much of an item from a list should be used The list is produced by the command specified in the cmd to list field object For example if the cmd to list field produced the following list 60 6 line per inch 80 8 line per inch 66 Possible values for the F operator are a Get all fields This is the default value 1 Get the first field 2 Get the second field To instruct SMIT to retrieve the first field from the list enter 1007 1 F160 Specifies a range list The G operator gives the cmd_to_list_mode an r value The r value specifies that
451. ust be downloaded e lf the font is not resident on the printer it searches the host resident font directory to see if the requested font is available The only candidates for downloading are fonts listed in the map table that point download to readable files A Type 1 font is downloaded once at most for a single document even if it occurs multiple times in the DocumentFonts comment or PostScript file The downloading of fonts occurs only for the duration of the PostScript job However permanent downloading of fonts to the printer s RAM can be done with special PostScript programming techniques using the exitserver operator Requests for unlisted fonts or inaccessible files are ignored All requests are ignored if the map table cannot be read e If the font is available the filter takes the file for that font and prefixes it to the file to be printed e The filter sends the font definition file and the PostScript source file the file to be printed to the PostScript printer Font Cartridges and Character Sets 6 36 Printers differ in the way they print different font styles Some have font cartridges while others have preprogrammed selectable character sets The print service can minimize the impact of these differences on the users of the print service You can specify which font cartridge or character set is available with each printer When you list the font cartridges or character sets available you assign names to them The
452. uter if then else statement Both the if and the else pieces of this statement contain a chain of if then else then else statements The value of Wu which is a value for paper source based on O and u determines whether the if or the else piece of the outer statment executes if Wu is 1 or 2 less than 3 then the if piece executes otherwise the else piece executes It is in the final determination of wJ that the page length in pels is fixed The if piece of the outer if then else statement defining wJ selects a pel value from a range of non envelope paper sizes the else piece of the outer if then else statement selects a pel value from a range of envelope paper sizes Wu controls which piece of the if then else statement executes but once either the if or else piece has been chosen it is the value of Q that causes a pel value to be selected The five cases listed above work like this Case 1 Either the command line value of u or the default from the colon file 1 primary paper tray is returned to the evaluation of wQ The remaining escape sequences in the definiton of wQ test the value of Wu and select the value of one of sO s1 s2 s3 or s4 That value is in turn returned to the evaluation of wu If u is 1 or 2 then Q will be 1 non envelope paper size If u is 3 then Q will be 3 envelope paper size When the evaluation of wJ is resumed a u value of 1 or 2 will direct the process into the if piece of the Calculating Page Le
453. vailable to all the users on a system To do so you must know how and where to install these fonts using the guidelines described previously Because fonts are requested by name and stored in files the print service keeps a map file that shows the correspondence between the names of fonts and the names of the files containing those fonts Both of these must be updated when fonts are installed on the host To install host resident PostScript fonts do the following 1 Copy the font file to the appropriate directory The fonts available for use with PostScript printers reside in the usr share lib hostfontdir directory or other directories 2 Add to the map table the name of the font and the name of the file in which it resides Also in the hostfontdir directory you the administrator must create and maintain a map table that shows the correspondence between the name assigned to each font by the foundry the company that created the font and the name of the file in which that font resides A file name that begins with a slash is used as is otherwise the pathname is relative to the host font directory Comments in the map table are introduced by as in PostScript and extend to the end of the line For example to map the font called Palatino Bold add the following line to the map table Palatino Bold usr share lib hostfontdir The map table itself is in the usr share lib hostfontdir map file After this entry exists in the ma
454. value of the sh attribute is determined to be usr lib lpd pio etc pioburst usr lib lpd pio burst H ascii usr lib lpd pio etc pioformat Q var spool lpd pio G8l1ocal ddi ibm4029 asc lpl asc lpl usr lib lpd pio fmtrs piof5202 L J ul The pioburst command processes the header page template and pipes its output to the device independent formatter pioformat which in turn loads the digested version of the colon file for this virtual printer the argument to the 9 flag and the device dependent formatter piof5202 the argument to the flag There are three flags to piof5202 1 L Long lines should not be wrapped 2 J The printer should be restored to the state it was in before the header page was printed 3 u1 The header page should be drawn from paper tray 1 The value of the st definition is similar to the value of the sh definition Custom Header Pages The root user can create custom header pages for users by modifying the definiton of the sh attribute Since the spooler processes have access to the environment of the user that submitted the job to the spooler the root user can modify the portion of the sh attribute definition that specifies which header page template to process For example the H ascii in the above definition specifies which header page template should be processed and printed It can be replaced with a user environment variable of your choice such as MYHEADER as shown below
455. ve root authority Web based Sysytem Manager 1 At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers In the Web based System Manager Printer Queues window use the menus to complete the steps to configure a printer attached to the network with a Hewlett Packard JetDirect card and to add a queue You can also perform this step with the SMIT fast path smit mkpq After the print queues are successfully created their names are displayed Be sure to note any error messages before you exit Use the Printer Queues menus to customize the new print queue You can also perform this step with the SMIT fast path smit chpq Printers Print Jobs and Queues for Systems Administrators 2 7 Configuring a Print Queue for a File in the dev Directory Prerequisites e Read the documentation for your printer You may need printer specific information to connect and configure the printer e Review the configuration of your system e You must have root authority Web based Sysytem Manager 1 At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers In the Web based System Manager Printer Queues window use the menus to complete the steps to configure a print queue for a file in the dev directory and add a queue You can also perform this step with the SMIT fast path smit mkpq Note If the printer supports more than one type of print data such as PostScript and ASCII enter a print queue name for each print data type 2 After the p
456. veral ways Fonts may be stored permanently on a printer These printer resident fonts may be installed in ROM on the printer by the manufacturer If the printer has a disk fonts may be installed on that disk by you that is by the Print Service administrator Most PostScript printers are shipped with 35 standard fonts although less expensive models have only 13 A font may be permanently downloaded by being transmitted to a printer using a special PostScript programming technique using the exitserver operator A font downloaded in this way will remain in the printer memory until the printer is turned off Memory allocated to this font will reduce the memory available for PostScript print requests Use of exitserver programs requires the printer system password and may be reserved for the printer administrator This method is useful when there is continual use of a font by the majority of print requests serviced by that printer Fonts may be prepended to a print request by the user and be transmitted as part of the user print request When the document has been printed the space allocated to the font is freed for other print requests The font is stored in the user s directory This method is preferable for fonts with limited usage Fonts may be stored on a system shared by many users These fonts may be described as host resident This system may be a server for the printer or may be a system connected to the printer by a network Each user ma
457. verview for Users 1 13 Formatting Files for Printing pr Command The pr command performs simple formatting of the files you sent to be printed You pipe the output of the pr command to the qprt command to format your text Some useful pr command flags are d h String l Lines m n Width Character o Offset s Character t w Width Column Page 1 14 Guide to Printers and Printing Double spaces the output Displays the specified string enclosed in quotes instead of the file name as the page header The flag and string should be separated by a space Overrides the 66 line default and resets the page length to the number of lines specified by the Lines variable If the Lines value is smaller than the sum of both the header and trailer depths in lines the header and trailer are suppressed as if the t flag were in effect Merges files Standard output is formatted so the pr command writes one line from each file specified by a File variable side by side into text columns of equal fixed widths based on the number of column positions This flag should not be used with the Column flag Provides line numbering based on the number of digits specified by the Width variable The default is 5 digits If the Character any non digit character variable is specified it is appended to the line number to separate it from what follows on the line The default character se
458. width must be set to 80 and the data stream setto a for extended ASCII Add the flag tashkeel to print documents with diacritics The value stored in a filter attribute designates the command string for the specified filter Entries for a supported PostScript laser printer can include _ FIL COMMAND STRINGS FOR FILTER FLAGS 2 char lst f 2nd flag fn Command String for the n Filter usr bin psc is fp Command String for the p Filter bin pr 1 G l Sd w G w d F h 1I01 ia fb Command String for the b Filter usr bin bprt wSI w d 1 d tashkeel These same attribute values are stored in the colon file as follows 0555 PITS 269 f n usr bin psc is 270 fp bin pr 1 G l d w G w d F h 1I 1l ia The fd attribute is a typical filter attribute It is used to specify a DVI filter for the virtual printer Use SMIT or the chvirprt command to specify this filter For example to specify a DVI filter by using SMIT enter smit lsvirprt Select the desired virtual printer and type the following fd usr bin dvi to printer ip Guide to Printers and Printing where dvi to printer specifies the full pathname of the filter that converts the DVI output from tex to the format expected by the printer The ip designation forces the pass through pipeline the ip attribute to be used to process the print file instead of the ASCII pipeline ia attribute The pass through pipeline causes the output from the
459. work Information Service NIS Prerequisites e AIX 5 2 or later e IBM Directory Server and Client v4 1 or later Note IBM Directory is provided with the AIX base operating system media Planning to Set Up the Print Subsystem Setting up the print subsystem to use IBM Directory LDAP involves two steps First configure an IBM Directory LDAP server to store System V print information This server will act as a centralized repository for System V print information Second configure the host systems clients to use the IBM Directory server for System V print information Note The mkprtldap command that is used to set up directory enabled System V print on AIX can only be run by the root user The mkprtldap command only configures the IBM Directory server and client systems to use the IBM Directory for System V print information To add delete and manage printers print queues and systems run the directory enabled System V print commands dslpaccept dslpaccess dslpadmin dslpdisable dslpenable dslpreject and dslpsearch The directory enabled System V print commands are provided with the bos svprint file set which must be installed on both the client and server The client side configuration must be completed with the mkprtldap command before running any of the directory enabled System V print commands Configuring IBM Directory LDAP to Store System V Print Information To install and configure the IBM Directory server software on
460. xecutes BEGIN is assigned 189 END is assigned 223 and DIFF is assigned 35 which is the number of chosen lines FILE is assigned usr Ipp bos README The head command truncates usr Ipp bos README immediately after the last requested line The output is piped to the tail command which selects the last 35 lines of the truncated file and pipes them to the qprt command which will take input from stdin The qprt command submits the lines to the queue named asc Filter that Maps Linefeeds to Carriage Returns and Linefeeds Many users have written or purchased applications that prepare data streams to fill in the blanks on pre printed checks invoices bills of lading or other forms Printing these data streams requires precise control of the physical printer It is often the case that the job processing pipeline created by piobe inserts or deletes enough data from the original data stream that the output data no longer falls at the proper position on the pre printed form The root user can frequently use the Isvirprt command to set the value of the d attribute in the virtual printer definition to p On an ASCII queue on an IBM 4029 LaserPrinter this would cause piobe to select the ip pipeline to process the job The ip pipeline is for passthru printing which means the formatter filters uses the passthru routine to simply pass the input data stream through to the printer without modification This frequently removes all the printer control problems
461. xecution If the qdaemon is aborted it will be restarted by srcmstr Note Please do not attempt to stop the srcemstr daemon it controls other daemons running on your system Real Physical and Virtual Printers A real physical printer is the printer hardware attached to the system via a serial or parallel port or through a network connection such as a network terminal server When the real printer is attached via a serial or parallel port local to the system the printer device driver in the kernel communicates with the printer hardware and provides an interface between the printer hardware and a virtual printer A virtual printer is a set of attributes and their associated values that define a high level data stream such as ASCII or Postscript and the methods for processing that data stream This does not include information about how the real printer is attached to the host computer or about the protocol used for transferring bytes of data to and from the real printer The piobe backend uses information stored in the virtual printer definition to control print job processing The physical storage medium of the sets of attributes and their associated values is called a printer colon file 3 2 Guide to Printers and Printing Spooler The base operating system spooler is a collection of programs configuration files and data files that provide the following functions or services e Provides for the construction of queues which are
462. xx lxx file FALSE header never trailer never access both backend usr lib lpd piobe If you use this queue in this state you do not see anything written to a file or printed anywhere except maybe for error messages When the qdaemon sets the backend piobe into execution it passes piobe an open file descriptor based on the value of the file parameter in etc qconfig When that value is set to FALSE the file descriptor is not passed The eventual recipient and user of the file descriptor is whatever program is pointed to by the mo attribute The default program pointed to by the mo attribute is pioout and when jobs are put on the queue when it is in this state pioout will not have a valid value for stdout and the processed job will simply vanish At this point you can use Isvirprt to select the asc virtual printer definition for modification Viewing Formatting or Modifying Virtual Printer Definitions on page 4 121 A prompt similiar to the following displays To LIST attributes enter AttributeNamel for all attributes To CHANGE an attribute value enter AttributeName NewValu FORMAT and EDIT an attribute value enter AttributeName v EDIT the attribute file enter v terminate press Enter o o o o Assuming the ts print program was installed in usr bin enter the following at the prompt mo z usr bin ts print A 9 19 129 101 P 11 Jobs submitted to the asc queue will now be
463. y the N command line option is used to specify the number of copies desired This method will cause that many copies of the entire print job to be submitted or queued to the print system Since the Optra Se supports collation internally options were added to support it and the number of copies of each page internally This functionality is limited by the amount of memory installed in your printer and the size of the job The W option determines how many copies of each page is desired where is the number of copies The S option controls whether collation is desired The default is or not The main advantages of using the W and S options are to conserve printer subsystem usage and allow the printer to handle multiple copies instead of sending copies to the printer Using the S options with the W also allows copies of each page in a row if that is desired Note that using N and W simultaneously is allowed This would result in N print jobs with W copies of each page in each job Printer Plotter and Spooler Subsystem Programming 4 103 Separator Pages Output Destination The E flag controls separator pages The valid values are 0 1 2 and 3 which represent NONE BETWEENCOPIES BETWEENJOBS and BETWEENPAGES respectively The separator page source defaults to TRAY 1 and is specified via the uS attribute The valid values for uS are the same as for header and trailer pages uH and uT respectively excep
464. y the colon file underlying the virtual printer definition For a system on which a queue of each type has been defined issuing of the Isvirprt command results in the following list and query being displayed queue names and device are chosen by the root user at queue creation time No Queue Device Description 1 asc lxx 4029 IBM ASCII 2 gl lxx 4029 Plotter Emulation 3 pcl lxx 4029 HP LaserJet II Emulation 4 ps lxx 4029 PostScript Enter number from list abov press Enter to terminate gt From this list the root user enters the number corresponding to the virtual printer that he wants to view format or modify The following message and prompt are then displayed To LIST attributes enter AttributeNamel for all attributes To CHANGE an attribute value enter AttributeName NewValu o FORMAT and EDIT an attribute value enter AttributeName v o EDIT the attribute file enter v To terminate press Enter There are several options at this point one of which is to press Enter and terminate the Isvirprt command The other options are as follows e Enter an asterisk and press Enter to view a list of all attributes in the colon file along with their text descriptions from the message catalog e Enter the name of an attribute and press Enter to view that attribute only along with its text description from the message catalog e Enter the name of an attribute an and a value
465. y piobe on the remote server The etc locks Ipd file contains the process ID of the currently running instance of the Ipd daemon If a machine running the Ipd daemon becomes inoperable the ID for the Ipd daemon may have to be removed before the system is restarted The error messages lpd lock file orduplicate daemon indicate that the ID must be removed Controlling the Ipd Daemon Controlling the Ipd daemon includes starting and stopping the Ipd subsystem and changing the characteristics of the Ipd subsystem You can use Web based System Manager type wsm and then select Printers or use the SMIT or System Resource Controller SRC commands to control the Ipd daemon There are three ways to start the Ipd daemon If it is not currently running you can start the daemon at any time You also have the option of having the Ipd daemon start at system restart or to have it start both at the current time and at system restart The same options are available to stop the Ipd daemon stop now stop at system restart or stop both now and at system restart You can run the Ipd daemon with DEBUG with SYSLOG with both DEBUG and SYSLOG or with neither To control the Ipd daemon with Web based System Manager type wsm and select Printers then select the desired options from the Printer Queues window menus To control the Ipd daemon with SMIT type smit 1pd then select the desired options from the SMIT menus To control the Ipd daemon with the SRC use
466. y request fonts in the document to be printed This method is useful when there are a large number of available fonts or when there is not continual use of these fonts by all print requests If the fonts will be used only on printers attached to a server store them on the server If the fonts are to be System V Printer Configuration 6 33 used by users on one system who may send jobs to multiple printers on a network store them on the users system The print service provides a special download filter to manage fonts using the last method in the list The print service can use troff width tables for the 35 standard PostScript fonts that reside on many PostScript printers for use by the dpost program Obtaining a List of Printer Resident Fonts Most PostScript printers come equipped with fonts resident in the printer ROM Some printers have a disk on which additional fonts are stored A list of the Type 1 fonts in ROM or on disk of an attached PostScript printer can be obtained from the printer manufacturer s documentation For PostScript printers attached through a serial port a list of these fonts can also be generated using the postio command and a PostScript program romfonts ps To obtain a list of printer resident fonts for a PostScript printer attached to a serial port do the following 1 Obtain the device on which the PostScript printer is connected lpstat v Given a system on which the PostScript printer prlocal is attached th
467. ystem prompt type wsm then select Printers 2 In the Web based System Manager Printer Queues window use the menus to select or type values for required attributes such as the name of the device the queue where the device will be attached and the path name for the printer backend program 3 Provide additional information as prompted You can also perform this task with the following commands smit mkquedev or mkquedev d QueueNam q QueueNam a Attribute Value You may need to use the a flag several times to fully configure a print queue device Adding Plotter Support with 5080 Prerequisites e The plotter must be physically attached to your system e The plotter device must have already been added smit Command The 5080 Attachment Adapter plotter backend is accessible with the enq command after you use this procedure to identify the plotters 1 At the system prompt type smit pq mklque 2 Atthe NAME of Queue to Add prompt type plta to define serial port a 3 At the NAME of Device to Add prompt type 2 10 Guide to Printers and Printing plota to define serial port a 4 For BACKEND PROGRAM Pathname type usr lib lpd plotgbe gswa 9600 5 Atthe NAME of Queue to Add prompt enter the following to define serial port b pltb 6 At the NAME of Queue to Add prompt type pltb to define serial port b 7 For BACKEND PROGRAM Pathname type usr lib lpd plotgbe gswa 9600 8 Attach the plotter to either
468. ystems Administrators 2 25 Changing or Showing Printer Connection Characteristics Prerequisites To perform this task you must be one of the following e A user with root authority e A member of the printq group Web based System Manager 1 At the system prompt type wsm then select Devices 2 In the Web based System Manager Devices window double click on a computer object to open its Properties Information such as device name type interface type and status display You can also perform this task with the SMIT fast path smit chprtcom Changing Showing Pre Processing Filters This procedure describes how to change or show the command strings that you can run to pre process print files A pre processing filter consists of a command string that you pass to a Korn shell to filter a file before it prints There are pre processing filters for each of the values that can be specified with the qprt command f flag or with the Ipr command FilterOption flags Prerequisites To change or show pre processing filters you must be one of the following e Auser with root authority e A member of the printq group Web based System Manager 1 At the system prompt type wsm then select Printers 2 In the Web based System Manager Printers window double click on the Print Processor icon From the Selected menu choose Properties Information on changing showing pre processing filters will be displayed in the Layout tab of

AIX 5L Guide to Printers and Printing - Support On Line

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents